10 day trip uk

10 Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

This 10-day england itinerary takes you on a tour of the most famous sights in the country, plus a few hidden gems.

If you’re planning a trip to the United Kingdom, it’s hard to know where to start. The first big decision is do you fancy spending all of your time in England, or perhaps venture to Wales or Scotland too? While Britain isn’t a huge island (you could drive from Land’s End in the south to John O’Groats in the north in under 15 hours) the scenery is varied and you’ll want to take your time.

If it’s your first visit, I’d recommend focusing on England, and spending at least a week travelling around. You can move at a fast pace and visit a new place each day, but if you fancy a more leisurely trip, you’ll probably want to allow a minimum of 2 days in some of them, especially when you factor in the travel time.

Coming up is a 10-day England itinerary packed full of the best sights in the country. I’ll admit it’s been really difficult to choose where to include. There are SO many other places that are equally as beautiful, but this route gives you a nice variety.

From London’s museums and iconic landmarks, to the epic beauty of Dorset’s Jurassic Coast, Bath’s history and the landscapes of the Lake District, this itinerary has it all! If you want to wander through streets that could feature in Harry Potter or soak up the romance of where The Holiday was filmed, there are some iconic movie locations on this route too.

The easiest way to travel around England is by car. It’ll give you the flexibility to get off the beaten track, visit some unique destinations and pack as much into your trip as your time allows. However, if you’d rather use public transport, all of these locations are accessible by trains or buses too.

10-Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

2 days in london.

There’s SO much to see in the UK’s capital, you could easily spend a week exploring the city. For this 10-day England itinerary I’ve suggested you spend 2 days in London and pack in as much sightseeing as you can.

If it’s your first time in London you can’t miss the key landmarks. Watch the changing of the guard at Buckingham Palace, see London from a different angle from one of the 32 pods on the London Eye, check the time at Big Ben, explore Westminster Abbey, wave to Nelson in Trafalgar Square, see Tower Bridge open for a tall ship, see the crown jewels sparkling inside the Tower of London and step inside St Paul’s Cathedral. It sounds like a lot, but you can see so many sights with a long walk along the River Thames.

One of the best ways of doing all of this is on a bus tour. We really like this vintage open-top bus tour which is just oh so quintessentially British. This tour has a guide explaining all the top sights.

Alternatively, another tour we love is this half-day bike tour . In 4 hours you get to ride around London taking in all the sights – it’s a really cool way of seeing London, especially on a bright sunny day.

If you love museums, take a trip to South Kensington and venture inside the impressive Natural History Museum and Science Museums. They both have lots of interesting interactive exhibits and are great for families.

For tasty food, take a wander through Borough Market or Camden Market. If you love architecture, how about a little tour of Notting Hill. The pastel coloured houses are like something out of a kid’s book. Or for a great view, walk to the top of Primrose Hill. It’s one of our favourite spots on a sunny day. 

The easiest way to get around London is using public transport. You can either pick up an Oyster Card (a contactless travel card) or use your own contactless bank card.

1 Day In Brighton

After a great few days in London, it’s time to escape to the coast. Brighton is one of the best seaside day trips from London by train (journey takes one hour) and a gorgeous place to explore on foot.

There’s the pier which is crammed full of fun rides, amusement arcades and food outlets wafting the sickly scent of donuts through the air. There’s a mammoth pebbly beach, lined with little art galleries, gift shops and restaurants.

For a great view of Brighton, you could take a trip on the i360 – a tourist attraction which offers great views of the area. Plus, there are some gorgeous hotels on the seafront if you want to stay overnight.

One of our favourite things about Brighton is the shopping scene. The Lanes and North Laine are full of character, and are THE place to visit for independent stores, quirky cafes and restaurants. This is a great place to shop for vintage jewellery and bohemian clothing.

Once you’ve done all of that, you’ll definitely have earned some fish and chips on the beach. Just watch out for the seagulls overhead – they’re always hungry!

1 Day In Dorset

I was debating whether to recommend two days in Cornwall, or break up the journey with one day in Dorset. Needless to say, Dorset won! I visited last year for the first time and would definitely suggest you include a stop there on your 10-day England itinerary.

Dorset is known for its dramatic coastline, known as the Jurassic Coast. I’d recommend the clifftop walk from Lulworth Cove to Durdle Door – England’s iconic rock arch. If you have time, you could also do the walk from Studland Bay to Old Harry Rocks. It’s another beautiful spot, with huge chalk stones standing in the water.

Alternatively, if you fancy a more relaxing day you could drive to West Bay to see the enormous limestone cliffs, which show the falling sea levels from over 175 million years ago. Or enjoy the adorable English villages of Milton Abbas or Abbotsbury.

Both have main streets lined with charming thatched cottages, many decorated with pretty plants and flowers. It’s got a quaint English charm! 

Alternatively, if you’re basing yourself in London for your England itinerary, then this is an amazing 5 day tour of Dorset and Cornwall . On this tour EVERYTHING is taken care of for you, so you don’t need to worry about transport, tickets or anything else like that.

1 Day In Cornwall

Cornwall is one of my favourite parts of England. This southern region of mainland Britain is where you’ll find a spectacular rugged coastline, top surf beaches and some of the best fresh seafood in the country. It’s a walker’s paradise, and a great place for day hikes along the South West Coast Path .

The Cornish coastline is stunning – it’s no wonder it’s one of the top places for people to go on holiday in UK. For beach time head to Fistral Beach (Newquay’s famous surf beach), Bedruthan Steps (epic rock views), Pedn Vounder (might have you fooled for the Caribbean) or Kynance Cove (with its incredible rock formation).

Alternatively, you could focus on Cornwall’s food scene. There are lots of great restaurants dotted around the county, but the most famous town for gastronomy is Padstow .

Legendary chefs Rick Stein and Paul Ainsworth have launched a culinary empire in the town, and there’s a nice mix of high-end to budget friendly options. Most of them involve fresh fish and seafood brought in daily by fisherman in Padstow Harbour. Read our guide to the 13 best places to eat in Padstow before you go! 

1 Day In Bath

Bath is one of England’s prettiest cities. Most buildings here are constructed from Bath stone – a beige limestone which gives the city a certain uniformity. It’s a very walkable city, and one of my top recommendations would be to get lost in the pretty streets.

There are a few highlights not to be missed. If you’re a lover of history, the city of Bath offers a lot. First time visitors must visit the Roman baths . It’s incredible to learn about the ancient ways of the Romans and their impact on modern civilisation.

For the best views, I’d recommend climbing the tower of Bath Abbey (bookable as part of a guided tour). It’s a tiring climb up, but well worth it once you see the stunning cityscapes from the top.

Alternatively, an evening cruise on the water with a glass of prosecco is a great way of seeing the city too!

If you’re craving relaxation after a busy few days of travelling, you could spend some time enjoying the soothing waters of Thermae Bath Spa. There are several pools, saunas and steam rooms. One pool is on a roof terrace and offers lovely views of the city too!

Bath is a sophisticated city, with great places to eat and drink, lovely independent shops and plenty of history, so it’s s great addition to your 10-day England itinerary!

1 Day In The Cotswolds

The Cotswolds is one of the most picturesque regions of England. If you’ve grown up watching films set in cute English villages, you can bet 99% of the time they were filmed in this area! You know, the beautiful snowy Christmas scenes in The Holiday and Bridget Jones? Yep, they were filmed in the Cotswolds.

If you’re only spending one day in the area as part of a bigger 10-day England itinerary, I’d recommend visiting Bibury and walking down Arlington Row. After that, head to Moreton in Marsh, Bourton on the Water, Upper and Lower Slaughter and Broadway.

The best way to enjoy this area is on a little road trip, stopping off at towns and villages, then having a little country walk before enjoying a traditional cream tea. There are a number of beautiful accommodation options in this area too, from adorable B&Bs to huge country manor houses.

Alternatively, if you want everything taken care of for you, then this is one of the most popular tours of the Cotswolds from London . It is packed full of all the top things to do in the area, and it’s one of the most recommended Cotswold tours out there!

2 Days In The Lake District

After spending time in The Cotswolds, it’s time to head north. It’s a long journey, so it might be best to add in a travel day at this point if possible.

The Lake District is England’s largest national park and covers 912 square miles. It’s stunningly beautiful, with rolling hills, pretty lakes and some of the best restaurants in the country.

With just two days in the area, we’d recommend a mix of hiking, water activities and good food. There are lots of Michelin starred restaurants in the Lake District , so you could treat yourselves to an extra special meal. Our favourite was Cottage in the Wood, but there are a few others including Simon Rogan’s L’Enclume that we’d love to visit one day!

In terms of hiking, one of our favourite routes is up to Cat Bells. The views from up there are absolutely incredible. We also really enjoyed the hike from Pooley Bridge to Aira Force waterfall . The route passes high over the hills, with epic views of Ullswater from the top.

If you like getting out on the water, then there are plenty of opportunities in this area. You could kayak, hire a sailing boat, try stand up paddle boarding, go canyoning or enjoy a leisurely journey on board the historic Ullswater Steamer.

Another fantastic Great British tour is of 10 lakes in the Lake District . Here you get to hop from each lake seeing which one is your favourite – it’s a

1 Day In Cambridge

You’ve made it to the final day of your 10-day England itinerary, and it’s time for a trip to Cambridge. History lovers will adore walking the grounds of famous university colleges here. The architecture is amazing and feels very grand. The city centre has plenty of shops, restaurants and cafes to enjoy too.

One of the top things to do in Cambridge is go punting . It’s not an activity that goes on in other cities really – Cambridge is THE place for it. There’s nothing quite like gliding down the River Cam learning all about the history of Cambridge while on a punting tour.

As you relax on board the boat you get to see some of the sights that are tricky to view properly from the banks of the river, including the spectacular Bridge of Sighs, the Mathematical Bridge and the back of King’s College.

As another thing to do, it’s really popular to take a tour of the colleges too for that real Cambridge university experience.

It’s a beautiful city to explore, and a great place to round off an exciting and varied 10 days in England.

Fancy going further afield? Head to Scotland and visit Edinburgh Castle, the Royal Mile or venture out into the stunning Scottish Highlands.

Alternatively, you could cross the border into Wales and visit Snowdonia or the Gower Coast. There’s so much to see in Britain – who knows where you’ll end up!

Enjoyed this 10-day England itinerary? Pin it for later…

The Ultimate 10-Day England Itinerary: 3 Perfect Routes

Last Updated on January 3, 2024

by Maggie Turansky

Disclaimer: This article contains affiliate links. That means if you click a link and make a purchase, we may make a small commission. As an Amazon Associate we earn from qualifying purchases. For more information, see our privacy policy.

Planning the perfect England itinerary can get a bit overwhelming, especially when you’re looking at exploring the country outside of the capital. There is so much to see and do in England that you can be forgiven if you feel slightly dazed when trying to figure out how to pack everything into a short period of time. However, if you’re planning to spend 10 days in England, there are tons of options available for you that can take you all over the country.

Far too many visitors to England set their sites only on London and fail to realise all that lies elsewhere in the country, from beautiful beaches to historic towns to stunning natural vistas — England has it all.

So if you’re interested in mapping out the perfect 10-day itinerary you’ve come to the right place. We’ve lived in and travelled around England extensively and have a lot of knowledge about where to go and how long to spend in each amazing destination in this beautiful country.

Table of Contents

Getting To & Around England

The road and rail systems in England are well-developed, but it can still take some planning to figure out how you want to get around.

First and foremost, you need to figure out which airport or city you will be flying into. If you’re planning on including London on your trip to England (or even if you’re not), then it’s probably easiest to fly into the capital, however, it is worth noting that there are a total of six international airports that serve the greater London area – these include Heathrow, Gatwick, Luton, Stansted, London City and Southend.

If you are coming from any further than continental Europe, then it is likely you will only fly into Heathrow or Gatwick, located to the southeast and south of Central London respectively. Getting to central London from any of the area’s main airports is straightforward and easy, as there are many different options available.

Once you’ve figured out your plan to get to England, you need to find out how you plan to get around. As I mentioned earlier, the public transit system in the vast majority of England is incredibly well-developed and easy to navigate.

As a general rule, if you’re planning on spending a good amount of time in cities, you can plan to rely solely on the public transport system and your own two feet to get around. This holds especially true for London, but can apply to most major metropolitan areas in England.

When you venture outside of the capital or other cities to enjoy the countryside and rolling hills of England, is when you may want to consider renting a car. While you don’t really need a car in the cities, having your own vehicle when exploring national parks or smaller villages is generally preferable as it can give you an infinite more amount of flexibility and control over your itinerary.

Driving in England is safe and easy, as the roads are in fantastic condition and people are generally very courteous drivers.

Keep in mind for those coming from abroad that they do drive on the left-hand side of the road in England and while this may seem daunting for those who are not used to it, it takes surprisingly little time to get the hang of it — especially if there is other traffic on the road!

If you’re planning on hiring a car while in England, we recommend booking through Rentalcars.com. This platform aggregates prices across many major car hire companies, ensuring that you get a great deal for your rental car.

It’s also worth considering taking out an excess insurance policy through a third party like iCarHireInsurance which will typically be cheaper compared to taking out the equivalent insurance through the car rental company.

If you don’t want to rent a car for your England road trip itinerary or just plan to get one for a couple of days but not for the entirety of your trip, then you’ll likely be wondering what the best way to get between cities is in England.

The rail network is going to be the most comfortable and efficient way to travel between English destinations and the system is extensive and incredibly easy to use. However, trains can be quite expensive in England if not booked far enough in advance. To avoid overpaying on a train ticket, we suggest using Omio to book your journeys well in advance.

If you want to save some money during your trip to England, then the bus is your best bet. Coaches in England are frequent and extensive and can cost a fraction of the same route on the train, however, they are not as comfortable and can be a fair bit slower depending on the route. Again, you can book coach routes online here.

London and Southwest Itinerary

This first itinerary for England has you exploring London and some of the most vibrant regions and cities to the west and along the coast. Though this itinerary can be done by public transport, it would be best done if you rented a car on the fourth day when leaving London.

Days 1-3: London

The best place to begin any trip to England is in its historic and vibrant capital city, London. As one of the largest cities in Europe, London is packed in the brim with cool and interesting things to see and do and there is no way that you will be able to pack it all into a mere three days , so it’s best not even to try.

Instead, concentrate your first day on the sites of central London, including Trafalgar Square, the National Gallery, Green Park, the Palaces of Westminster, Big Ben and Westminster Abbey. Take a walking tour if you want to get your bearings and get some historical context for all the sites you’re seeing.

On your second day, visit the Tower of London, gaze in awe at the Tower Bridge, walk across the ultra-modern Millennium Bridge to the Tate Modern and visit St Paul’s Cathedral and Borough Market.

And on your third day in London, visit the incredible British Museum (the Egyptian exhibit is particularly fascinating if you ask me!), before browsing the shops on Oxford Street and in Covent Garden before wandering through the eclectic and trendy SoHo neighbourhood.

For visitors who plan to visit a lot of paid attractions, buying a London Go City Pass will save you money on entrance fees.

If you’re not interested in seeing more of the city, you could opt for a day trip to countless places including Windsor Castle, Oxford, Cambridge , Bath, the Seven Sisters or even to York. You can visit these places independently via coach or train or take a day tour if you’d prefer a guide.

Though three days in London won’t really allow you to venture past the city centre and to see anything much past the main tourist sites, it can still give you an excellent feel for the city (plus plenty of this to visit when you inevitably return!)

Where to Stay in London

Hotel Edward – A great mid-range option in Paddington, west London, this is a great place to stay if you want to be situated close to central London. They have countless great rooms available.

Sanderson Hotel – A hip luxury option in SoHo, this hotel is located only a quick dash away from Oxford Street. They have countless plush rooms on offer and a number of other amenities including a restaurant/bar, gym, spa and many others.

Astor Hyde Park Hostel – This hip hostel is perfect for budget and solo travellers in London. Located centrally close to Hyde Park, it is well situated to explore a lot of London’s top attractions, has fantastic common areas, and offers both dorm and private rooms.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more London hotels!

Days 4-5: Bristol

From London, it’s time to head west to the trendy city of Bristol. This city is often overlooked by tourists and it really is a shame — it really has so much to offer. Though you can easily visit Bristol as a day trip from London, it is worth spending a night here, especially because you can spend your first day exploring all of the amazing sites on the way to the city.

On your way to Bristol, make sure to make a number of stop-offs and detours in order to really pack a lot of the highlights of West England into a short period of time.

A short detour from the motorway to Bristol will lead you to the iconic neolithic site of Stonehenge and a bit further afield, you can visit Salisbury with its famous cathedral.

And just a bit before you hit Bristol proper, make sure to spend a good amount of time exploring the beautiful city of Bath . This historic spa town has been an important settlement since Roman times and there are lots of cool things to see and do here.

Once in Bristol, there are lots of things to see and do in order to really get to know the city, but you can pack in into one day easily, you can take a guided tour or go about independently.

Learn about Bristol’s history at the fantastic M Shed museum or learn more about its maritime history at Brunel’s SS Great Britain museum.

If you’re interested in street art, you will be delighted to hear that the famous artist Banksy got his start in Bristol and it has a thriving arts scene. Bristol also has a wonderful food and craft beer scene and it can be enjoyed while exploring the revitalised area of Wapping Wharf.

Where to Stay in Bristol

Victoria Square Hotel Clifton Village – A plush boutique hotel located in Bristol’s lush Clifton suburb, this is a great place to stay if you’re looking for a mid-range option in the city. They have a range of rooms available and a hearty breakfast included in the nightly price.

The Bristol Hotel – The ideal luxury hotel in Bristol, this place is located within easy walking distance of the city’s top attractions and they have a number of clean comfortable and chic rooms on offer.

The Full Moon Backpackers – An ideal option for those solo and budget travellers amongst us, this hostel is a great choice in Bristol. They have a number of dorms and private rooms available, fantastic common areas and a fantastic laid-back vibe, perfect for exploring Bristol!

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Bristol hotels!

Days 6-8: Cornwall

On your sixth day of this itinerary, it’s time to drive even further southwest to one of the most beautiful and sunny places in England – Cornwall!

The southwestermost region of the country, Cornwall has long been a favourite holiday destination for locals but foreign tourists rarely venture this way, and it’s incredibly hard to see why — there is so much see and do!

Cornwall is most famous for its beaches, but there is a lot more to it as well. If you’re a nature lover, there are countless walks to go on. If you want to try your hand at surfing, make sure to hit the waves in Newquay, the capital of the sport in England! History buffs will delight in the castles and ruins that dot the region as well.

One of the most famous castles is St Michael’s Mount, just outside of Penzance, which is situated on its own island accessible by a causeway that appears as low tide. If you’re a fan of Arthurian legend, then make sure to visit the dramatic ruins of Tintagel, rumoured to be the birthplace of this legendary British ruler.

Spending two or three days in Cornwall is enough to really see a lot of the region and get a good feel four it, but there is always more to see if you spend more time!

Where to Stay in Cornwall

Palma Guest House – Situated in the heart of St Ives, this is an excellent place to base yourself in Cornwall. They have a number of comfortable rooms available and are located within easy walking distance of all this artsy town has to offer!

Selkies NQY   – Located in Newquay just a few hundred metres from the beach, this is a fantastic luxury option for those visiting Cornwall. Great for a romantic couples getaway, they have a number of luxe rooms available.

Lifeboat Inn – Situated on the bay in the lovely artist’s town of St Ives, this is a great place to stay for couples or families alike. They have a number of spacious rooms available and an option to include breakfast in the room rate.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse other places to stay in Cornwall!

Days 9-10: Brighton

And finally on this 10-day southwestern England route, round out your time in the lovely coastal city of Brighton ! Located due south of London, Brighton is about a five-hour drive from Cornwall, but we recommend taking an entire day on the journey as there are so many incredible stops along the way .

Take the time to enjoy such places like Dartmoor National Park in Devon, the Jurassic Coast in Dorset, the beautiful seaside city of Bournemouth, the historic port city of Portsmouth or even the lovely New Forest in Hampshire before arriving in Brighton.

Once in Brighton, take the time to explore the city centre and the lovely, albeit rocky, beach. Of course, no trip to Brighton would be complete without enjoying yourselves at the iconic Brighton Pier.

If you want to get a bit more active and are not interested in exploring the city much, then the iconic walk along the Seven Sisters cliffs is easily accessible from Brighton. This is one of the most beautiful day hikes in the UK and will take you along the stunning rim of the famous white cliffs of this region of England.

Conveniently, Brighton is located only about a thirty- to forty-minute train ride from Gatwick Airport and other London area airports are easy to access from the city as well, so it makes for a perfect place to end your trip to England.

Where to Stay in Brighton

Artist Residence, Brighton – This quaint boutique hotel is perfect for those looking for something a bit more hip and trendy while staying in Brighton. They have a number of great rooms available, a great location and fantastic amenities including great common areas and a tapas restaurant on site.

Seadragon Backpackers – A great backpackers hostel perfect for budget travellers, they are well-located and have both dorm and private rooms available. They have great common areas and a central location perfect for exploring the best of what Brighton has to offer.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Brighton hotels!

London and North England Itinerary

If you’re interested in visiting London and then heading up north during your ten days in England, then this is the perfect itinerary for you. Exploring the historic cities and natural areas of the North, you’re sure to enjoy this route through England.

Again, this is another itinerary where it may prove helpful to have a car for some of it, especially for the bit through the Lake District National Park . If you want to save some money, consider renting a car for a few days from York before continuing on an England by train itinerary.

Spend your first three days of this route in the capital of London, following the same daily activities as mentioned in the Southwest England route above.

Days 4-5: York

From London, hop on a train or hire a car and drive north to the lovely walled city of York. If you do happen to drive (and it is recommended!), then make sure to spend the day stopping off at all of the incredible sites along the way and enjoying the gorgeous English countryside.

Some of these include the lovely university city of Cambridge , the historic city of Worcester, Warwick Castle, Robin Hood’s home of Nottingham or even the incredible Peak District National Park in Derbyshire in central England. You could, perhaps, even make a stop in Oxford or at the incredible Blenheim Palace. Or you could detour to Stratford-upon-Avon – the hometown of Shakespeare!

On the next day, plan to spend it exploring the city. You can see a lot of York in one day and some of the highlights include walking along the city walls, exploring the incredible York Minster, taking in the ruins of St Mary’s Abbey in the Museum Gardens, wandering along The Shambles and learning about the city’s history at the York Castle Museum.

If you’d rather get out into nature, then explore more of rural Yorkshire with a trip to the North York Moors National Park or the Yorkshire Dales National Park — these parks are perfect for nature lovers and Bronte fans alike!

Where to Stay in York

The Queens Hotel – A great boutique option, this place is centrally located, has a number of comfortable rooms on offer and a great and hearty full breakfast is available at an additional cost.

The Grand, York – This is the place to stay in York if you want to be in the lap of luxury during your time in the northern city. They have many plush rooms to choose from, countless luxurious amenities, and a great location for easy sightseeing.

Astor York – An excellent, highly-rated hostel in York, this place is perfect for budget backpackers and solo travellers. They have a range of both private rooms and dorm beds available and are located within ten minutes of York’s historic centre.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more York hotels!

Days 6-7: Lake District

If you didn’t get out and enjoy the natural splendours of Yorkshire, it’s time to do so now in one of England’s most famous national parks — the Lake District. Located in Cumbria, this beautiful area is filled with incredible lakes, mountains and charming villages.

You can spend your time here going on countless walks — there are walks for all skill and fitness levels. There are also countless charming and historic villages to explore, classic pubs to warm up in, and just some absolutely beautiful scenery to enjoy.

Even if you’re not much of an outdoor lover, there s something for everyone in the Lake District and it is well worth taking the time to head out here before heading down to your final destination on this 10-day route through England.

Where to Stay in the Lake District

The Cavendish Arms – A cosy, mid-range option in the Lake District is this historic pub, located in the lovely village of Cartmel. They have a number of clean and comfortable rooms available and a great breakfast available to enjoy each morning.

Embleton Spa Hotel – If you are after a luxury stay in the Lake District, then this is the perfect choice for you. Located in an 18th-century farmhouse in the beautiful countryside, they have a number of plush rooms available, private apartments, and countless amenities to make your stay a great one.

Kendal Hostel – A great option if you’re travelling on a tight budget or solo, this hostel is one of the best-rated in the Lake District. Situated in a historic Georgian townhouse in the town of Kendal, they have a range of dorm and private rooms available and good self-catering facilities.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Lake District hotels!

Days 8-10: Liverpool

And finally on the North England route, end your trip in the historic, vibrant and wonderful city of Liverpool .

Perhaps most famous for being the birthplace of a little-known band called The Beatles, there are plenty of Fab Four-centric sites to see in this city, however, there is so much more in this historic city.

Liverpool has seen a bit of a resurgence in recent years, especially around the newly refurbished Royal Albert Dock which is packed full of trendy restaurants and shops.

You can also learn about Liverpool’s seafaring history as a port city at the Merseyside Maritime Museum. Also worth a visit is the harrowing International Slavery Museum.

Football fans will rejoice in the chance to tour Anfield Stadium , the home to Liverpool FC and Fab Four fans are sure to enjoy the Beatles Story or even a Beatles Tour.

You can even take the time to take a day trip to the nearby city of Manchester if you want to see more Northern English cities.

Where to Stay in Liverpool

The Dolby Hotel – A good option for mid-range travellers. this hotel has a great location overlooking the River Mersey. Located within easy walking distance of the top sites of the city, they have a number of rooms to choose from and breakfast included in the price.

Titanic Hotel Liverpool – If you want a luxurious stay in Liverpool, then look no further than this swanky hotel. Situated a stone’s throw from the top attractions in the city, they have countless amenities and wonderful, comfortable rooms available.

YHA Liverpool Albert Dock – A fantastic backpacker’s hostel, this is the perfect choice for solo and budget travellers. It is located in the centre of the city close to the top attractions and sites, they have both dorm beds and private rooms available and great common areas.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse other hotels in Liverpool .

Northern England Itinerary

If you’ve been to London already and would rather spend your ten days in England somewhere outside of the capital, then this is a great route for you. Still beginning and ending in London, this route is great for those who are planning a trip to the other parts of England and don’t want to concentrate on the capital city.

Day 1: London

Begin your itinerary in London and take a day to explore an area of the city that you haven’t had the chance to yet — there is always something to see and do in London. Take in the street art in Shoreditch, stuff your face at Broadway Market if it’s a Saturday or get lost in the expansive Kew Gardens or Richmond Park .

There are far too many things to do in London that it’s worth spending at least a day in the city even if you’ve visited before.

Days 2-3: York

From London, it’s time to head to York. Follow the suggestions in the itinerary above for the ideas for how to spend your time in York.

Days 4-5: Lake District National Park

From York, head out into the great wide open and enjoy the lovely scenery and villages of the Lake District National Park for two full days.

Days 6-8: Liverpool

And from the Lake District, head to historic Liverpool and enjoy all of the fun things there are to see and do in this historic city.

Days 9-10: Cotswolds

On your final two days, it’s time to head back down south to explore an incredibly charming area of England within easy reach of London – the Cotswolds .

This region, located to the northwest of London, is famed for its quintessentially English towns with thatch-roofed homes and historic pubs. It is the perfect place to end your England itinerary.

Take the time to explore quaint villages like Bourton-on-the-Water, Painswick, Burford, Chipping Campden and countless others. These are some of the most beautiful towns in all of England and are sure to transport you back in time.

If you want to get out into nature, then make sure to check out the Cotswolds AONB (area of outstanding natural beauty) which is full of walking trails and lovely, bucolic vistas.

If you’re looking for a quaint and quiet place to round out this epic route through England, you seriously cannot go wrong with spending some time in the Cotswolds before flying home from London.

Where to Stay in the Cotswolds

The Lamb Inn – This charming pub located in the village of Bourton-on-the-Water is the perfect place to rest your head in the Cotswolds. Oozing with charm, they have a range of comfortable and clean rooms available and a great pub downstairs to grab a pint a great bite to eat.

The Fleece – Located in the village of Witney not too far from Oxford, this is a great boutique hotel to stay at in the Cotswolds. T hey have a range of cosy and comfortable rooms available and a fantastic breakfast cooked each morning.

The Old Stocks Inn – Situated in the charming village of Stow-on-the-Wold, this lovely inn is the perfect place to stay if you’re on the hunt for a luxury stay in the Cotswolds. They have a number of beautiful rooms to choose from and lots of other amenities to make your stay fantastic.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Cotswolds hotels!

There are so many options of places to visit and things to see during your 10 days in England but, hopefully, these three great routes are able to help you plan the trip of your dreams! From historic cities, gorgeous natural scenery, inviting pubs and a wonderful coastline, England has so much to offer visitors — so make sure to see more than just London!

Are you planning a trip to England? Have you visited before? Let us know in the comments!

Related Posts:

9 Best Towns to Stay in Cornwall

Is London Expensive? London Trip Cost Guide in 2024

Visit Oxford or Cambridge: Choosing a London Day Trip

About Maggie Turansky

Maggie is a co-founder and writer for The World Was Here First. Originally from the US, she has lived in five different countries and has travelled to dozens more, both solo and with her partner, Michael. She particularly loves exploring Spain and spending time in the Caucasus and the Baltics. Read more about Maggie

Hi I am planning to ciné to the uk Dec/Jan 20 days

My plan so far is London 4 days 29/12-2/1. Then Bath as a base to tour the south. Can you recommend how many days in the south based at Bath then where in the North or ? I was planning on hiring a car in Bath or London.

Also open to any addition suggestions like quick visit to Ireland or Scotland if you feel it is with timeframe.

Thank you A

Hello Maggie, enjoyed your article on visiting England. Our family is planning to visit England from July 9 through July 20. We are from Boston, MA. Wanted your recommendation as we would also like to visit Scotland. How should I plan my iteneray.

Thank you, Khuzema Safri (Khuz).

Thanks for your comment! If you want to visit Scotland, you may find this article helpful in planning your trip: https://www.theworldwasherefirst.com/london-scotland-ireland-itinerary/

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

a packed life

Travel * Lifestyle * Planning

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit

• Wednesday, Sep 12th, 2018

If you are thinking of traveling to the UK, you may be wondering what to include in your trip.  If you have just ten days, it’s near impossible to see everything you want to explore, and making choices is challenging.  But fear not!  We’ve put together a selection of 10 day itineraries tailored to different interests and tastes.  Here you’ll find a 10 day UK trip itinerary for you.

• 1 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: How Best To Enjoy It
• 2 What Do You Want From Your UK Trip?
• 3.1 London to Edinburgh
• 3.2 From York to Shakespeare’s Stratford-Upon-Avon
• 3.3 The Cotswolds, Oxford, Bath And Stonehenge
• 4.1 Culloden and Loch Ness
• 4.2 The Road To Skye
• 4.3 Mallaig, Fort William and Oban
• 4.4 Glasgow and Edinburgh
• 5.1 Jurassic Coast
• 5.2 Bath, Stonehenge and Avebury
• 5.3 Walking In The Peak District
• 5.4 Windermere And The Lake District
• 6.1 Birmingham
• 6.2 Hereford And The Black And White Villages
• 6.3 Ludlow and the Shropshire Hills
• 6.4 Shrewsbury And Chester
• 7 Option 5:The Celtic Connection
• 8.1 Exploring London
• 8.2 Day Tripping From London
• 9 How’s Your 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary Looking?

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: How Best To Enjoy It

When I was researching this article to sift out my best recommendations, I found a variety of suggested itineraries.  One in particular had me puzzled.  In one day it featured both Cardiff and York.  Now both are fine cities, but in practice, a day like that will feature an early start, late finish and a lot of motorway services.  In my youth, I worked evenings in a hotel in Exeter.  Tour buses full of US visitors would arrive at around 7pm.  At that time, all that was left for them to do was to stroll around Cathedral Yard, taking in the Guildhall, the beautiful cathedral and Tudor Mol’s Coffee House.  Then dinner, bed and on the road again.  To my mind, that’s no way to travel.

So buckle up for our slower paced options.  There’s no doubt that some of them will involve long days.  But I’ve aimed to give you at least four hours to savour in every spot.  Real hours, not ones where all you can do is fit in a quick walk, dinner, shower and bed.  Here’s how to visit the Brits and enjoy the experience.

Getting Ready To Plan Your UK Trip?  Why Not Pin This For Later!

What Do You Want From Your UK Trip?

The starting point for your itinerary is always going to depend on your preferences.  For that reason, I’ve put together a number of different itineraries based on some common interests.  You’ll notice that some destinations tick many boxes.  That’s great if you are traveling as a group with different interests.  You can pick and mix to your heart’s content.

I’ve also made different itineraries for different styles of travel.  If spending hours on the road makes your bones crunchy, and the stress of driving on a different side of the road is a chore, then there are choices here for you.  We’ve checked out  the best way to find affordable public transport in the UK too.

Do you like to get under the skin of fewer places, or skim the surface of all the best things?  Both options are entirely feasible.  So let me set out the buffet of tasty UK treats for your 10 day itinerary.

Option 1: UK’s Greatest Hits: A Fast Paced Trip To The Most Visited Places

London, Edinburgh, York, Stratford-upon-Avon, the Cotswolds, Oxford, Bath & Stonehenge

Chosen from the cities and sites most loved by overseas visitors, this itinerary will have you taking in a broad sweep of the UK.  You won’t get much rest on this trip, but I promise you’ll see a lot of the highlights.  Consider this a box of chocolates from which you’ve picked your favourites and had to leave the rest.

London to Edinburgh

Having flown in to London, the first night sees you taking the overnight sleeper train from London Euston to Edinburgh Waverley , an experience in itself.  Don’t forget your neeps and tatties for dinner.  Arriving bright and early at breakfast, there’s time to visit Edinburgh Castle, wander Princes Street and the Royal Mile and explore Holyrood Palace.

From York to Shakespeare’s Stratford-Upon-Avon

On the morning of Day 3, take the train to York (around two and a half hours).  You’ve got time to meander The Shambles, investigate the old city walls and York Minster and check out the railway museum.  You might want to fit in a very English afternoon tea at Betty’s.  On the morning of Day 4, pick up your hire car for your journey to Stratford-Upon-Avon.  You should be there by lunch time, ready to explore Shakespeare’s Birthplace and the rest of the Tudor town.

The Cotswolds, Oxford, Bath And Stonehenge

Day 5 is a short drive out to the Cotswolds via Shipston-on-Stour; I’m recommending Broadway with its Tower and the beautiful Stow-on-the-Wold.  Day 6 has you driving south to Oxford, legendary city of dreaming spires.  If you’re feeling brave, take a punt (a flat bottomed boat) out on the river.  On day 7, you’re heading south to Bath, home to the legendary Spa, and a lot of beautiful Regency architecture.  Early the next morning, catch Stonehenge at its most beautful, then spend the rest of day 8, heading back to London for your final two days in the capital.

Option 2: Touring Scotland The Brave

Inverness, Isle of Skye, Fort William, Oban, Glasgow, Edinburgh

This is a trip for the most avid of scenery lovers.  For this trip, you can either fly in to the first and last cities, or let the train rock you gently on the overnight sleeper from London to Scotland and back.  If you’ve taken the overnight sleeper from London on Day 1, you’ll be in Inverness by early morning.  Spend the morning of that second day exploring the city, including its castle and cathedral.

Culloden and Loch Ness

On the afternoon of Day 2, pick up your hire car, and head off to Culloden to explore the historic battlefield and find the real flavour of Scottish history.   On Day 3 you’re on the trail of the legendary Nessie at Loch Ness.  If you want to drive all the way round the Loch, we’re talking 67 miles, so make your choices of a whole circuit or selected highlights.

The Road To Skye

On Day 4, it’s time to take the road to the Isle of Skye.  Don’t hurry this journey, as it’s truly one of the most beautiful to be had, traveling over the sea to Skye.  You’ll want to spend time at Kyle of Lochalsh on the way,  meeting the brooding and beautiful Eilean Donan Castle.

Mallaig, Fort William and Oban

On Day 5, it’s time to meander back to Mallaig, visiting Loch Morar and Loch Nevis.   Then onwards to Fort William, where you can take the Jacobite steam train as featured in the Harry Potter films.   Day 6 is for exploring Oban and its historic distillery, plus the War and Peace museum.

Glasgow and Edinburgh

Day 7 of this 10 day UK trip itinerary features a drive back to Glasgow, where you can return the hire car.  The city is famed for its Victorian and Art Nouveau architecture, and is home to a lot of Scotland’s cultural institutions.  At whatever point you wish, catch the train to Edinburgh (taking around an hour) and spend the last part of your tour there.  Visit Edinburgh Castle and Arthur’s Seat, explore Holyrood House, and maybe have dinner in the Cafe Royal.  On the night of Day 9, it’s time to board the sleeper train for London.

Option 3: The UK’s Big Outdoors

Stonehenge and Avebury, the Jurassic Coast, the Peak District, and the Lake District

If your heart is made glad by big open spaces, this is the itinerary for you.  To make the most of this itinerary, it is best to drive, giving you the greatest amount of time in each spot.

Jurassic Coast

On your first day, pick up your hire car and head west to Dorset and the Jurassic Coast.  Visit the UNESCO World Heritage Site at Durdle Door, a natural rock formation.  Man O’War beach next door is also spectacular.  You have two days here to explore.

Bath, Stonehenge and Avebury

On the morning of Day 3, you’re on the road to Bath, enjoying the spa town that afternoon and evening.  Early next morning, you’re heading out to explore Stonehenge first, then Avebury, so see some of the UK’s most talked about sites.  Book your overnight stay in the glorious countryside here.

Walking In The Peak District

On the morning of Day 5, it’s time to drive north.  You’re heading to the Peak District, one of the UK’s National Parks.  Don’t forget to stop off in Bakewell, the famed home of the Bakewell Tart and the Bakewell Pudding, and a charming town in its own right.  You’ve got two days to explore here, maybe taking in walks on Mam Tor or visiting Kinder Scout.

Windermere And The Lake District

After breakfast on Day 7, you’re driving north west to enjoy the beauty of the Lake District, surely one of the highlights of this 10 day UK trip itinerary.  Take a steamer on England’s biggest lake, Windermere, or climb its highest peak at Scaffell Pike.  Late on day 9 or early on day 10, drop off your hire car in Carlisle, and then let the train take you back to the bustle of London on your last day.

Option 4: The UK’s Best Kept Secrets

Birmingham, Hereford, the Welsh Marches, Shrewsbury, Chester

If you’ve already visited the UK before and seen many of its famed attractions, maybe you’re looking for something a little different.  Walk this way!

Either fly direct or catch the train to Birmingham , England’s second biggest city.  Described as the city of a thousand trades, Birmingham is packed with Victorian architecture and a vibrant cultural pulse.  Your two days here are spend exploring and maybe taking the Tolkien Trail to see The Shire, inspiration for one of Birmingham’s most famous residents.

Hereford And The Black And White Villages

Pick up your hire car on the morning of Day 3 and it’s a gentle 90 minute drive to Hereford, maybe stopping off en route to enjoy the Malvern Hills.  Hereford’s cathedral is home to the Mappa Mundi, one of the oldest traveler’s maps in the world.  Also here you’ll find the Cider Museum, a tudor museum in the Old House and a lot of winding streets to explore.  On Day 4, you’re heading into the countryside on the Black and White Village Trail, full of timbered and half-timbered houses.  Spend that night in Ludlow, centre of the Welsh Marches and once the capital of Wales.

Ludlow and the Shropshire Hills

When you wake up refreshed on Day 5, you’ve got time to explore its Castle, once home to the Princes in the Tower.  Ludlow is a fine foodie destination, so be sure to enjoy all it has to offer.  Day 6 of this 10 day UK trip itinerary sees you heading north to appreciate the beauty of the Shropshire Hills.  Church Stretton is your point to access these walks, and you can also go hang-gliding or gliding here.

Shrewsbury And Chester

Day 7 is for Shrewsbury , the historic border town on the River Severn with a Welsh bridge and an English bridge.  Explore the fascinating narrow streets or shuts, take a boat trip or wander the cathedral.  On Day 8, you’re heading north again to Chester.  The city walls here are well worth exploring and the narrow shopping streets with “upstairs and downstairs shops”.  On your last day, drive back to Birmingham and drop off your car, ready for your flight home.

Option 5:The Celtic Connection

London, Edinburgh, Belfast, Cardiff

If you want your trip to cover all of the United Kingdom, then you’ve got time to country hop in 10 days.  There are many ways to put this itinerary together, so I’ve worked out my preferred option.  Here’s how to visit England and Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland in 10 days.

On Day 1, you’ve got a flight from London to Belfast.  Here you’ve got the Titanic Museum, Carrickfergus Castle, Ulster Hall for music and W5 Science Centre to entertain you.  Fly across to Edinburgh on Day 3 of this 10 day UK itinerary, where you have until the Day 5 to take your fill of the Royal Mile, Edinburgh Castle and the Royal Yacht Britannia at Leith.

On Day 6, it’s time for your flight to Cardiff.  Check out the castle, the numerous beautiful Victorian arcades, and the sweet Norwegian Church on the waterfront at Cardiff Bay.   On Day 8, take the train back from Cardiff to London, a two hour trip.  It gives you a chance to see some of the countryside on your way to the capital.  All the charms of London are then before you until your flight home.

And A Final Bonus Option: London and Beyond

London with side trips to Canterbury, Brighton, Lincoln, Oxford and Birmingham

If the thought of packing and unpacking every night really doesn’t appeal, then I’ve got an alternative for you.  This itinerary means that you stay in one place, simply day tripping your way to some alternative destinations for a day at a time.  In between each trip, you get a day to explore London at your leisure.

Exploring London

I’d recommend choosing an area of London to explore on each of your 5 days there, and seeking out the attractions of that particular location on the day.  For example, choose Greenwich for a day for the Cutty Sark and the Royal Observatory.  Choose Southbank for Tower Bridge, walking the Thames and The Shard .

Day Tripping From London

In between you get to go day tripping.  I’ve recommended Canterbury, crammed with history, and a very walkable city.  There are the seaside treats of Brighton , with its pier and the opulent Royal Pavilion.  Birmingham has shopping to rival London, but on a much more compact scale.  Lincoln is woefully underrated, with its fine cathedral and one of the few copies of the Magna Carta.  And who could miss Oxford, legendary city of dreaming spires and with flavours of Hogwarts if you have Potterheads in your group.  All of these day trips are no more than an hour and a half on the train from London, giving you plenty of time to explore as part of your 10 day UK trip itinerary.  We’ve collected up more alternative day trips from London here.

How’s Your 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary Looking?

Has our UK trip planner been useful? Have we found all your favourite spots?  Added any new ones?  If you don’t have 10 days to spare, why not check out our recommended top 10 UK city breaks .    If you want more inspiration on places to enjoy in England, then check out these recommendations for Essentially English Experiences from some of our favourite travel writers.  If you’d like to delve a little deeper into new place to explore, I’ve shared some of my favourite hidden gems in England .

Planning Your UK Trip?  Pin This For Later!

Author: Bernie

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

I accept the Privacy Policy

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

19 thoughts on “ 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit ”

Wow wish I could spend 10 days in the UK!

Hey, what a great post, you have really picked some great options for travelling within the U.K. Edinburgh is one of my favourite cities and I’m glad it made it on to your list, however I’m a bit sad that Liverpool never made it, one of the best cities in England!

I was so tempted by Liverpool, what with the Maritime Museum, and the fantastically decorated Philharmonic pub with mermaids and mermen. Plus the Gormleys all looking out to sea at Crosby. I wonder if I can sneak it in…

All these itineraries sound amazing, especially the Scotland one! I would love to visit Edinburgh and Glasgow so thanks of all the travel inspiration! And all those pictures look stunning! 🙂

The Scotland one is based on a trip we did a while back, and I’d so love to do it again. I still remember that moment we headed across to Skye and the car went silent as we appreciated all that beauty before us.

Wow, love all the different options! Especially the Big OUtdoors and scenic Scotland ones. I did a 10-day just England trip last year. Spent 4 days in London and felt like we hardly scratched the surface!

The Big Outdoors really is lovely – so many treats for the eyes and all the rest of the senses. I need to get back to Scotland too.

Over a decade ago, two of my daughters and myself spent a week backpacking through the UK. We loved it! So much so that it sparked a hiking bug and two of us have since climbed many mountains, including Kilimanjaro! We hiked through Bath and Wells and fount the UK countryside to be quite beautiful. Thank you for a trip down memory lane with your photos of the areas we visited.

You picked some beautiful places! I remember going to see the comedy Hot Fuzz at the cinema and being totally frustrated at recognising its setting but not being able to place it. We had to Google as soon as we got out. Wells, of course!

This is a lovely itinerary! If my visa wasn’t rejected I would have been to UK already 🙁 Anyway saving it for the future trip to UK

I live in London and your posts inspired me to travel more in the UK. I have been to many of your suggested places (but I am sure I will go back again) but I have never done my way to the Isle of Sky. Thanks for the great ideas and I will use your suggestions for planning a nice trip up there.

Thank you for the inspiration you’ve provided 🙂 I would visit for 2 weeks to start, leaving lots of time to hikes in Scotland and ancient sites!

Bonus days! Hiking in Scotland is a massive treat for sure.

I haven’t yet been to the UK, but, wow, it looks like there is really a lot to see. And so much nature. While most of people visit only cities.

I’ve been in UK last year but for business purposes. I’ll be back and will see those places myself!

Thanks, dor sharing some important information about UK That I had never been visited my plans to the UK are still On-going hope to travel this month of August Meanwhile I will bookmark this page as this will be so helpful for my travel trips!

I do hope you can make it here in August. It will be a great time to explore, and you have so many choices to make about where to visit. Glad to be of help!

Is it possible to do any of these itineraries using only public transport? We have never driven on the left side of the road and are not sure we want to.

That’s a definite yes! Some will be easier than others, so I might suggest a couple of modifications. The bonus option – London and beyond – sees you day tripping out of London, and that is really easy to achieve by train. Have a look at some of the suggestions here for day trips from London: https://apackedlife.com/the-13-best-alternative-day-trips-from-london/ . You could manage anywhere from Cardiff to Oxford or Brighton – even Manchester if you were happy spending a little longer on the train. If you don’t want to haul luggage, you’d be able to store some of it in London and just take an overnight bag to make for some overnighters.

To get a flavour of the Celtic Connection (Option 5), it’s easy to fly to Belfast if you wish or fly/take the overnight sleeper train to Inverness. From Inverness you could make your way on the train to Edinburgh, rich in heritage, then continue your journey down the east coast to York for Vikings, and the magnificent Shambles before returning to London. You can reach Cardiff in around 2 hours from London by train (London Paddington) and that opens up more routes into Wales for further exploration… even up the coast to take a ferry to Ireland if that sounds good to you.

Option 4 – which I called best kept secrets – is really easy by train. Head straight to Birmingham by rail from either London Euston or London Marylebone. You have local train services which will take you to Hereford, Shrewsbury and Ludlow from there. The Welsh Marches train line runs from Shrewsbury to Hereford and there are lots of fascinating places served by small stations on the way. I’d highly recommend pretty Ludlow, full of foodie treats and with stunning architecture.

If there’s anything else I can help with, do let me know. I don’t drive due to an eye condition, so I’m always looking for public transport options.

10 Days in England Itinerary for First-Timers

The UK is filled with historical and cultural destinations as well as a whole host of stunning landscapes so it would be a shame to just stay in one location when visiting England. In order to get a real taste of what England is all about, you want to travel the length and breadth of the country, visiting sights such as Buckingham Palace, the Tower of London, the Roman Baths, Oxford University, and Shakespeare’s hometown, Stratford-Upon-Avon. This jam-packed England itinerary does just that with visits to London, Bath, Oxford, Stratford-Upon-Avon, and York.

Spending 10 days in England is enough to give you an insight into the country’s cuisine, culture, and community spirit and allows you to tick off some real bucket list destinations. While you’ll still only scrape the surface of what England has to offer in this 10-day itinerary, it is a great whistle-stop tour of some of the best bits and it will certainly make your England-loving friends and family back home jealous!

This itinerary perfectly balances a range of destinations with some stints of travel, so you don’t feel as though you’re spending the whole time on the road but are not just stuck in one place either!

Read on to find out more about this 10-day England itinerary so you can start planning your trip…

Disclaimer: This post contains affiliate links. This means that should you click on certain links, and then subsequently purchase a product, I will receive a small commission.

Table of Contents

TRAVEL TIPS

🚗 Rent your car in advance

with Rentalcars and make your trip as convenient as possible

✈️ Book your flight in advance

To find the cheapest flights and most suitable option, use WayAway

🧾 Get your tickets and tours

with Viator and get the most out of your journey

10 days in England: Day One  – Arriving in London

You’ll likely be tired after your journey but make the most of every hour you have and get yourself out onto the streets to explore the most iconic locations of good old London Town!

Buckingham Palace and Trafalgar Square

Make your way to Trafalgar Square where you’ll find Nelson’s Column towering 52 meters into the air and guarded by four stone lions. Take some moments to admire the other statues, especially ‘Fourth Plinth’, before making your way down the famous tree-lined street ‘The Mall’ for your first glimpse of Buckingham Palace – Be sure to get your timing right so you can witness the famous Changing Of The Guards ceremony too!

Don’t just admire the Queen’s home from the outside though, during the Summer and selected days in Winter and Spring, when the Queen is not at home, you can go on a guided tour of the State Rooms and garden.

Love the Royals? Skip a visit to Churchill’s War Rooms and visit the Royal Mews, a working stables where the royal horses and carriages are kept, and The Queen’s Gallery which displays an array of artwork from the Royal Collection on a rotating basis.

Opening Times:

Changing Of The Guard – 10:40 am (for 11 am) daily during Summer. Mondays, Wednesdays, Fridays, and Sundays Spring, Autumn, and Winter. (Weather Permitting)

The State Rooms 9:30 am to 7:00 pm (closes at 6:00 pm in September)

The Royal Mews 10.00 am to 4.00 pm (closes 5.00 pm March to November)

The Queen’s Gallery 10.00 am to 5.30 pm (opens 9.30 am in the summer)

You might be interested in: – Changing of the Guard & Buckingham Palace Tour – Buckingham Palace: The Queen’s Gallery Entrance Ticket – Buckingham Palace: The State Rooms Entrance Ticket – Buckingham Palace: The Royal Mews Entrance Ticket

Churchill’s War Rooms via St James’ Park

From Buckingham Palace, enjoy a stroll through St James’ Park and make your way to Churchill’s War Rooms, the labyrinth of corridors and rooms located below the streets of Westminster where history was made. As well as seeing where the Prime Minister and his war cabinet ran the government (and directed the war) during the bombing raids, you’ll be able to learn more about the life and legacy of Winston Churchill at the museum.

Visit Churchill’s War Rooms and immerse yourself in the rich history of World War II on this enriching and emotionally stirring tour of London Westminster with a knowledgeable guide

Admission: £21. Included in London Pass

Opening hours: 9.30am to 6.00pm (1 July-31 August: 9.30am to 7pm)

Big Ben, The Houses of Parliament, and Westminster Abbey

Parliament Square is just a short walk from the Churchill War Rooms and contains the Houses of Parliament, Westminster Abbey, and Big Ben.

Travel Tip – Big Ben is undergoing major repair work and will be covered in scaffolding with the bell only chiming for special events and 24/7 until 2021 – Delay your trip if you want the iconic shot in front of Big Ben looking its best!

Westminster Palace (the site of the Houses of Parliament) was built in 1840 and is a truly impressive building – You can book a 90-minute guided tour to see inside the 1,000-year-old Westminster Hall with a visit to the House of Commons and the Lords Chambers whilst learning how parliament works.

Westminster Abbey (the church where William and Kate got married) is located next to the Houses of Parliament and has been the site of all of the royal coronations since the time of William the Conqueror. It is the final resting place of 17 monarchs including Henry V, Mary I (Mary Tudor), Elizabeth I, Mary Queen of Scots as well as notable historical figures Isaac Newton, Charles Darwin, Charles Dickens, and Rudyard Kipling.

If you have the time and want to learn more about this historic Gothic church, guided tours are available.

Houses of Parliament £28 (cheaper if booked in advance)

Westminster Abbey £22. Included in London Pass. Tour costs an additional £5

Click here to book your Westminster Abbey entry tickets.

Cruise the River Thames

End your first day in London by cruising down the River Thames – There’s no better way to see the city as you cruise past Big Ben, the Tower of London, the London Eye, and Shakespeare’s Globe Theatre.

A range of cruises are available, get the basic sightseeing cruise if you’re on a tight budget, or splash out a bit with a Music Cruise by City Cruises where you can dance the night away as you pass by London’s most iconic sights. If that sounds a bit too strenuous, go on one of the more traditional dinner cruises – You can’t go wrong no matter which you choose.

I recommend: Westminster to Greenwich River Thames Cruise.

10 days in England: Day Two – London

The second day of our England itinerary takes us sightseeing along the river Thames, checking the major sights.

St. Paul’s Cathedral

  Rebuilt in the Baroque style after The Great Fire of London in 1666, St Paul’s Cathedral cannot just be admired from the outside. Pass through the historic doors and admire the view across London from the Stone and Golden galleries then, with your traveling partner, try out the Whispering Gallery where, due to the architecture, you can whisper on one side of the dome and be heard on the other. If you’re into architecture, stop to see the exhibition on Sir Christopher Wren, the architect of St Paul’s, and learn about the challenges he overcame with his unique design.

Admission: £18 including a guided tour. Included in London Pass

Opening hours: 8:30 am to 4:30 pm

Click here to book your fast-track tickets to St. Pauls’s Cathedral.

The Tower of London

This 900-year-old castle and fortress is most remembered for being a prison. Guarded by the Yeoman wardens (aka the Beefeaters, kitted out in their regal red and black uniforms emblazoned with ER), the tower is made up of 3 buildings; the Jewel House where the Crown Jewels are stored, the Royal Armories located in the White Tower, and the ‘Bloody Tower’, the prison where Anne Boleyn, Sir Walter Raleigh, the Two Princes, Lady Jane Grey, and even Guy Fawkes were all imprisoned.

Hear the history and stories from the Beefeaters on a guided tour as you see the ravens, the crown jewels, the Royal Mint. Also explore the bloody side with instruments from the torture chamber and Tower Green, the place where the prisoners were executed.

Admission: £26.80. Included in London Pass

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 5.30 pm

Click here to book your Tower of London and Crown Jewels Exhibition Ticket .

Tower Bridge

You can’t visit London and not have your photo taken in front of this iconic landmark! Walk across the bridge and then admire the view from the banks of the River Thames below.

If Tower Bridge has always fascinated you, go beyond admiring the view and visit the Tower Bridge Exhibition, as well as learning about the engineering of this historic bridge you’ll get to see the old engine rooms and can walk the glass walkway 44 meters above the River Thames.

Admission: £9.80. Included in London Pass

Click here to book your tickets to the Tower Bridge. 

Measuring in at 309.7 meters high, this 95-floor skyscraper towers above the city with views reaching out for 40 miles on fine days. Go see the city of London from a different angle at the two viewing platforms, one on the 69 th floor and one on the 72 nd floor (the highest viewing platform in London). Splash out if you can afford it and enjoy lunch, afternoon tea, or a romantic dinner at The Shard. Wondering if it’s worth it? Read about my Shard experience here.

Admission for The View from the Shard: £30. Included in London Pass

Opening hours: 10 am to 10 pm Thursday to Saturday, 10 am to 7 pm Sunday to Wednesday

Click here to book your tickets to The Shard. 

The Southbank

Make your way to the River and take a scenic stroll down the dynamic tree-lined South Bank, the heart of London’s cultural scene, passing some of the most iconic London sights on the way. This pedestrianized riverside pathway is lined with street food vendors, cafes, and pubs, fairground rides, and so much more. Pass by London Bridge, Southwark Bridge, the Tate Modern, Oxo Tower Wharf, Waterloo Bridge and so much more. If you’re good for time you might choose to stop off at Borough Market or the Tate Modern before making your way further round the river to the London Eye.

The London Eye

Keen for more aerial views of the city? Hop on one of the pods at the London Eye, England’s most popular paid attraction and the tallest wheel in Europe and enjoy the 360-degree view above Westminster. Pods have audio commentary so you know exactly what you’re looking down upon with views reaching as far as Windsor Castle (25 miles away!) on clear days. You can read about my London Eye experience here.

Click here to book your tickets to the London Eye. 

Admission: £27

Opening hours: dependent on the season, check online for details.

10 days in England: Day Three – London

Spend the day enjoying London’s finest museums. You won’t be able to see them all (unless you stick to Kensington and pop in to see the best bits of the Natural History Museum, the Victoria and Albert, and the Science Museum) so pick one or two to focus on based on your interests, and know that you’ll have to come back to London to cover all of the top museums!

The British Museum

One of the best museums in the whole of the UK, the British Museum displays over 2 million years of human history with arts and antiquities from around the world – Indeed, a visit to the British Museum can allow you to travel to all corners of the world without leaving London! See the Rosetta Stone, Egyptian Mummies, the Parthenon Marbles, Roman Mosaics, and so much more not forgetting the temporary exhibitions.

Admission: Free

Tate Modern

If modern and contemporary art is your thing, lose yourself in the massive Tate Modern gallery where you’ll not only find paintings but photography, film, performance, and live art exhibits too. Galleries are organized by movement I.e surrealism, minimalism, abstract art, pop-art, etc with works by Dali, Miro, Picasso, Matisse, Cezanne, Pollock, Warhol, and many others.

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 6.00 pm (closes at 10 pm on Friday and Saturday)

Natural History Museum

Beloved for its dinosaur exhibition, the Natural History Museum teaches you everything about planet Earth (and beyond) and how human’s evolved. Learn about earthquakes and get on the earthquake simulator to see how it feels to have the earth truly move, see chunks of moon rock, a dodo skeleton, the largest gold nugget in the world and so much more. The museum is divided into 4 zones: Green for birds, insects, fossils, and minerals. Blue for dinosaurs, mammals, reptiles, and amphibians. Red for Earth, the planets, and the universe. Orange (only April-October) for the Wildlife Garden. Plan what areas to focus on before you go to make the most of your time!

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 5.50 pm

V&A Museum

The Victoria and Albert Museum, known affectionately as ‘The V&A’ is the place to go if you want to indulge in decorative arts and design. Its 7 miles of galleries contain ceramics, textiles, post-classical sculptures, glass, jewelry, furniture, and more. Highlights include Tipu’s Tiger, the earliest known photograph of London from approximately 1839, The Great Bed of Ware (mentioned in Shakespeare’s Twelfth Night), Raphael’s Cartoons (not cartoons as we know them but a series of tapestries commissioned by Pope Leo X) and more.

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 5.45 pm

Science Museum

Discover the history and technology of medicine, nuclear power, electricity, and transportation including the space age at this fascinating hands-on museum with a 3D IMAX cinema, an interactive flight simulator, and discovery motion theatre alongside all the exhibits. See the oldest surviving steam locomotive, the first jet engine, a full-scale model of the Beagle 2 Mars lander, a replica of Sputnik 1, the Apollo 11 flight plan, proto-computors and so much more.

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 6.00 pm

The West End

End your day of culture by heading to the West End to see a show. Enroute you can window shop at Oxford Street and Covent Gardens and get a selfie in Leicester Square, perhaps there will be time for a drink in Soho before or after the show too.

The West End is London’s equivalent of Broadway and is home to more than 40 theatres so there are plenty of shows to choose from including the long-running classics such as Phantom of the Opera (Her Majesty’s Theatre), Les Misérables (the Queen’s Theater), and Mousetrap (St Martin’s Theatre) plus comedy and an array of other shows and entertainment. The London Palladium is the most iconic and quintessential West End theatre whilst the London Coliseum is one of the largest theatres in London, no matter where you go or what you see, be sure to dress up!

10 days in England: Day Four – Bath

It’s time to leave the bright lights of London behind and head South-West to the historical city of Bath, the former home of  Jane Austen. Famed for its history, literature, art, and Georgian architecture, the UNESCO World Heritage city was founded in the 1 st century by the Romans who built a reservoir to control the natural thermal spring water, building the city around the baths from which Bath gets its name.

How To Get from London to Bath  

Train: Direct trains go from London Paddington to Bath Spa (just a few minutes walk from the city of Bath) approximately every 30 minutes.

Time: 1.5 hours

Cost: From £15.50

Bus/Coach: National Express has coaches departing every 90 minutes from 7.30 am until 11 pm from Victoria Coach Station to Bath Spa bus terminal (located next to the train station). Megabus also run a service from Victoria Coach Station to Bath.  

Time: 2 hours 20 minutes

Cost: From £5

You might be interested in: Bath: 1.5-Hour Walking Tour with Blue Badge Tourist Guide

The Roman Baths

Considered one of the greatest religious spas of the ancient world, allow yourself 2 hours to explore the Roman Baths which consist of the Roman Bath House, the Roman Temple, the Sacred Spring, and the museum. You’ll see the Great Bath, the saunas and plunge pools, even the changing rooms. There is an audio tour to help you understand what you’re seeing but during peak times a free guided tour takes place on the hour, every hour. Try the natural water from the spa water fountain (if you dare!) at the end of your visit.

Admission: £14.40-£19.80 depending on the time of year.

Opening hours: November-February: 9.30 am-6 pm. March-October 9 am-5 pm with selected late opening until 7 pm over Easter and 9 pm end June-August.

Located next to the Roman Baths, the 7th-century abbey towers above the city and is one of the finest and largest examples of Perpendicular Gothic architecture in the West Country.

Step through its historic doors to admire the interior with its stunning stained glass windows and vaulted ceilings (accessible when there are no services taking place), and be sure to climb the 212 steps to the top of the tower to admire the view across Bath whilst also getting to see the ringing chamber and bell chamber and getting to sit behind the clock face. If you want to get an in-depth understanding of the abbey, guided tours are available lasting 45 minutes.

Admission: Tower £8

Opening hours: Monday 9.30am-5.30pm, Tuesday-Friday 9am-5.30pm, Saturday 9am-6pm, Sunday 1pm-2.30pm and 4.30pm-6pm

Afternoon Tea

You simply must stop to enjoy afternoon tea in Bath, there are numerous quaint and historic tea rooms around the city but Sally Lunn’s is a must if you can get in. This tearoom is located in the oldest house in Bath (circa 1483) and serves the famous ‘Sally Lunn Bun’ which is a semi-sweet bread roll though they also serve cakes, scones, and those quintessentially British cucumber sandwiches!

Royal Crescent

One of Bath’s most iconic landmarks, walk in the footsteps of Bath’s high society as you see the 30 terraced Georgian houses built in a 152-meter long sweeping crescent facing an attractive green. Though the cars spoil the scene somewhat, the Royal Crescent will likely look familiar to you if you’re a fan of period drama for it has been a film location for the 2008 film The Duchess and the ITV Drama Persuasion.

Optional Extra – Learn more about the Royal Crescent whilst seeing what these houses would have looked like inside during the 18th century with a visit to the Bath Crescent Museum.

The Jane Austen Centre

Learn all about the famous author Jane Austen and the time she spent in Bath at the Jane Austen Centre, a museum located in an original Georgian townhouse. Fans will know that Bath featured within several of her novels and played an important part in her life and her writing, here you can learn more about the life and works of Austen from experienced Regency-dressed characters.

Admission: From £11

Opening hours: 9.45am-5.30pm

10 days in England: Day Five – Salisbury and Stonehenge

Getting from bath to salisbury and stonehedge.

Train: Take the direct train from Bath Spa to Salisbury train station with South Western Railway or Great Western Railway and then jump on the hop-on-hop-off Stonehenge Tour Bus which leaves the station every 30-60 minutes calling at Salisbury Cathedral, Old Sarum, and Stonehenge.

Time: 1 hour (to Salisbury Train Station)

Cost: Train From £11, Stonehenge Tour Bus from £10

The order in which you see/do things will depend on your timed entrance to Stonehenge and whether you’re making your way independently to Salisbury or are part of an organized trip to Stonehenge.

One of the most iconic landmarks in England, Stonehenge is a mysterious place with its huge standing stones that measure 4 meters tall and 2 meters wide. Though the stones of this prehistoric monument can no longer be touched, and a walk around will be some distance away unless you buy a special ticket, its magical mysterious history will still rub off on you and you wonder what were they for, and how did they move them?!

At the nearby visitor center (a free shuttle bus moves visitors between the visitor center and the Stone Circle but you also have the option to walk) you can gain a lot of insight into the history and meaning of Stonehenge. Reconstructed Neolithic houses enable you to see how people lived 4,500 years ago when Stonehenge was being created and you can see the finds from archaeological digs in the area, finds including pottery, tools, jewelry, and human remains.

Admission: £17.50 when booking in advance – You will be given a 30-minute time slot in which to arrive so be sure you arrive in plenty of time.

Opening hours: 9.30 am to 7.00 pm  

Click here to buy your Stonehenge Admission Ticket.

Salisbury Cathedral

Whether you take an official tour to learn the history of this English Gothic cathedral or just pop in on your own, Salisbury Cathedral is well worth a visit! With beautiful cloisters and stained glass windows, its tower is Britain’s tallest spire and it’s possible to climb the 332 steps to look down on the city of Salisbury from above as part of a ‘Spire Tour’. Meanwhile, the Chapter House contains the Magna Carta – One of four original copies that remain in good condition dating from 1215.

Admission: Recommended donation £7, £13.50 Tower Tour

Opening hours: Monday-Saturday Main Cathedral 9 am-5 pm, Sunday Noon-4pm. Magna Carta and Tower are open at different times, check the website for details.

Salisbury wasn’t always located in its current location – prior to the 1300s, it was located here, uphill from modern-day Salisbury at Old Sarum. Originally an Iron Age hill fort, 2,000 years of history can be traced at this site with Roman, Norman, and Saxon activity. See the hill fort with the deep ditch that was originally the moat, castle ruins (the Medieval castle built by William the Conqueror in 1070), and the foundations of the original Salisbury Cathedral.

Admission: £6

Opening hours: 10am-6pm Summer, 10am-4pm Winter

10 days in England: Day Six – Oxford

How to get to oxford from bath.

Train: There is a regular train service with Great Western Railway from Bath Spa to Oxford via Didcot Parkway from 5.45 am through until 10.45 pm.

Time: 90 minutes

Cost: From £14.50

Bus: National Express has buses departing Bath Spa University to Oxford (Gloucester Green bus station in the center of the city) every 2 hours during peak hours.

Time: 4.5 hours

Cost: From £10

Known as the city of dreaming spires, Oxford is a beautiful historical university city that is compact meaning you can easily see all of the sights on foot. Admire the colleges as you walk in the footsteps of Oscar Wilde and C.S. Lewis, just watch out for the cyclists during term time!

I highly recommend: Oxford University and City Walking Tour with Alumni Guide .

Oxford Castle

Built in the 10th century, Oxford Castle became a prison from the 14th century and was a working prison right up until 1996! Today, visitors can take a guided tour, led by a character guide, to learn the history of the 1,000-year-old castle/prison complex with access to the crypt, parts of the prison (other parts have been turned into a hotel!), St George’s Tower (great city views), and the Motte (the big earth mount opposite the building).

Admission: £12.50

Opening hours: 10am-4.20pm

Christ Church College and  College Cathedral

The most famous college in Oxford and one of the grandest also featuring one of the most beautiful gardens, a look inside Christ Church College is a must! See some of the halls, the picture gallery, the cathedral, the inner courtyards, cloisters, and the gardens whilst learning the history of the college and about student life today. Lewis Carroll (real name Charles Dodgson) lived and worked here so you may note some things that inspired Alice in Wonderland as you wander around.

If you’re more of a Harry Potter fan, you aren’t imagining things when you see the dining hall for this was the inspiration for Hogwarts’ Great Hall and its entrance was used as the film set in Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone when Professor McGonagall met the 1 st years.

Admission: £17 garden tour, £10 general admission. Free entrance to the college cathedral for services.

Opening hours: Monday-Friday only. No access July-August. Tickets are available 1 week in advance from the website .

Punting on the River Cherwell

When the weather is fine there’s nothing more quintessentially English than punting along the river passing the beautiful University buildings and grounds out into the Oxford countryside. Take a guided tour so you can enjoy the ride or grab a pole and do it yourself.

Admission: From £18 per hour do it yourself or £30 for 30 minutes chauffeured.

Opening hours: Mid March – Mid October

The Tower at the Church of St. Mary the Virgin

The spiritual heart of the oldest university in England, this simple yet historic church is visited and loved for the views it offers from its tower. Climb 127 steps to admire the view of the colleges and Radcliffe Camera – One of the best views in the city.

Admission: £5 for Tower

Opening hours: Monday-Saturday 9.30 am-5 pm, Sunday noon-5pm (6 pm July and August)

Covered Market

The historic covered market has outstanding Victorian architecture dating back to the 1770s and is filled with indie shops, craft stalls, and food/drink stands. Be sure to stop in for a fresh fruit juice or a less healthy smoothie as you take a look around – Perfect if you need to duck out of the rain.

Opening hours: Monday-Saturday 8am-5.30pm, Sunday 10am-4pm

The Radcliffe Camera

The most iconic building in Oxford, the beautiful, neoclassical, Radcliffe Camera is part of Oxford University and was built in 1737 to house the Radcliffe Science Library making it one of the world’s oldest libraries. There’s no camera here, the word ‘camera’ comes from Latin meaning ‘building’ or ‘vault’ therefore, this building is a reading room comprising 2 reading rooms (upper and lower) and a gallery. Bibliophiles can take a 90-minute guided tour inside.

Admission: £14

Opening hours: Selected times, tickets available 2 weeks before – Check website for details.

Bridge of Sighs aka Hertford Bridge

This covered bridge, reminiscent of the Bridge of Sighs in Venice, rises above New Lane joining the Old Quad and New Quad of Hertford College together. Sadly, unless you’re a student at Hertford College, you can’t cross the bridge but it’s an iconic piece of architecture well worth passing by.

The Sheldonian Theatre

This 350-year-old building with its masterpiece of a roof is the official ceremonial hall of the University of Oxford. It was the first major design completed by architect Sir Christopher Wren who also designed St Paul’s Cathedral in London. Impressive from the outside with its funny ‘Emporer Head’ sculptures, step inside to be truly astounded and admire both the painted ceiling and the 360-degree panoramic views from the Cupola.

Admission: £3.80 (£8 guided tour)

Opening hours: 10 am-4 pm unless in use by the University

The Eagle and Child Pub

Otherwise known as ‘The Bird and Baby’, end your day of sightseeing at one of London’s most famous pubs , a regular meeting place during the 1930s and 1940s of J.R.R Tolkien, C.S Lewis, and friends who together were nicknamed ‘The Inklings’. Whether you just want a pint or stay for food, step inside to see the memorabilia hanging on the walls but breathe in, it’s tiny! Who knows, maybe you’ll be inspired to pen your own fantasy novel!

Opening hours: Monday-Saturday 11 am-11 pm, Sunday noon-10.30pm

10 days in England: Day Eight – Stratford Upon Avon

How to Get from Oxford to Stratford Upon Avon

Train: There are 19 daily trains departing Oxford train station to Stratford Upon Avon, the fastest route going via Leamington Spa as there are no direct trains. An alternative route goes via Leamington Spa and Dorridge but it’s better to only change trains once if you have lots of luggage with you.

Cost: From £14

Coach: National Express has a direct, non-stop, service from Oxford to Stratford Upon Avon leaving daily at 11am – If that time works for you it’s the faster, easier, and cheaper option compared with taking the train.

Time: 70 minutes

This quaint medieval market town (often shortened to Stratford but not to be confused with the London district) is located along the banks of the River Avon and along with its iconic half-timber Tudor houses is famous for being the birthplace of William Shakespeare. The entire town is a living history to the life and times of Shakespeare, a must-visit destination for anyone interested in British history.

Shakespeare’s Birthplace

Visit the timber-framed Tudor house and gardens where William Shakespeare spent a good chunk of his life, being born and raised here alongside his siblings as well as living here for 5 years with his wife, Anne Hathaway until he was 23 years old. The house, now a fascinating museum, is full of exhibitions with costumed guides bringing 450 years of history to life plus resident actors performing Shakespeare Aloud in which you can ask them to perform parts from any play!

Admission: £17.50

Opening hours: Spring-Autumn 9am-5pm, Winter 10am-4pm

Anne Hathaway’s Cottage

This 600-year-old thatched farmhouse with garden is as sweet as a chocolate-box! Make the journey 1 mile outside of Stratford to Shottery to visit the childhood home of Anne Hathaway, Shakespeare’s wife as you learn more about their love story. Step inside to see personal effects and other items dating back to Anne’s childhood including the original oak Hathaway bed. Don’t miss out on the sculpture trail if it’s a fine day!

Admission: £11.25

Opening hours: Spring-Autumn 9am-5pm, Winter 10am-3.30pm

Shakespeare’s New Place

Located on the site of Shakespeare’s last home where he lived from 1579 (once he was an established playwright, it thought that he would have written The Tempest during this time) until his death in 1616, ‘New Place’ is a new exhibition center that opened in 2016. It houses rare artifacts from Shakespeare’s life and includes a beautiful garden containing artwork. The original home was sadly demolished in 1759 but the new build follows the footprint of the original home.

Opening hours:  Spring-Autumn 9am-5pm, Winter 10am-4pm

Optional Alternatives

Fascinated by the life and times of the Tudor’s but overdosed on Shakespeare? Skip Shakespeare’s New Place and/or Anne Hathaway’s Cottage and explore the life and times of the Tudor’s. Or, if that’s still too much history to keep your family happy, break your day with butterflies at the butterfly farm or indulge in mechanical art and design at the interactive MAD museum.

Tudor World – £6 – 10.30am-5.30pm

Stratford Butterfly Farm – £7.25 – 10am-5pm or 6pm

MAD Museum – £7.80 – 10am-5pm

Take a River Boat Trip

See Stratford-upon-Avon from a different vantage point as you sail/cruise/row/paddle down the picturesque River Avon – Pedal boats, canoes, motorboats, electric boats, and punts are all available to rent and there are also sightseeing tours with a barge tours that go through the town’s historic working lock plus a river cruiser tour.

  Admission: 45-minute Cruiser Tour: £6, 45 minute Barge Tour £6, a DIY boat trip from £7 per hour.

Watch One Of Shakespeare’s Plays

  End the day by watching one of Shakespeare’s plays performed by the RSC whether that’s Romeo and Juliet, Macbeth, Hamlet, or one of Shakespeare’s lesser-known plays. There are two theatres in Stratford-upon-Avon where the Royal Shakespeare Company (RSC) performs, The Royal Shakespeare Theatre and The Swan Theatre.

Admission: From £10

You can combine the sightseeing to Stratford Upon Avon with a visit to nearby Warwick Cast

How to get from Stratford Upon Avon to Warwick

Train: There’s a regular service from Stratford upon Avon to Warwick Parkway train station with trains departing roughly every half an hour from 6 am – 11pm. Some trains are direct, others require you to change at Dorridge which increases the journey time by a further 30 minutes.

Time: 25-30 minutes

Cost: From £7

Warwick Castle

This castle truly brings history to life for the whole family. Originally built as a wooden motte and bailey fort in 1068 for William the Conqueror, the stone castle seen today dates back to the 1100s with its conversion to a country house taking place in the 1700s. Enjoy numerous exhibitions and a live-action walk-through with actors and special effects along with the largest trebuchet in the world and birds of prey display. You can also visit the dungeons if you purchase an extended ticket.

Admission: From £21

Opening hours: 10 am-4 pm or 5 pm depending on the season. Some special openings until 9 pm, check website for details.

Click here to buy your Warwick castle entrance tickets.

Always wanted to stay in a castle? You can book the luxury Tower Suites in the 14 th century Caesar’s Tower. Cheaper options include a stay at the castle’s Woodland Lodges or Medieval Glamping!

The Mill Garden

Located beneath Warwick Castle, this delightful cottage garden with woodland area provides visitors with a tranquil oasis that covers half an acre. Follow the meandering footpaths by the river Avon and photograph the views of the castle, the ruined medieval bridge, Castle Millpond, and Victorian summer house.

Admission: £2.50

Opening hours: 9 am-6 pm April-October only

10 Days in England: Day 9 – York 

How to get from warwick to york.

Train: To get from Warwick Parkway station to York, there is a minimum of 2 changes with passengers needing to not just change trains but also change stations getting from Birmingham Moor Street station to Birmingham New Street station whether on foot, by bus, or by taxi for the onward journey to York.

Time: 3.5 hours

Cost: From 21.50

Bus: National Express work in collaboration with the coach company the Yorkshire Coastliner with a daily service departing Warwick at 9.30 am arriving into York at 4.30 pm (dependent on traffic). You must change coaches (and companies) at Leeds coach station where there is a 45 minute wait time.

Time: 7 hours

A visit to York, with its quaint cobbled backstreets, gives you a glimpse into the best of British history with its Roman, Anglo Saxon, Viking, Norman, Tudor, and Victorian influences all leaving their mark on this fabulous city plus there are many interesting things to do in York. 

I recommend: The York City Pass: Access 20 Attractions for One Great Price .

York Minster Cathedral

Officially known as the Cathedral and Metropolitical Church of St Peter in York, this is one of the largest cathedrals not just in England but in all of Northern Europe. An icon of the city, a church has stood on this site since 627 but the stunningly ornate Gothic building seen today dates from 1291 and took 60 years to complete. Take a free 1 hour guided tour to learn the history of the cathedral whilst visiting the undercroft and seeing the Great East Window which has the largest expanse of stained glass in the UK. An optional extra is a climb up the 275 tower steps to admire the panoramic views across the city and surrounding countryside.

Admission: Church: £11 Interior + Tower: £16

Opening Hours: Monday-Saturday 9am-4.30pm, Sunday 12.30pm-3pm

The Shambles

Like a real-life Diagon Alley (and what is thought to have inspired J.K. Rowling) The Shambles is the most photographed street in the city filled with quaint shops located within 14 th century overhanging timber-framed buildings with even tinier alleys (called snickways!) veering off of it. The perfect place to wander, you’ll come across 3 Harry Potter shops, a year-round Christmas shop, Viking shops, as well as the famous ‘The Shop That Must Not Be Named’.

Betty’s Tea Rooms

The most famous tea rooms in York, Betty’s is a must-visit (despite it being a busy tourist attraction now) so that you can try their legendary Fat Rascal Scones. These scones aren’t the usual kind, they’re crunchy on the outside and chock full of calories but should be tried at least once but you can enjoy a classic afternoon tea experience if you prefer.

Opening Hours: 9 am-9 pm

Jorvik Centre

End your first day in York with a journey beneath street level to discover what life was like in York when it was a Viking village. A mix of archaeological finds displayed in an exhibition center and an indoor theme park ride (you travel in a cart) through a lifelike Viking village complete with authentic smells, the Jorvik Centre really brings Viking history to life for the whole family.

Admission: £11

Opening Hours: 10am-5pm (4pm in Winter)

10 days in England – Day Ten – York to London

Clifford’s tower.

The last part of York Castle that still remains, climb to the top of this 13th-century tower (used as a prison and a Royal mint) and admire the panoramic view of York including the view of York Minster.

Tip – Best visited in Spring when the tower is surrounded by daffodils.

Admission: £5.40

Opening Hours: 10 am-6 pm

York Castle Museum

Don’t judge a museum by its name! Next door to Clifford’s Tower (on the site of the old castle) you’ll find the York Castle Museum which contains a weird yet wonderful mixture of things to see and do including the cells of the old York prison, a replica Victorian street, and a range of permanent and temporary exhibitions including Toy Stories which has a 100 year old carousel which is sure to take you back to your childhood, The Sixties exhibition with iconic objects of the era, and a 1914 exhibition showing you how the world changed forever.

Admission: £12

Opening Hours: 9.30 am-5 pm

Chocolate Museum

Skip lunch and head to The York Chocolate Story, a chocolate museum that takes you on a 90 minute guided tour to unwrap the history of some of Britain’s famous confectionery companies for Rowntree’s, Terry’s and Craven’s were all started in York. With chocolate samples to taste in just about every room and a chocolate lollipop to make before you leave, you’ll learn that Terry’s created a chocolate lemon and a chocolate apple before landing upon that staple of Christmas, the chocolate orange and so much more.

Admission: £12.95

Opening Hours: 10 am-4 pm

National Railway Museum

Across the river, from the Yorkshire Museum, you’ll find the largest railway museum in the world. York’s National Railway Museum contains 100 trains on display so if you’re a train buff, you might want to skip a couple of the previous museums and spend more of your day here. Highlights include The Mallard; the world’s fastest steam locomotive, Queen Victoria’s Royal Train including her favorite carriage, the only Japanese bullet train on display outside of Japan and an original Eurostar train.

Admission: Free!

Now it is time to head back to London for your flight home.

How to get from York to London

Train: Trains depart approximately every 15 minutes from York to London King’s Cross station (direct) with an average of 30 trains per day making your return journey to London hassle-free. Book in advance to get the best prices on this 174-mile journey.

Time:  2 hours

Bus: National Express coaches depart York for London Victoria Coach Station every 1-2 hours throughout the peak daytime hours with more limited service at night. Some coaches are direct making for a hassle free journey, others require you to change at Leeds Coach Station with a 30-minute change over time.

Time: 6 hours

Cost: From £7.50

How to Get to and from Central London to The Airport

From heathrow airport.

The largest airport in the UK, Heathrow is located 18.5 miles from the city of London and covers the majority of long haul flights plus scheduled European flights. It is the hub for British Airways, Emirates, Lufthansa, American Airlines, and Virgin Atlantic. With 5 terminals, pay attention to which terminal you’ll be arriving in to help plan your onward journey into the city center.

Heathrow Express Train

The fastest way to get from the airport to central London, the Heathrow Express train departs for London Paddington every 15 minutes from terminals 2-3, and 5 with the first train at 5 am (6 am on Sundays) until 11.30 pm. If arriving into terminal 4, use the free shuttle train to transfer between terminals. Don’t worry about terminal 1 – It closed in 2015!

Time: 15 minutes

Price: From £16.50 when booked online in advance

Cash Saving Tip! The TfL Rail service (formerly known as the Heathrow Connect) also takes passengers to London Paddington, the journey takes longer (35minutes) due to stopping at other London stations including Ealing Broadway and Southall but the ticket price is cheaper.

Underground Train

Heathrow Airport is connected to the London Underground at terminals 2-3, 4, and 5 with the Piccadilly line taking passengers directly to central London. It is possible to use Oyster and travel cards for this journey to save money on a single cash fare. Trains run every 10 minutes from approximately 5 am until 11.30 pm with the exception of Friday and Saturday when the underground operates a 24-hour service. Note – There is no night train service to terminal 4, leave the underground train at terminals 2-3 and take the free shuttle to terminal 4.

Time: 50 minutes

Price: £6.00 single cash fare

National Express runs regular services from Heathrow Airport (terminals 2-3, 4, and 5 ) to London Victoria coach station. Coach services run every 30 minutes during peak hours with the first coach departing at approximately 3 am and the last at midnight.

Time: 35 minutes

Price: From £5

A classic black cab can be hailed from outside each of Heathrow’s terminals. A surcharge of £2.80 is added for fares starting from Heathrow airport but there is no extra charge for luggage.

Time: 30-60 minutes

Price: £48-£90

From Gatwick Airport

Located 29.5 miles South of London city center, Gatwick airport is the UK’s second busiest airport and handles international long haul flights as well as many European charter flights. It’s a hub for Easyjet, Thomas Cook, and TUI along with British Airways and Virgin Atlantic.  

Gatwick Express Train

The Gatwick Express train is the fastest option for reaching central London with non-stop trains departing the South Terminal (take the free shuttle train from North to South terminal if needed) to London Victoria train station every 15 minutes during peak hours. The first train departs at 5.40 am and the last train departing shortly after 11 pm.

Time: 30 minutes

National Rail Trains

Regular trains also depart the South Terminal. Thameslink runs services from Gatwick airport to London Bridge, Blackfriars, Farringdon, and St Pancras International whilst Southern Trains go to London Victoria train station via Clapham Junction and East Croydon.

Time: 30-45 minutes

Cost: From £8

National Express has regular services departing from both the North and South Terminals for London Victoria coach station with stops along the way. Coaches run 24/7 every 20-60 minutes.

Time: 1.5-2 hours

Alternative Option – On a tight budget and staying in West London? Check out easyBus with fares from as little as £2 each way going to Chelsea.

Luton Airport

Located 34 miles from London city, Luton Airport handles a lot of low-cost airline flights from around Europe being a hub for Ryanair and Wizzair. It does not have a train station connected to the airport, therefore it’s often easier to get the coach into London.

Up to 4 coaches depart Luton airport every hour with two routes, A1 goes to Victoria coach station whilst A2 goes to Paddington. Both routes have several stops on the way.

A shuttle bus (price included in the train ticket price when you select LUA/Luton Airport as your starting point rather than Luton Airport Parkway) takes passengers from Luton Airport to Luton Airport Parkway train station every 10 minutes during peak times with limited night trains. Regular train services run to London Bridge, Blackfriars, City Thameslink, Farrington, and London St Pancras.

Time: 40 minutes

Cost: £13-£18

Stansted Airport

Located 42 miles North East of London, the Stansted airport is a hub for Easyjet, Jet2, Ryanair, Tui, and Thomas Cook primarily serving European destinations with either holiday charter flights or budget flights. It has a train station on-site giving travelers easy access to London.

Stansted Express Train

The fastest way to get into London, the Stansted Express Train departs every 15 minutes during peak hours and every 30 minutes during the night for London Liverpool Street station with some trains stopping at Tottenham Hale underground station on the way to give passengers access to the Victoria underground line. The first train departs Stansted at 5.30 am and the last at 00.30.

Time: 47 minutes

On a budget? Compare the price of the regular Greater Angular train service with the Stansted Express – Both trains go to London Liverpool Street station in the same amount of time.

National Express coaches run 4 different services to central London every 30-60 minutes. Service A6 calls at Baker Street, Paddington, Marble Arch, and Portman Square. Service A7 goes to Victoria Coach Station via Whitechapel, Southwark, Waterloo, and Victoria Train Station. Service A8 goes to King Cross via Shoreditch, Liverpool Street, and Farringdon. Service A9 goes to London Stratford.

Sharing is caring!

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

UK Trip Itinerary: Travel Around the UK in 10 Days

We’ve both lived in the UK for pretty much our whole lives and there’s a very good reason why we’ve stayed all these years. It’s because it’s such a beautiful country!

Over the years, we’ve seen nearly every corner of the UK together and now we’re here to share this UK trip itinerary with you.

In order to see more than just London, we’d recommend you travel around the UK in 10 days or longer by car. This itinerary will focus on some incredible places you should make an effort to see during your road trip .

Are you ready? Let’s go!

Days 1 & 2: London

No trip to the UK would be complete without a visit to the capital, London. Plus, the chances are very high that this is the city you’re going to be flying in to.

Although you could easily spend the full ten days of this itinerary wandering around London and still not see it all, we’re on a mission to prove that there’s a whole country to explore outside of the capital city, so we recommend you spend your first 48 hours in London, followed by a fun UK road trip.

If it’s your first visit to London, you should make an effort to see all the top spots and attractions such as Buckingham Palace , the Houses of Parliament , Westminster Abbey , Tower Bridge , the Tower of London , the London Eye and Trafalgar Square , as well as popular shopping districts, Oxford Street , Regent Street , Camden Market and Portobello Road Market , all of which look stunning at Christmas time .

READ MORE:  17 FAMOUS STREETS IN LONDON YOU MUST SEE!

For those of you who have already seen all of these top spots, you can start venturing off the beaten path a little bit in order to see places like the pretty Mews Streets , Sky Garden , Belgravia (including the Peggy Porschen cafe ), the Prime Meridian Line , Holland Park , Little Venice , Mayfield Lavender Field , the Cutter & Squidge tea room , and loads more.

For lots more off the beaten path places to visit in London, you should definitely make it your mission to read Pretty City London: Discovering London’s Beautiful Places by Siobhan Ferguson.

It’s full of inspiration and run by the same woman behind the hugely successful Pretty City London and The Pretty Cities Instagram accounts. Get the book here >>>

Discover even more recommendations (from a London local) in this blog post! >>>

Day 3: Oxford

Taking less than 90 minutes to drive to Oxford, a truly iconic UK city , this is usually a popular day trip idea from London.

In this particular itinerary, it serves as the perfect halfway point between London and the South West, plus it’s a beautiful city so rightly deserves its place among the best here.

You can easily see the best of Oxford within one day, such as the Radcliffe Camera , Oxford Castle , Bridge of Sighs , University of Oxford Botanic Garden , Port Meadow , and a long walk along the canal before making your way across to the Cotswolds area for the next few days of this itinerary.

Day 4: Cheltenham

Found in the north of the Cotswolds, Cheltenham is one of the most historic towns in the UK as it’s the most complete Regency town .

Cheltenham was once the place to be in the 18th century after its spa waters were discovered and commercialised. Wealthy Londoners saw it as the perfect place to escape the hustle and bustle (and smog!) of the capital.

Nowadays, the stunning stucco facades and ripe history are blended with the modern including a newly established street art scene.

As Cheltenham is quite a small town, you only need to spend one day here in order to see the best of it, including the town’s many beautiful parks and gardens , Pittville Pump Room , historic Regency architecture and the Promenade .

For more fun things to do in Cheltenham, take a look at this blog post >>>

Day 5: The Cotswolds

Thatched-roof cottages, rolling green hills, stone buildings and farmlands evoke the ultimate vision of the quintessential English countryside.

And often, it’s the villages found in the stunning Cotswolds that evoke these thoughts and inspire travellers to visit the UK, which is why there should be no surprise for the Cotswolds to make it onto this UK trip itinerary.

It’s recommended that you spend a full day exploring some of the best Cotswolds villages such as Bourton-on-the-Water , Chipping Campden and Stow-on-the-Wold , which are all fairly close to one another, oh so beautiful and just what you imagine when thinking of a Cotswold village.

Read more about these Cotswolds villages and what to see and do in each one here >>>

Day 6: Bristol

Considered to be one of the most fun, vibrant and relaxed cities in the UK, there are lots of very good reasons why you should make an effort to see Bristol during your trip.

It’s a fairly small city so is really walkable, and offers so much beauty, intrigue, colour and fun along the way.

Some of the city’s most iconic landmarks include the Clifton Suspension Bridge , SS Great Britain , the Matthew , the Harbourside and the old part of the city centre, while there’s also plenty of more unusual places to visit for those of you after something a little more unique during your trip as well.

For more Bristol inspiration, take a look at our one day in Bristol itinerary >>> Or check out all of our Bristol blogs here >>>

Day 7: Brecon Beacons

While you’re in this neck of the woods, it makes sense to see some of the Brecon Beacons in Wales… especially if you’re an outdoors adventure lover like us.

The Brecon Beacons are an iconic image when thinking about the UK and easily one of the most beautiful places owned by the National Trust .

There are so many different kinds of walk you can take – from hiking across the grassy plains , to walking behind waterfalls , to rambling near reservoirs .

In order to see all of the best parts of the Brecon Beacons, it would easily take you the full ten days of this itinerary. So with only one day devoted to it, your best bet would be to drive through some of it and do an easy day hike as well.

Two of our favourite walks (ever) have been in the Brecon Beacons.

The first is the Four Waterfalls Walk near Ystradfellte , which involves woodland walks and the opportunity to walk behind a large waterfall (for free)! This is a lot of fun … and very wet, obviously!

Our second favourite walk in the Brecon Beacons is around Pontsticill Reservoir .

The water is a stunning shade of blue, and there are little secluded areas by the waters edge, perfect for picnicking in. You can also walk across the bridge in the middle of the reservoir to get perfect 360 degree views of the reservoir.

Good luck picking just one of these walks to do!

For more Brecon Beacons inspiration, check out our hiking guides:

• Pontsticill Reservoir
• Four Waterfalls Walk

Day 8: Bath

With the whole city declared a World Heritage Site in 1987 and depicting the very essence of English idyll, Bath is one of our most favourite of European cities.

The entire vibe is like something out of a Jane Austen novel. From the Bath buildings, to the stunning abbey, to the Ancient Roman baths, this entire city is a cultural and historical wonder.

As a walkable city, it’s easy to see the highlights of Bath in just one day (without rushing). Some of the top attractions to see are the Roman Baths , Bath Abbey , Royal Crescent , The Jane Austen Centre , Assembly Rooms , as well as The Botanical Gardens in Victoria Park.

To find out how to spend a perfect one day in Bath, click here >>>

Day 9: Stonehenge & Salisbury

Stonehenge is possibly one of the most iconic landmarks in all of the UK.

Thought to have been constructed from 3000 BC to 2000 BC, archaeologists believe it could have once been a burial ground.

T oday, it’s a marvel to walk around as you wonder how our Neolithic ancestors were able to construct such an incredible monument without modern machinery.

From Bath, it’ll take you just short of an hour to drive to Stonehenge, and you’d want to spend around 1-2 hours at Stonehenge itself. From there, it takes just 20 minutes to drive to Salisbury, which we highly recommend doing to make a day of it .

Salisbury is another of the UK’s historic cities, albeit a slightly less popular one with global tourists.

Inside Salisbury Cathedral , you’ll find one of four original Magna Carta documents, while the city of Salisbury offers so many other historic landmarks including a pub ( The Haunch of Venison ), which dates back as far as 700 years ago. Plus, their food is pretty damn delicious!

For more interesting things to do in Salisbury, take a look at this blog post >>>

Day 10: London

Your final day is probably going to be spent making your way back to London to catch your flight.

If you’ve followed this itinerary, then you’re looking at a two hour drive from Salisbury to the centre of London.

You may want to spend a few final hours continuing to explore London (depending on what time your flight is)… for anything you didn’t have time to do during your first two days in the UK.

ALTERNATIVELY…

Popular with UK locals and tourists alike the world over, the pretty counties of Devon and Cornwall are also well worth a visit.

If you’ve got an extra few days to spend in the UK in order to make this a 2 week UK trip itinerary instead, then you should definitely take a slight detour through Devon and onto Cornwall to see places like Exmoor National Park , Dartmoor National Park , the Eden Project , the Lost Gardens of Heligan , Lands End and some of the best Cornwall beaches .

You could easily do this detour after visiting Bristol or Bath if you’re following the above itinerary.

Get some tips and inspiration in our Cornwall road trip itinerary post >>>

Alternatively, you could also skip Oxford, Cheltenham, the Cotswolds and Bristol in order to head straight to Devon and Cornwall from London if preferred. If you do this, you should set aside around 3 or 4 days to see the best of these two counties.

Is this UK itinerary not quite what you were after? We also offer custom travel planning services !

Where to Stay in the UK for this 10 Day Itinerary

As you’ll be spending a couple of days in London as part of this itinerary, it makes sense to spend your first few nights here.

Generally speaking, London can be quite expensive compared to the rest of the UK, however, you can still get a decent night’s sleep within a mid-range budget if you stay in and around North London, such as Hampstead or Islington.

Here are a few of our hotel recommendations in London:

• Langorf Hotel : Housed within a traditional townhouse, Langorf can be found in Hampstead Borough, and has easy connections to London’s city centre via a 10 minute tube ride. The rooms are spacious with en-suites, while the communal areas are traditional, yet stylish.
• Haverstock Hotel : Haverstock Hotel can be found a 4 minute walk from Belsize Park Tube Station, which has direct connections to the centre of London, taking just 12 minutes. The rooms are all lavishly decorated, while the communal areas are understated, yet useful.
• Best Western Swiss Cottage Hotel : Best Western Swiss Cottage Hotel is also housed in a traditional townhouse, and is just metres away from the local tube station, which is on the Jubilee line, ensuring a trip into London’s centre takes less than 15 minutes. The rooms have all been traditionally decorated, while the communal areas look just as elegant.

The picturesque Cotswolds is a great area to stay in as it’s close to Cheltenham and Bristol, while it also only takes around 90 minutes to drive to the Brecon Beacons, making this area a perfect base for days 4 to 7 of this itinerary.

Covering over 800 square miles, the Cotswolds is a big area, so we would recommend you stay near Stroud in order to be as central as you can and close to the M5 motorway.

Here are a few of our hotel recommendations near Stroud:

• The Bear Of Rodborough Hotel : Found just a few minutes south of Stroud, The Bear Of Rodborough is housed within a former 17th century coaching inn, which means the communal areas have plenty of character. The rooms themselves have been elegantly renovated, while maintaining as much of the inn’s character as possible.
• Burleigh Court Hotel : Also found a few minutes south of Stroud, Burleigh Court Hotel is also steeped in history and character; this time inspired by its 18th century manor house roots. The rooms are all incredibly spacious and full of period charm.
• Wild Garlic Bistro & Rooms : For a more modern stay near Stroud, the Wild Garlic Bistro & Rooms is a great place to stay as a couple. The restaurant beneath the rooms is superb and the rooms themselves are all clean, bright and airy.

Bath is such an important part of UK history, and ridiculously pretty, so it’s highly recommended you spend a night in Bath if you can.

Your best bet would be to stay within the city’s historic centre. You may pay a little bit more, but you’ll definitely increase your chances of staying within a stunning period property.

Here are a few of our hotel recommendations in Bath:

• No.15 Great Pulteney : Found right in the middle of all of Bath’s action (just a 3 minute walk from the Roman Baths and Abbey), No.15 Great Pulteney is so luxurious. If you’ve ever wondered what it may have been like to live in an old Georgian manor house, then this is your chance!
• The Gainsborough Bath Spa : Housed above a lavish spa, The Gainsborough Bath Spa is able to offer the epitome in luxury and relaxation. In fact, it’s the only UK hotel with access to naturally heated thermal waters within its Spa Village. The rooms are charming and spacious, while access to the spa is well worth the money by itself.
• Abbey Hotel : Just two minutes from Bath Abbey, the Abbey Hotel is a large hotel, housed within a typical Georgian building. The rooms are all traditionally decorated, while the communal areas are lavish and elegant. This hotel is sure to give you a flavour of just what Bath is really about.

We hope you find this itinerary useful! Are you excited to travel around the UK for 10 days? We’d love to know what you’re most excited to see…

Don’t forget your UK packing list! Here’s what you should wear in the UK >>>

Need help planning your trip to the UK? Check out our UK travel planning guide now!

Did you like this? Why not share it around?!

Justine Jenkins

Justine is one half of the married couple behind the Wanderers of the World travel blog. She lives in Bristol, UK and has travelled extensively within Europe and beyond since 2013. After her trips, she shares detailed travel itineraries, helpful travel guides and inspiring blog posts about the places she's been to. When she's not travelling overseas, you'll find her joining her husband, Scott on various day trips, weekend getaways and walks within the UK, which she also writes about on Wanderers of the World. Aside from travelling and writing, she also loves reading, crafting and learning about nature.

Leave a reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

SUCH a good itinerary! Been to a couple of these places, London being a highlight since we lived there. Need to see some more of these beautiful places!

Thank you! We’re pleased to hear you like our itinerary so much! 100% agreed – there’s far too many incredible places to visit here, I hope you get to see more of them one day 🙂

You mean 10 days in England! The U.K is comprised of 4 countries, not just one.

Hi Mable, Thanks for taking the time to comment! Although this blog post does focus on England a lot, I do have to point out that we included a day in the Brecon Beacons in Wales on the seventh day, which is why we labelled this as a UK trip itinerary. I appreciate that being able to see more of the UK would be tricky in just 10 days though 🙂 Best, Justine

Why do you suggest visiting Bristol on Day 6 and Brecon Beacons Day 7? Doesn’t it make more sense inverted?

Thanks for commenting! We suggested visiting Bristol before the Brecon Beacons as we thought it would help to break up the driving on the first leg into Wales as Bristol is closer to Bath. However, we agree that you could do this part of the itinerary either way around as there isn’t that much to change up should you wish to 🙂

An Epic 10 Day UK Itinerary for England and Wales

There are so many incredible things to see in the United Kingdom, it can be hard to decide what to include on a 10 day UK itinerary. When we first started planning our visit, we spent hours trying to decide whether to visit Scotland, spend the whole time in England, or visit Wales. We put this itinerary together this London to Wales tour based on that research and loved getting to spend some time in London and get out into the countryside for some hiking and exploring.

This 10 day UK itinerary in Wales and England is for you if you want to get a taste of London and then explore the more wild side of Wales including several hikes along the coast finishing with some time a small English countryside town. We did this itinerary as a family of 5 when our kids were 8, 11, and 11, but this would make a great trip with younger kids or just adults.

Some of the highlights of this itinerary include:

• Seeing the most famous sites in London
• Windsor Castle
• Pembrokeshire
• Hiking and biking in Snowdonia
• Visiting the Peaks District

Read more below on exactly how to take this 10 day England and Wales itinerary as well as general information to help you plan your visit to the United Kingdom . You can also find suggestions on how to lengthen or shorten this itinerary based on how much time you have. You can easily adjust this to a 9 day UK itinerary or add a few days to make an 11 or 12 day itinerary.

Overview of 10 Day UK Itinerary for England and Wales

Below is a snapshot of the itinerary broke up into days. This itinerary assumes that you will arrive in England the day before the itinerary starts. It is possible to arrive early on the first day, but you may have to adjust your plans a bit. This Wales and England 10 day itinerary also assumes that you will either leave in the evening of day 10 or the following day.

• Day 1: London
• Day 2: London

Day 3: Stonehenge to Tenby to Pembrokeshire

• Day 4: Pembrokeshire, hike,
• Day 5: hike Drive to Dolgellau
• Day 6: Hike Cadair Idris
• Day 7: Morning bike and explore to barmouth
• Day 8: Drive Dollgelau to Miller’s Dale – stop by Lakes
• Day 9: Chee Dale Stepping Stones – explore Miller’s Dale

Day 10 Windsor Castle

How to Use this England and Wales Itinerary

You can use this itinerary by booking this exact itinerary or select part of this trip. You can also use just the Wales portion of this trip if you are trying to put together a 5 days in Wales itinerary. This itinerary also assumes you will be visiting during the warmer months, but it is possible adjust to do this in the winter, you will just need to dress appropriately and keep an eye of the weather during your hikes.

Map of 10 Day UK Itinerary in England and Wales

Complete Details of this 10 day UK Itinerary in England and Wales

Day 1 and 2: london.

Start your 10 day UK itinerary with 2 full days in London. London is an incredible and large city, and it’s hard to see everything even with a week in town. With 2 days in London, you can see the highlights and most popular sites. Both days are very full, so you may decide to leave off one or more of the sites based on the time and your preference.

For your first day, start the morning at Buckingham Palace for the changing of the guard.

If you have time before the ceremony, you can enjoy some time in Hyde Park. You will want to confirm that the ceremony is happening on the day you are visiting (you can see the schedule here ). After the changing of the guard, wander through Trafalgar Square and strop for lunch in Covent Garden. In the afternoon, head towards the Thames and cross Westminster Bridge. There are 4 good sites right nearby. Catch a look at Big Ben, Westminster Abbey and Parliament or you can cross the river and take a ride on the London Eye.

At this point it is likely late afternoon. Hop of one of the Thames River cruises for a break from walking and to see some of the more famous sites from the river. Get off at the Tower of London. If there is still time, take a tour of the Tower of London and walk across Tower Bridge before grabbing dinner along the waterfront.

For day 2 in London , you will enjoy some of the museums, and markets. Start your day at Camden market before making your way to the British Museum. London has several excellent museums to choose from, many of which are free. The National Gallery is also a great choice.

In the afternoon you can choose from several activities. We suggest trying out one of the London High teas, or if you are visiting with kids you can go to the London Zoo or Harry Potter World or take a Harry Potter tour .

Should you take a tour of London?

To see everything you want to see in London your days will be jam packed. If you want to make sure to see everything and you are willing to pay a little extra, taking a tour of London may be the best option. In fact, most tours will only cost a little more and can actually be a good deal. You can find lots of tours at Viator .

Where to Stay in London

London is large and there are many options for places to stay. The best place to stay with limited time is right downtown. You can search for a hotel downtown through booking.com , but we also recommend the London Marriot Hotel County Hall : This is a great location right along the Thames. You can easily walk to many of the most popular sites and you have great views right from the hotel. You can also find several other Marriot hotels in the city if you like Marriot.

On the third day of your 10 day UK itinerary, you will need to rent a car. You can do this right away when you arrive in London, but parking can be difficult, so if possible wait to rent a car until day 3. We had good luck finding rental cars through rentalcars.com .

Try to get an early start and head out of the city to Stonehenge. The drive takes about 2 hours depending on traffic. You will want to make sure you book your tickets to Stonehenge in advance. Try to reserve one of the earlier time slots to avoid the crowds. You should plan to spend about 2 hours at Stonehenge and in the visitor center.

After exploring Stonehenge, continue driving west into Wales to get to Pembroke. This drive takes about 4 hours and there are lots of interesting places to explore along the way if you have the interest and time, including Bath and Cardiff.

Once you arrive in Pembrokshire, you can check into your hotel and grab a bite to eat.

Where to Stay in Pembrokeshire

Pembrokeshire is the entire region of southwest Wales and you can find several great towns to use as a base for the next 2 nights. We stayed in Millford Haven, but recommend looking closer to Pembroke or in the cute town of Tenby.

The Burrows Bed and Breakfast : A great location and lovely hotel in Pembroke.

The Coach House Hotel: Once a medieval coaching inn, you can walk into Pembroke from this historic hotel.

There are many excellent places to stay in Tenby – you can see some of the best places here.

Day 4: Pembrokeshire

Start the day with an incredible coastal hike that includes a visit to Barafundle Bay and through the Bosherston Lakes. This is a roughly 6 mile hike and is one of our favorite coastal hikes anywhere. You can stop at the café for a mid-morning snack and even take a swim if you are feeling daring. After your hike, make sure to visit St. Govan’s Castle.

Spend the afternoon exploring the beautiful village of Tenby. You can grab lunch here and visit the beach if the weather is warm. In the late afternoon visit Pembroke Castle. We attended a Shakespeare play in the castle and loved watching the sun set in the castle.

Day 5: Drive to Dolgellau

Get a morning start and head towards the Welsh town of Dolgellau. On the way stop for another coastal hike. The Pembrokeshire Coastal Hike follows the coast of Wales for 186 miles and you can find many incredible hikes along the route. We did a section of the Pembrokeshire Coastal hike from Cwmtydu Cove but truly any stretch of this trail is worth walking.

Finish the day by arriving in Dolgellau. We loved this little town and spent several days here. It is a small town, so if you are looking for more to do, you may want to consider one of the bigger towns in the area. We found Dolgellau the perfect jumping off point for exploring Snowdonia.

Where to Stay in Dolgellau

Most of the places to stay in Dolgellau are small apartments, houses, or glamping opportunities. Below are a few of the best options:

Farm Stay Snowdonia Coast:  This is a fun and unique stay on a farm.

Try Clamping on the Coast:  This is a fun alternative to camping – these little huts/pods are a beautiful place to stay

Dwy Olwyn : This is a lovely little hotel in the country with a terrace and a garden just a 10 minute walk from town.

Elden Row : These apartments are a great option and centrally located in town

Day 6 and 7 Hike Cadair Idris and Bike the Mawddach Trail to Barmouth

For your two days in Snowdonia, you will spend 1 day hiking and 1 day biking. You can switch up the days depending on the weather.

Cadair Idris is the second tallest mountain in Snowdonia and hangs right over the town of Dolgellau. This is an incredible mountain hike. There are several different trails you can take to reach the summit. We took the easiest route up the Pony Path.

Learn more about hiking Cadair Idris.

For your other day in Dolgellau, rent bikes right in town and bike to Barmouth of the Mawddach Trail. This 9 mile trail is wide and easy to ride and takes you through the Estuary to the town and beach of Barmouth. Once you arrive in this coastal town you can grab lunch and enjoy walking around and exploring the beach. We had a windy/rainy day so we spent part of the day at the arcade in town.

Day 8: Drive Dolgellau to Miller’s Dale

Today you will drive from Dolgellau to the quaint town of Miller’s Dale located in the heart of the Peak’s District in England. The drive takes about 3 hours but you can make a day of it by stopping at Cregennen Lakes or the city of Manchester.

Once you arrive in Miller’s Dale and settle in, you can explore the area on foot. There are many excellent walking trails in the area.

Where to Stay in Miller’s Dale

The best hotels in Miller’s Dale and small with loads of character. You can see a list of some of the best Miller’s Dale Lodging options here.

Angler’s Rest: This is a cute little spot in a great location. We didn’t stay here but we did eat here twice during our visit.

YHA Ravenstor: This is a beautiful hotel that sits on 70 acres overlooking the river.

Day 9: Explore the Peaks District: Chee Dale Stepping Stones

There are so many excellent hiking trail near Miller’s Dale. We loved the hike on the Chee Dale Stepping Stones and spent the morning here and the afternoon hiking some of the other nearby trails.

You can see more details on hiking the Chee Dale Stepping Stones as a loop Trail.

For your last day of this 10 day UK Itinerary, drive south and stop at Windsor Castle. The drive from Miller’s Dale to Windsor takes about 3.5 hours. You can stop in the town of Windsor for lunch and then take a tour of the castle. I recommend the audio tour to get the most out of your visit. You can see more about visiting Windsor Castle.

After your visit to Windsor, it’s time to head on your way. If you have a late day flight, you can head to the airport.

We did almost this exact itinerary during the summer of 2019 and have completely updated the information since then. We’ve now travelled extensively in Europe and my kids still remember this 10 day UK Itinerary as one of their favorite trips.

How to Adjust this Itinerary

How to shorten this 10 day uk itinerary.

If you don’t have enough days for this 10 day UK itinerary, it’s easy to keep the general locations and shorten it by one day. The first option is to spend only 2 nights in Dolgellau. After you finish the activities on the 2nd day in Dolgellau, simply leave mid-afternoon and drive straight to Miller’s Dale.

If you only have 1 week in England and Wales, you will have to cut out one of the smaller towns. After visiting Dolgellau – simply drive straight back to London instead of stopping at Miller’s Dale. If you have time, stop at Windsor Castle, otherwise head right to the airport.

How to Lengthen this to a 11 or 12 Day UK Itinerary

If you have more time, there are so many ways to make this into a longer itinerary. You can easily spend more time exploring Northern Wales or you could add some time on the southern coast of England. The final suggestion for lengthening your trip is to spend an extra day in London. There is so much to do here that 3 or 4 days in London is ideal.

5 Days in Wales Itinerary

Another option is to use just the Wales part of this itinerary as a 5 day Wales Itinerary. To do this, basically use the itinerary above for just the days 3-8. Plan to spend 2 days in Pembrokeshire and 3 days in Snowdonia. This gives you time to hike on both the Pembrokeshire Coastal Trail as well as some of the mountains and lakes in Snowdonia.

Things to Know When Visiting England and Wales

How many days do you need for an england and wales itinerary.

We love visiting countries for 10 days. With just a week it feels like by the time you get into the flow, the week is over. With 10 days, you can enjoy exploring London and spend a full week in the countryside. With 2 weeks, it’s possible to visit Scotland as well.

When is the Best time of Year for this 10 Day UK Itinerary?

The UK is a great year round destination, however if you are planning a lot of outdoor activities, the spring, summer and fall are best. Summer tends to be the busiest time of year in London and England in general. If possible visit during May/June or Sept/Oct.

We visited at the very end of August and found the temperatures comfortable and the crowds low.

Driving in England and Wales

For this itinerary you will need to rent a car. In the UK, you will drive on the left side of the road and you will also sit on the opposite side of the car to drive. Many of the rental cars are automatic so you will need to shift with your opposite hand if you are used to driving elsewhere. This is something to be aware of when you rent a car here.

In addition, many of the road (especially in Wales) were very narrow. It would be almost impossible to drive a large car on some of these roads. When you are passing other cars, take your time and you will be fine.

You can search for reasonable car rentals at rentalcars.com

What to Pack for this 10 Day UK Itinerary

Even if you visit during the summer, you will want to pack plenty of layers and rain gear for this 10 day UK itinerary. We had generally good weather, but hiking along the Welsh coast was often cool and were glad to have rain gear for warmth.

In general I would pack several pairs of hiking shirts , both long and short sleeved as well as shorts and pants. For London, you want some clothes that are comfortable to walk around town in.

For the hiking trails, you should have a pair of hiking boots and another pair of comfortable shoes if these get wet. Pack rain pants and a jacket and one extra warm layer. Don’t forget to pack a bathing suit in case you get a hot day and want to go for a swim!

Other Amazing Itineraries

10 Day Ecuador Itinerary: Andes and the Amazon

Explore the incredible Amazon rainforest and hike through the Andes on this 10 day Ecuador itinerary.

An Incredible 7 Day Slovenia Itinerary: A Complete Guide

Visit Lake Bled, hiking it Triglav National Park and kayak on the Soca River.

7 day Iceland Itinerary: Driving the Amazing Ring Road

Explore the epic country of Iceland on this 7 day itinerary. Drive the entire Ring Road to see waterfalls, glaciers, black sand beaches, and more.

About the Author: Gretchen Stuppy Carlson

A passionate adventurer dedicated to getting families outside and exploring. Gretchen is an expert in adventure travel with 15+ years of experience working in outdoor education and travelling with her own family.

View all post by Gretchen Stuppy Carlson | Website

What's Your Next Adventure?

15 Amazing North Conway Winter Activities

How to Stay in the Black Mountain Cabin NH

Hiking Doublehead Mountain NH: One of the Best 52 with a View

10 Days In England: The Ultimate Itinerary 2024

With 10 days in England, you’re going to be spoiled for choice. Known for its history, rolling green hills, and quaint country villages (and rain, but we won’t mention that!), England is a varied and vibrant country to visit.

Adam and I grew up in England, and with our passion for travel, we have spent many weekends and holidays exploring our home country. From the Yorkshire Dales to the home counties, we’ve lived and worked all over, and couldn’t wait to get down this 10 day itinerary for you all!

10 days in England is the perfect amount of time to get a taste of it all. From bustling city life to quiet country lanes, this 10 days in England itinerary covers it all so that you can leave knowing you got the full English experience!

• Days 1 & 2 – London
• Day 3 – Brighton
• Days 4 & 5 – Bath
• Day 6 – Bristol
• Day 7 – Cotswolds
• Days 8, 9 & 10 – Yorkshire

10 Days in England – Days 1 & 2

England is a country known for its rich history, beautiful countryside, and lively cities. There are plenty of things to do in England, no matter what your interests are, and with 10 days here you can cover a lot of ground.

We’ve picked out the highlights so you can plan your trip knowing you’ve seen the very best England has to offer.

Where better to start your 10 days in England than in the country’s vibrant capital – London. The chances are you’ll be flying into London, so it’s the perfect place to begin your trip.

London’s founding can be traced to 43 CE, when the Roman armies began their occupation of Britain. Since then, London has been an important city for England and the place of many a historic event!

You’ll find beautiful old architecture mixed with modern art, 5-star hotels alongside street food cuisine, museums and castles, and some of the best evening entertainment around. Get ready to have your senses awakened!

With so much to do and see here that you couldn’t possibly pack it all into only a few days. That being said, two days is enough time to see the main attractions and get a real feel for this melting pot of a city. If you only have 10 days in England then make sure a couple of them are spent seeing London’s highlights.

We’ve listed the top sights, or you can check out our detailed guide on 2 days in London for an itinerary that takes in all the city’s highlights in the best order, including the best places to eat and drink, and some top nightlife ideas too! Make sure you check the London packing guide to ensure you have everything you need for your time here.

London’s Highlights

Don’t miss:

• Natural History Museum
• Buckingham Palace
• Big Ben and The Houses Of Parliament
• Westminster Abbey
• The London Eye ( book your tickets here )
• Thames river boat tour
• The Tower of London
• Tower Bridge
• HMS Belfast
• St Paul’s Cathedral

Top tip: By far the cheapest way to see London’s top attractions is by buying a London Pass . For under £80 you get entry to over 80 attractions and a hop on, hop off bus ride for a day (which on its own is £40 , and totally worth it even if you don’t opt for the pass!).

Some of the popular attractions included are the View from the Shard, the Tower of London, Westminster Abbey, London Bridge Experience, Tower Bridge Exhibition, and ZSL London Zoo.

We get a small percentage if you buy through our link, but that’s honestly not why we’re recommending it here. It will genuinely save you a lot of money if you plan on visiting even a few of London’s best attractions and it’s such an easy way to know you have tickets for London’s highlights.

Where to stay in London

London is absolutely packed with great accommodation options for every budget (though you will find prices a little steeper here as with every capital!)

Here are our top picks for staying in London for the first time .

We’ve also rounded up the very best London hotels with a view and the best hotels in London with a rooftop pool if you want to make your stay here really special.

If London is too pricey then consider using Brighton (below) as your base and taking the train into London to explore instead.

• The Walrus Bar and Hostel  – For budget travellers
• The Z hotel in Shoreditch  – great value in an upbeat and popular part of London with good dining options
• The Mandrake  – a beautiful boutique hotel in central London
• The Savoy  – True luxury, with a price tag to match! This is for special stays!

10 Day Itinerary for the UK – Day 3

Head to Brighton for day 3 of your trip to the UK!

With only 10 days in England, you won’t have time to explore a lot of the south, but we would recommend taking a day trip to Brighton from London so that you can experience a typical English seaside town.

Brighton is only an hour’s train journey away from London, so it’s the perfect day trip destination! Use The Trainline  to book tickets in advance, pack a picnic and rug, and head to the beach!

Brighton is one of the UK’s most popular seaside destinations, and it has a great mix of culture, fun, beach tackiness, and old charm. There are lots of things to do here including arcade games on the pier, bike tours around the city, taking in the views from the i360, or exploring the Brighton Lanes.

Where to stay in Brighton

If you have longer than 10 days in London then you might want to stay in Brighton for a few nights and enjoy the party scene. Or you could do the first part of the trip in reverse and use Brighton as your base, taking the train into London to sightsee.

Snooze: Each room here is individually decorated in an interesting and quirky style in fitting with Brighton’s trendy scene. If you’re looking for something a little different then head here!

✅ Check current availability and prices

Clarence Square: This wins for location, so if you only have one night in Brighton this is a good choice. If you’re staying for longer then this has cooking facilities so you won’t have to splash out on restaurants every night.

✅ Check availability and prices here .

10 Days in England Itinerary – Days 4 & 5

Bath is a UNESCO World Heritage City and well worth visiting on your 10 days in England. The architecture and history here make it one of the most beautiful cities in England and we can see why London’s Victorian gentry headed here for their holidays.

Start off your time in Bath with a walking tour (if you’ve read more of our travel guides you’ll know how much we love walking tours!) For lovers of Bridgerton, this is a must-visit destination, and you can swap your historic walking tour for a Bridgerton experience tour instead!

You should also visit the Roman Baths while you’re here, and Bath is a great shopping destination with some super cute vintage and art stores. For something a little different take a boat cruise along the River Avon and take in the city from the water.

It will take around 3 hours to get from Brighton to Bath on the train. Book your tickets in advance .

Where to stay in Bath

Bath is a lovely place to base yourself for a few days during your trip to England. It isn’t known for being a party capital but there is plenty of nightlife in Bath, and there are also some great restaurants. The real treat about staying in Bath is the beautiful accommodation on offer.

The Kennard, stay somewhere grand: Bath was after all the go-to place for London’s elite in the Victorian era. The Kennard will certainly impress, with its grand decor and comfortable surroundings.

✅ Check availability and prices here

The Roof Terrace: Trade traditional for views with a stay in this modern apartment. It’s in the centre of Bath and has a rooftop terrace that is worthy of opening a bottle of bubbly for!

✅ Check availability and prices here.

England Travel Itinerary – Day 6

Bristol is one of England’s most vibrant cities and everyone who visits dreams of living here. It has a small-town feel with big-city opportunities and there are lots of interesting things to do here that are a little different from your usual city sightseeing.

One day here is enough to take in some of the most famous sights, but the real pull of Bristol is just its atmosphere. If you like the sound of Bristol you could swap your two nights in Bath for two nights here instead!

While you’re in Bristol you should visit the suspension bridge and snap away at the views, and if you’re after even more history then visit Brunel’s SS  Great  Britain. You should also keep an eye out for Bristol’s famous graffiti as you walk around the city.

One of the things we love most about Bristol is the individual shops, bars, and restaurants here, so don’t pack your day too full of activities! Make some time to eat yourself silly at a vegan cafe, or try out the much loved Jerusalem Falafel .

Where to stay in Bristol

Hotel du Vin : The Hotel du Vin is purely luxurious, with dark wooden interiors and decadent bathtubs. In fact, a stay here might prevent you from getting out and exploring!

✅ Head here for availability and prices .

Berkeley Square BnB: If you opt for several nights in Bristol then you might want to opt for accommodation you can feel at home in. This BnB is in a great location and has all the creature comforts.

✅ Check availability and prices.

10 Days in the UK – Day 7

The cotswolds.

The Cotswolds is a rural area of England that covers parts of 6 counties. It’s famous for its beautiful little villages, stately homes, and churches, and is a very different side of England to the larger cities. It’s well worth spending a day or two of your 10 days in England itinerary visiting some quaint villages surrounded by countryside.

There are lots of options for places to base yourself while in the Cotswolds and where ever you do end up will be gorgeous. The best things to do while you’re here are to slow down. Take a day or so to recharge by pottering around old villages, eating scones and jam in tea rooms, and visiting national trust property gardens.

10 Days in the north of England – Days 8, 9 & 10

Yorkshire is one of the most beautiful places in the north of England (in our opinion anyway!) and it’s a great place to end your 10 days in England. From here you can fly out of Manchester, which has a large airport or travel back to London to head home.

Yorkshire covers quite a wide area and there are tonnes of different things to do here to suit all tastes. Some of the best UK National Parks lie in or within easy reach of Yorkshire and are well worth your time if you love the outdoors.

We’ve listed a few ideas of places to visit depending on what you want out of the rest of your trip!

One of the most beautiful cities in the UK and a true northern city too, York is a must-visit if you’re up there. York is atmospheric and moody, with its dark stone buildings, ancient alleyways, and fascinating history. It’s one of the few places that’s still beautiful in the rain, as the cobblestones glisten and the dark skies make it more mysterious than ever.

You could easily spend the whole three days here, visiting the York dungeons , taking a candlelit cruise up the River Ooze, or taking a steam train ride through the moors . One of the best things to do here is to simply wander and take it all in.

Where To Stay In York

✅ Avondale Guest House is full of English charm and only a 10-minute walk from the center of York. It’s a great option for couples and families alike.

Visit Haworth for a break from city life, and experience the true charm of an English village. Haworth is home to the famous Bronte sisters, English novelists who wrote classics such as Wuthering Heights and Jane Eyre.

It’s a tiny place, little more than a cobblestone street with fascinating shops and tea rooms, but it’s the perfect place for a night away from it all and has some great walks in the surrounding areas.

Go Walking in the Moors

No trip to Yorkshire would be complete without a walk or two through the breathtaking moorlands. Yorkshire is famous for its outdoor life, and the treks here are stunning.

You have a huge choice of treks to take while you’re here, but one of the most famous is the Malham Cove walk. The impressive scenery you’ll see from this hike will have you desperate for more time in the area, so it’s a great place to end your 10 days in England – planning your return!

We’ve detailed the Malham Cove walk for you, including the best places to park, the best route to take, and other important information! You’ll want to save a whole day for this hike, and you’ll need decent walking shoes and an outdoor jacket.

Is 10 Days In The UK Enough?

The UK is an incredible country with so much to see and do here. You could spend a whole month exploring London alone and still not see it all.

That being said, 10 days in England is enough to see some of the best cities and areas of natural beauty and to get a real feel for the country.

Simply follow this itinerary to see the best the UK has to offer!

Conclusion: 10 Days In England

Hopefully this article has helped you plan your 10 days in England, and we’ve no doubt that you’ll have the most incredible trip! Give us a shout in the comments section below if you have any questions about travel in the UK.

If you’re after more travel inspiration and tips then follow us on social media.

Similar Posts

Dimosari Waterfalls In Nidri, Greece

Astypalea In Greece: The Ultimate Guide

The Best Things to do in Monemvasia 2024

Chitwan Jungle Safari, The Ultimate Guide 2023

Walking Loughrigg Fell From Grasmere 2024

The Best Action Camera For Travel Vloggers

One comment.

Our genetics predetermine our eyebrow shape and our eyebrows frame our face. A high arching eyebrow is often considered a desirable feature and one that many of us are not naturally born with. Cosmetic Botox can be injected strategically in a single or combination of locations around the lateral brow and forehead to either create a gentle lift or a more dramatic arch depending on your desired aesthetic look.

Comments are closed.

• Search Search Hi! We’re Emily, Adam and Tiny Cat, liveaboard sailors travelling the world on our 38ft sailboat and writing about it as we go. We hope we can inspire you to live the life you’ve always dreamed, whether that’s exploring the world or living a more simple way of life in a tiny home. Find out more. Patreon
• Privacy Policy

10 days in United Kingdom UK Itinerary | England, Wales & Scotland

Love it? Share it!

Planning to spend 10 days in United Kingdom? No worries – our comprehensive travel guide covers everything you need to know for your upcoming UK itinerary. This is a jam-packed sightseeing itinerary and it can be done with or without a rental car. 

Through this 10 itinerary for the United Kingdom, you will be able to explore Scotland’s rugged Highlands and majestic castles, England’s charming villages and picturesque countryside, and a day trip to Cardiff, Wales. 

Whether it’s your first time visiting or you are returning to old favorites, you will find our UK itinerary super useful! 

10 days in United Kingdom UK Itinerary

Disclosure: This post contains affiliate links. If you click one of them, we may receive a small commission at no extra cost to you.

When you visit the UK you will be checking off the following – England, Wales, and Scotland with the possibility of extending the trip to Northern Ireland. 

United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days | At a glance

Here is a snapshot of what you will be exploring in 10 days

• Day 1 – 3 : London and Windsor
• Day 4 : Wales day trip
• Day 5 – 6 : Cotswolds
• Day 7 : Edinburgh 
• Day 8 – 10 : Scottish Highlands and Beyond

Getting to the United Kingdom

London is the largest city and the best point of entry to the United Kingdom from North America. We flew from Toronto Canada to London Gatwick and the flights were non-stop and comfortable! 

Wherever you are located, getting to London is easy, thanks to the United Kingdom’s excellent transportation network. By air, Heathrow Airport is the main gateway for international travelers and offers direct flights from many destinations around the world. 

From Heathrow or Gatwick , you can take a bus, taxi, or train into central London and explore the city quickly and easily. We booked a coach ride with National Express , and it was super convenient with our luggage. 

If you’re coming from Europe, the Eurostar Train service offers direct access to London from Paris and Brussels. This comfortable train ride takes just over two hours and arrives at St Pancras International Station in central London. 

Alternatively, you can drive to London in your own car or hire a rental vehicle. 

If you are not renting a car, coach rides are very affordable and comfortable to get you to various destinations in the UK. And train travel, of course. 

Once you arrive in the city of London, you can use the excellent public transport network — buses, trains, and the famous Tube that provides fast access to all areas of the capital.

Accommodation and sightseeing

For the purposes of this 10-day UK itinerary, you will stay overnight in a few places. Starting with London – exploring the city, Windsor, taking a day trip to Cardiff, followed by a stay in the Cotswolds. 

You can also keep London as a base and instead of staying overnight in the Cotswolds, you can visit 3 villages in one day, and spend another day in the English city of Bath.

From London, make your way to Scotland. You can take an overnight coach from London Victoria to Edinburgh, and keep Edinburgh as a base for the remainder of your trip. Additionally, you can explore the Scottish Highlands and nearby. 

From vibrant cities like London, Edinburgh, and Bath to picturesque landscapes in the Cotswolds and the Scottish Highlands, here is the perfect 10-day UK itinerary for you. 

Day 1 – 3 of United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days: London and Windsor

Start your 10 day United Kingdom itinerary with a bang by exploring the vibrant city of London. Take in top attractions such as Buckingham Palace, Tower Bridge, and Westminster Abbey. 

Where to stay in London for the next 3 days: 

• Sidney Hotel Victoria: Stay at this no-frills but wonderful hotel in the heart of London, near the Victoria Coach and train station. The location is perfect to get to various attractions such as Buckingham Palace, James Park, and restaurants. Click to view hotel room availability here
• Club Quarters Hotel Trafalgar Square: This is a nice 4-star property located near Trafalgar Square. It is perfect as you are in the midst of tons of shopping, and fun dining options. You can also walk to many museums as well as Buckingham Palace. Click to view photos and availability
• JW Marriott Grosvenor Square: This luxury Marriott property is only a few minutes away from many tube stations and Bond Street. It is located in the Mayfair area with great access to sightseeing and restaurants. Book your stay here

Day 1 of UK Itinerary: London and around

Start your London adventure with a visit to Buckingham Palace , the official residence of the British monarchy. 

First off, set aside 45 minutes to view the Changing of the Guard ceremony. It is perfect to do so in the morning, or after the crowds disperse, as it is a little calmer and quieter.  

Note that the Changing of the Guard takes place daily in the summer but only on Monday, Wednesday, Friday, and Sunday in winter. 

It gets called off on occasion so check the timings before you go. You can book a Changing of the Guard tour here

Saint James Park

From the Buckingham Palace, make your way to Saint James Park. This green oasis in the heart of the city is perfect for a nice stroll. 

In the warmer months, you can see flowers blooming everywhere. There is a cafe on-site where you can enjoy some drinks or a break for a quick bite before moving on to the next attraction. 

Kensington Palace and Gardens

In the afternoon, head to the area around Kensington Gardens. Located in Kensington Gardens is the palace of the same name that has been a royal residence since the 17th century. 

Today, it is open to the public and houses a number of historic artifacts and works of art. It is one of the most popular tourist destinations in London. 

We recommend buying a ticket to visit the state rooms. They are open to the public from 10:00 am to 5:00 pm. Although entry is £20 for adults , it is free for London Pass holders.

Royal Albert Hall

A walk across the palace gardens will bring you to the Royal Albert Hall , inaugurated by Queen Victoria in 1871 in memory of her husband Albert. 

From movie screenings and the annual Proms to tennis matches, there is always something going on here. Plus entry is free for London Pass holders.

You can book a show for the evening, and then call it a day. Or head to Hyde Park for a sunset stroll. 

Hyde Park is one of the largest parks in central London and one of the Royal Parks of England. It covers an area of 342 hectares (843 acres) and is the largest of four parks that form a continuous chain along the north side of the River Thames.

It is located next to the Kensington Gardens, and the access is free. The gardens are always busy with visitors and locals enjoying a walk, picnic, or jog almost all the time. 

You can also enjoy the Serpentine Gallery, a contemporary art gallery housed in a converted tea pavilion; the Princess Diana Memorial Fountain; the Albert Memorial; and the Serpentine Lake, located at Hyde Park.

Boating is also possible at The Serpentine. It is open from April until October 31st, from 10 a.m. to around 4 p.m. (during the winter) and 10 a.m. to 8 p.m. (during the summer).

Day 2 of UK Itinerary: London and around

Set aside day 2 of the United Kingdom itinerary for museum hopping. If you are not into history and museums, you can combine 1 museum visit + shopping + casual attractions.

We recommend opting for a hop on and hop off tour so that you can check off all the spots with ease. 

If walking from London Victoria, you can make your way to the south bank of the River Thames from the National Gallery to see three of the most iconic landmarks of the city –  Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament, and the Gothic building of the Westminster Abbey, the site of the country’s coronation church since 1066.

Big Ben and the Houses of Parliament

Big Ben is an iconic London landmark that you won’t want to miss. On our trip, we were able to see it, in all its glory without any scaffolding. 

Take a walk around the clock tower and marvel at its beauty. It makes for a nice photo spot in London as well. 

The Houses of Parliament is the seat of the British government, and it’s definitely worth a visit. You can take a tour of the Houses of Parliament, or simply admire the architecture from the outside. 

Read : 4 days in London itinerary

Westminster Abbey

Westminster Abbey is one of the most famous churches in the world, and it’s only a 3-minute walk from the Houses of Parliament. 

The abbey is a Gothic church and a well-known UNESCO World Heritage Site in London. Take the time to visit the interiors and admire the beautiful architecture including the stained glass windows. 

You will need to book an entrance ticket for Westminster Abbey, and it is free with the London Pass.

Did you know that Westminister Abbey has been the coronation church of the British monarchy since the 11th century? And this is where Kate and William got married! 🙂 

Churchill War Rooms

After sightseeing here, make your way to Churchill War Rooms. It was an easy visit as the museum is on the way from here to Big Ben and back. 

The War Rooms had been on my bucket list for a while. Both Salil and I loved WWI and WWII history, and if you do too, then you must visit this museum. 

Here is a walking tour of the area, along with the entrance ticket for the Churchill War Rooms. 10 Downing Street is also located nearby.

From the War Rooms, make your way to the Natural History Museum and the Victoria and Albert Museum (for history buffs)

Natural History Museum

Natural History Museum is one of the must-see attractions in London, and it is completely free to explore. The museum is home to over 80 million specimens, including dinosaurs, animals, rocks, and minerals. 

Victoria and Albert Museum

Next, visit the Victoria and Albert Museum nearby. 

Victoria and Albert Museum is the United Kingdom’s popular art museum, with one of the world’s most comprehensive and significant collections of Chinese art, as well as one of the West’s largest. 

They are open every day from 10:00 am to 5:45 pm, with late opening on Fridays until 10:00 pm. Admission is free, although there may be charges for special exhibitions.

After museums, stop at a cute and Instagrammable cafe – EL&N . It is all pretty in pink, and they serve brunch, light lunch, and coffee! The nearest tube is South Kensington. 

If you wish to shop, this area has a lot of options. Or you can make your way to Piccadilly Circus and then to Leicester Square for some retail therapy. 

Piccadilly Circus

Piccadilly Circus, a vibrant square is always buzzing with activity, day or night. You can catch a show at the world-famous theater (for evening activity), do some shopping at one of the many nearby stores, or just hang out. 

Leicester Square

A short walk from Piccadilly is Leicester Square, the area noted for movie premiers in London. It is not only known for its theater shows but also for food joints and shopping. 

This area is also close to Chinatown and Covent Garden (see London is very walkable), and you can take your pick for dining! 

Day 3 of UK Itinerary: Windsor and London

Take a journey outside of London to Windsor Castle , one of the official residences of Her Majesty Queen Elizabeth II. Explore its grounds, marvel at the architecture, and learn about its rich history. 

Afterward, take a peaceful stroll in Windsor Great Park before returning to London in the afternoon. 

Tower Bridge

Get to the Tower Bridge as soon as you arrive in London. Walk across the bridge to get stunning photos and views of HMS Belfast (a WWII ship now converted into a museum). 

There are a lot of places to take photos of the Bridge – from either side of the river, near the Shard, outside where cruises leave, or from the Tower of London entrance areas. 

Note that you can access the top of the Tower Bridge, and even walk on the glass floor and enjoy an exhibition after. These exhibits will provide an insight into the fascinating history of this impressive structure. 

Tower of London

Near the bridge is the Tower of London, the place where many infamous prisoners were publicly executed. The tower is home to the Crown Jewels and a vast variety of other gemstones. 

Remember to book tickets in advance, (included in the London Pass ) and keep at least two hours in the afternoon to see all the main sights. 

Try to get all the sightseeing done before 6:00 pm so that you can enjoy a lovely Thames cruise after. 

Another option is to head to the Sky Garden instead of the cruise. A 10 minute walk from the Tower will bring you to Sky Garden. Entry is free (but you have to book a slot beforehand) and this landmark structure offers epic views of the city. 

Other attractions in London

We did skip a few spots from this itinerary to accommodate iconic landmarks in London. However, here are some more ideas for you to consider. 

• London Eye: Across River Thames is the London Eye or the Millennium Wheel. This is a great spot to soak in 360° views of London. Buy your fast-track tickets for the London Eye here
• Afternoon tea cruise on River Thames: We really enjoyed our afternoon tea cruise on River Thames. It was a great way to check out all the city highlights. The tour lasts 2 hours and includes tea and snacks. You can book a spot online here
• Imperial War Museum: This is a free museum, and has permanent exhibitions from the World Wars and other present-day conflict exhibits
• The National Gallery : The National Gallery is home to many masterpieces of art from the 13th to the 19th centuries
• Borough Market: London’s most renowned food market, Borough Market is a must-visit for any foodie. With over 100 stalls selling everything from fresh produce to artisan cheese and meats, you’ll be spoilt for choice. It is located near the London Tower
• Covent Garden
• Oxford Street shopping

Day 4 of United Kingdom 10 day itinerary: Cardiff Wales day trip from London

Spend your fourth day of your 10 day United Kingdom itinerary exploring the Welsh capital city of Cardiff. Located just two hours from London by train, this vibrant city is full of life and has something for everyone to enjoy.

You can also drive to Cardiff, or ride a coach, however, it will take longer – about 3.50 hours by bus. Once you arrive in Cardiff, start exploring!

Cardiff Castle

First, take a journey back in time to Cardiff Castle. This is a medieval castle that dates back over 2000 years. It is believed that the was built in the late 11th century by Norman invaders on top of a 3rd-century Roman fort.

With a ticket, you can visit the Interpretation Centre, and enjoy a tour of the Castle Apartments and the Norman Keep. At the complex, you can also walk the pathways around the Castle Battlements, see the Wartime Shelters, and the Firing Line/Cardiff Castle Museum of the Welsh Soldier. 

Cardiff Castle is a big complex, and you can also enjoy a lovely walk in and around the site and/or picnic on the grounds. 

Read : One Day in Cardiff Itinerary

Cardiff Arcades

When ready for a break, you can stop at a cafe right outside the Castle, or hit the Cardiff Arcades. 

Here you can sample traditional Welsh cuisines such as Welsh Rarebit, cawl, and bara brith. Or try some authentic dishes from around the world like Indian curry and Chinese dim sum.

We enjoyed our beer and snacks before moving on. 

National Museum Cardiff

Next, visit the National Museum Cardiff. You can see exhibits from evolution like meteorites, moon rocks, dinosaurs, and wooly mammoths. There are also natural history galleries that showcase animals, birds, and insects from Wales and beyond. 

Cardiff Parks

There are amazing parks and gardens where you can hang out and enjoy the weather! Our favorites include – Sophia Gardens, Alexandra Gardens, and the Gorsedd Gardens (located near the National Museum). 

Cardiff Bay

In the late afternoon, take a ride on the iconic Millennium Water Taxi from Mermaid Quay to Penarth Marina to enjoy the Bay of Cardiff. 

If you are in town for longer, you can also enjoy a walk around the city centre at night to marvel at its illuminated buildings and streets. Cardiff is alive with energy as locals enjoy late-night drinks at pubs and bars. 

To complete your trip to Cardiff, grab a craft beer from one of the many popular breweries and explore the vibrant nightlife that this Welsh capital has to offer.

Day 5 – 6 of United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days: Cotswolds

Spend two days of your 10 day United Kingdom itinerary exploring the picturesque Cotswolds region. This beautiful area of England is made up of charming towns and villages, rolling hills, and exquisite country estates. 

Also visit the nearby charming towns of Bath, Oxford, and Stratford-upon-Avon. In our experience you can easily spend half a day to a full day in each, but for the purposes of this fast paced itinerary consider quick sightseeing here, except for the Roman Baths (in Bath) and/or Blenheim Palace (if you stop here) – where you will need atleast an hour each.

Tip: If you prefer to keep London as a base, you can book a day tour to the Cotswolds (covering 3 villages) , and set aside a second day to visit Stonehenge

Start in the city of Bath where you can explore its unique Roman-era baths and take a stroll around its charming streets. 

Visit the famous Circus and the Royal Crescent, then take a boat tour (if time permits – 1 hour) along the River Avon to admire views of this stunning city.

Next, head to Oxford and visit some of its iconic colleges including Christ Church College and The University Church of St Mary the Virgin. 

Take a walking tour around the city centre and explore its cobbled streets, bookshops, and quirky cafes. 

If interested you can skip the next stop, and instead visit Blenheim Palace near Oxfordshire. 

Stratford-upon-Avon

In the afternoon, visit Stratford-upon-Avon to explore its many historic attractions including Shakespeare’s Birthplace, Anne Hathaway’s Cottage, and Bancoft’s Gardens. 

Bourton-on-the-Water

Continue on to Bourton-on-the-Water which is often referred to as the ‘Venice of the Cotswolds’. Enjoy a peaceful stroll in the evening around its quaint canals and catch a glimpse of its impressive bridges.

Stay here overnight and then continue sightseeing in the Cotswolds the next day.

Hotels in Bourton-on-the-Water

• Old Manse Hotel: This is a cozy hotel in the heart of Bourton-on-the-Water to sleep for 1-2 nights. They offer free parking if you are road tripping, and are pet friendly. If you are not driving, the hotel is near public transit. Book your room here
• Chestnut Bed and Breakfast: Enjoy a good location, free breakfast, and parking at the Chestnut Bed and Breakfast. This hotel is housed in a 300 year old building, with many suites offering river views. Click to view availability here

Day 6 of UK itinerary: More of the Cotswolds 

Spend one more day exploring the charming villages of the Cotswolds on your 10 day United Kingdom itinerary. From castle ruins and churches to quaint cobbled streets and beautiful gardens, you’ll be spoilt for choice with places to visit.

Read: Cotswolds itinerary 3 days

Castle Combe

Start your day with a visit to Castle Combe, one of the prettiest villages in England. Once a fortified castle and later a thriving wool trading centre, today it is best known for its picturesque streets lined with thatched cottages and historic buildings.

Next, head to the village of Bibury where you can admire some fine examples of traditional Cotswold architecture as well as some of the prettiest cottages in the area. 

Visit Arlington Row, a terrace of weavers’ cottages dating back to the 14th century, and take a stroll around its beautiful village green.

Stow-on-the-Wold

Continue on to Stow-on-the-Wold where you can explore St Edward’s church with its impressive spire and many monuments. Take a stroll around the village square where you can find some unique shops and cafes.

End your day with a visit to Burford, one of the most picturesque villages in the Cotswolds. Admire the beautiful buildings such as St John’s church which dates back to the 13th century. 

Take a stroll along the river Windrush and admire views of the surrounding countryside before heading back to London with a break in Oxford, for an overnight stay.

Tip: Start for Edinburgh overnight by coach, or drive there the next day. You can be quite flexible for the remainder of your 4 days in Scotland itinerary . 

Day 7 of United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days: Edinburgh

Head up to Scotland and explore the city of Edinburgh for 1 day. Soak in the stunning architecture, take a stroll through Princes Street Gardens, and visit attractions such as Edinburgh Castle and St Giles’ Cathedral.  

Depending on your day and time of arrival you can use the 8th day to explore Edinburgh. 

We traveled by overnight bus and arrived in the morning, and spend 3 days in Edinburgh, on one of our extended trips! It rained on the first day when we arrived, so we were lucky to have extra time to catch up on sightseeing. 

Where to stay in Edinburgh

Here are some of our favorites in Edinburgh, 

• 4 star Moxy Edinburgh Fountainbridge: This classy and cool hotel is located just 15 minutes walk away from Edinburgh Castle. Our room was lovely and spacious. We particularly enjoyed hanging out at the lobby area and the rooftop bar in the evening! Click to check availability here
• The Balmoral Hotel: This super luxury hotel is located right outside Edinburgh railway station. The high-end rooms at the Balmoral Hotel offer unparalleled views of Edinburgh Castle and the Old Town. Click to book a stay here
• Radisson Blu Hotel (Edinburgh City Center) : Another city center favorite, the Radisson is located along the Royal Mile, and it is a mid-range hotel. Inside you will find spacious rooms with all modern amenities like a spa, swimming pool, fitness center, and an in-house bar on-site. Book a stay here

Explore the Edinburgh Castle 

In one day in Edinburgh , start sightseeing in the Old Town by visiting the impressive Edinburgh Castle. 

Explore its ramparts and take in spectacular views of the city from its battlements. Then, take a tour of the castle and admire its many grand halls and rooms.

St Giles’ Cathedral

Next, make your way to nearby St Giles’ Cathedral where you can admire its stunning stained glass windows and ancient stone carvings before heading to the nearby National Museum of Scotland (5-minute walk).

Explore this fascinating museum which houses a range of artifacts from all over the world.

Walk the Royal Mile

Continue on to the Royal Mile and take a leisurely stroll along this cobbled street lined with shops, cafes, and galleries. 

Stop for lunch at one of the many traditional pubs before heading to nearby Holyrood Palace where you can admire its impressive architecture and gardens.

Stroll the Princess Street Gardens 

Head to Princes Street Gardens and take a stroll around its lush gardens and admire views of the city skyline. Admire the iconic monuments such as Scott’s Monument, and National Scottish Gallery, if you have time. 

Then, visit nearby Calton Hill for some of the best views in Edinburgh (10 minute walk). 

Continue on to the New Town and explore its elegant Georgian streets. Stop for a coffee at one of the many cafes. 

Arthur’s Seat

End your day with a visit to Arthur’s Seat, an extinct volcano located in Holyrood Park. Admire stunning views of the city before heading back down for a well-deserved dinner.

Day 8 – 10 of United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days: Glasgow and Scottish Highlands

Spend your last 3 days exploring the Scottish Highlands and Glasglow. Drive along beautiful glens, lochs, mountains, and villages. 

Day 8 of the United Kingdom Itinerary: Day tour to Loch Ness

Keeping Edinburgh as a base, you can embark on a guided tour of Loch Ness and other stunning sites within the Scottish Highlands. 

Or if you prefer you can also drive there and stay overnight at Fort William. 

Loch Ness is an impressive body of water and is home to a variety of wildlife, including its most famous inhabitant – the elusive monster known as ‘Nessie’.

As you travel from Edinburgh, you will get to enjoy the stunning scenery of Loch Lomond and The Trossachs National Park, meet Hairy the Moo, cruise on Loch Ness, visit Urquhart Castle, and explore charming towns like Inverness.

When road-tripping, you can stop at Fort William and visit Ben Nevis Distillery. This will allow you to take a glimpse into the traditional whisky-making process. From stills to barrels to bottling, each step of the whisky-making process is showcased when you book a guided tour!

Tip: When you join a day tour, you will stop at Fort William for lunch and then finish in Pitlochry before returning to Edinburgh.

Day 9 of the United Kingdom Itinerary: Glasgow 

You can still keep Edinburgh as a base and visit Glasgow on a day trip. When driving from Fort Williams, it will take about 2 hours and 50 minutes to reach Glasgow. 

Once in the city, enjoy a nice breakfast, and then go sightseeing. Start with the Glasgow Cathedral. 

Glasgow Cathedral

Glasgow Cathedral is a historic landmark and is well known for its stained glass windows and beautiful architecture. 

The exterior of the cathedral features traditional Gothic architecture from pointed arches, ribbed vaulting, and flying buttresses, to two tall spires that make for an amazing photo background. 

Kelvingrove Art Gallery

Next, make time to visit the Kelvingrove Art Gallery and Museum. It is completely free to visit, and the museum is considered to be one of the most visited in Scotland. 

Botanical Gardens

After time at the museum, head to the Glasgow Botanical Gardens and admire the beautiful floral displays including some of Scotland’s most iconic species. 

The complex is also home to an array of wildlife, including birds, squirrels, ducks, and even frogs.

Clydeside Distillery

Before signing off for the day, visit the Clydeside Distillery, and learn about the whisky-making process from start to finish. After the distillery tour, have some dinner and get rest!

Day 10 of the United Kingdom itinerary : Stirling and back to Edinburgh

Take a short drive or train ride from Glasgow to Stirling before heading back to Edinburgh to catch your flight home. 

If you are keeping Edinburgh as a base, the ride from the Scottish capital to Stirling is just over an hour. 

Stirling has a rich history, dating back to the 11th century when King Malcolm III built a castle on this site. So the first item to check out in this historic city is the Stirling Castle.

Stirling Castle

Stirling Castle is the largest and most impressive of Scotland’s Renaissance castles. We recommend spending 1-2 hours here and taking a self-guided tour of the castle complex. 

Afterward, you can stop by the Church of the Holy Rude to see where King James VI was crowned in 1567.

Doune Castle

Next visit the Doune Castle, which was used as Winterfell in Game of Thrones and Monty Python’s Holy Grail. Explore the grounds and admire the 14th-century architecture before heading back into town. 

Baker Street

Spend the remainder of the day, wandering and exploring Stirling’s main street, Baker Street. Buy some souvenirs, and grab a bite to eat and drink before returning to Edinburgh. 

Other attractions Scotland

If you are a Harry Potter fan and wish to add the Hogwarts Express to your UK 10 itinerary, then consider booking this tour: 2-Day Highlands Tour with Hogwarts Express

This tour takes off from Edinburgh, so we recommend setting aside 1 day in Edinburgh, 1 day in Glasgow (or 2 days in Edinburgh), and then adding this 2 day tour .

The 2-day tour from Edinburgh includes the following,

• Round trip transportation 
• Bed and breakfast accommodation
• Highlands at Dunkeld
• A ride on the famous Jacobite Steam Train
• Visit Glen Coe
• Book this tour here

United Kingdom Itinerary 10 to 14 days Map

UK Itinerary 10 days with Ireland & Northern Ireland 2 weeks

Okay, so in 10 days you can surely cover England, Scotland, and Wales. To explore Northern Ireland such as visiting Belfast, Giant’s Causeway, and other landscapes you will have to fly to Belfast – which extends your trip by a few more days. 

If you wish to modify the 10 day trip above, you can surely skip the Cotswolds (gain 2 days), and cut short your trip in Scotland by a day or two (gain 2 days), and then add that to explore Northern Ireland. 

With 2 weeks you can use the extra 4 days in Ireland , and here is how you can maximise the trip, 

Day 11 of the 2 weeks in United Kingdom and Ireland:

Fly to Dublin from Edinburgh. This is what we did and we entered the Schengen zone in Ireland and crossed the land border to Belfast. 

You can find RyanAir flights from Edinburgh to Dublin or Belfast. 

On day one in Dublin, spend time exploring the city’s highlights from the Dublin Castle, Temple Bar district, Guinness Storehouse, and a museum visit. 

Stay in Dublin for 2 nights . 

Where to stay in Dublin? We recommend staying at the Hendrick Smithfield , the best property for not breaking the bank while having every luxury you need. 

They got a lovely bar and lobby, and the suites are comfy for a short trip. Check out availability here

Day 12 of the 2 weeks in United Kingdom and Ireland:

Enjoy the wonderful landscapes of the Cliffs of Moher and Galway. You can drive there yourself or book a day tour such as this one that includes Burren, and the monastic ruins of Kilmacduagh. 

Day 13 of the 2 weeks in United Kingdom and Ireland:

This is the day you will arrive in Belfast. It will take less than a 2-hour drive or a 2.50-hour train ride to get there from Dublin. 

In one day in Belfast , visit Saint George’s Market, and Belfast City Hall and set aside time to go on a Black Taxi City Tour, where you will learn about Belfast’s troubled past. 

The tour lasts 4 hours, and it also includes mural stops. Our guide shared so many stories of the troubles, political turmoil, and the events leading up to Bloody Sunday, and its aftermath. 

If you are not interested in this tour, then visit the Titanic Quarter . But ensure you have your tickets booked in advance to avoid disappointment. 

Stay in Belfast for the night.

Where to stay in Belfast? We recommend an overnight stay in Belfast for days 3-4. The Clayton Hotel is a great place to call home for 1-2 days. 

It is located within walking distance of the Titanic Quarter and other sightseeing spots. 

Day 14 of the 2 weeks in United Kingdom and Ireland:

End your itinerary with a visit to Northern Ireland’s only UNESCO World Heritage site – the Giant’s Causeway, and then explore the Dark Hedges, and walk over the Atlantic Ocean at the Carrick-a-Rede Rope Bridge. 

You can drive there yourself or choose this Northern Coast day tour from Belfast that covers all of the places including the ruins of Dunluce Castle whilst enjoying a scenic drive along the Antrim Coast Road. Check it out here

UK Travel Tips and Travel Advice | United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days

When planning to visit the United Kingdom, it is important to pay attention to some important factors such as visa requirements, main attractions & sightseeing spots, and budget.

Firstly, make sure that you check if you need a visa before traveling . Citizens of the United States and Canada do not need a visa to enter the UK and stay there for up to 6 months. 

But depending on your nationality, you may need a special visa for entering the UK. This is not the Schengen Visa, instead, it is a UK tourist visa which one has to apply for prior to flying there.

Once you’ve sorted out the visa, it is time to decide where you want to travel in the UK. London is a great place for tourists and has a wealth of attractions such as Big Ben, Buckingham Palace, and the Tower of London.

There are also plenty of other cities worth visiting such as Edinburgh, Glasgow, Cardiff, and Manchester.

Our 10-day to 14 day UK itinerary is a great place to start your trip planning. If you are adding Dublin or Ireland to the mix , keep in mind that the latter is a European Union and Schengen member state – visa requirements and currency changes when you enter the Republic. 

If you’re visiting the UK on a budget then there are plenty of ways to save money. 

• There are lots of free museums and parks and gardens dotted across England and the UK
• Book your accommodation ahead of time to save money, and avoid disappointment
• Off-season travel is also a good idea for a trip 
• Eating out can be expensive in the UK so try to find local supermarkets where you can shop for groceries and prepare meals in your accommodations

Ensure you purchase travel insurance before traveling to the UK. This will cover you in case of any unexpected medical bills or cancellations and will help to put your mind at ease.

Get a free quote for Safety Wing Travel Insurance

More UK Travel Tips

When it comes to sightseeing in England, there are plenty of interesting places to visit. Some popular spots include Stonehenge, The Lake District, and The Cotswolds.  Here is a 7 Days in England itinerary Day 1 in London: Exploring the best of London – Buckingham Palace, Hyde Park, Westminster Abbey, afternoon tea cruise Day 2 in London: Natural History Museum, and other museums of choice, Tower of London, Borough Market, Kew Gardens Day 3 in Stonehenge and Windsor: Day trip to the UNESCO World Heritage Site of Stonehenge, and later to Windsor Castle Day 4 in Bath: Roman Baths, Bath Cathedral, Jane Austen centre, sightseeing cruise Day 5 in York:   See the York Minster, National Railway Museum, York City Walls, Cold War Museum  Day 6 in the Cotswolds : 3 to 4 Cotswold Villages – Castle Combe, Burford, Bourton on the Water, Chipping Campden Day 7 in the Peak District

We found trains and buses/coaches to be great for transportation in England. Coaches take time, but they are safe, comfortable, and perfect when traveling with a lot of luggage.  The British train network is well-established and very efficient. They are fast, and easy to navigate once you have a good hang of things. Trains connect you from English cities and towns to Scotland and Wales. 

Based on data from flight comparison sites, the end of December and January are the best months to book a flight to London. Summer months are expensive, and tickets are usually pricier.  We were able to score round-trip flights from Toronto to London Gatwick for $500 CAD in January and the prices stayed that way for most of February for late spring, fall, and November trips. 

The best time to visit the UK is between May and June, September, and October and December. You can take advantage of the warmer mid-year weather to enjoy some of the UK’s most popular events or get in the holiday spirit with a winter break.

Some of the best months to visit England are from May to June, and September and October. During this time, the weather is pleasant with less rain (and also fewer crowds).  The warm summer months July and August are actually one of the wettest, so keep that in mind when packing for your trip to England.

How many days are enough to visit UK?

10 days are great to explore some of the iconic destinations in the United Kingdom. You can visit 2-3 cities, spending 2 days each, and then spend some time in the countryside or nature parks. 

For those who want a comprehensive experience, two weeks is usually enough time to cover most of the country. This way you can also cover Northern Ireland’s natural and cultural attractions. 

Shorter trips of a few days can still be enjoyable if planned carefully. If you only have one week in England then we recommend focusing on London, and nearby areas and squeezing in Cardiff and Snowdonia National Park in Wales.  

Like this post? Read more of our 10 days in Europe trip itineraries

Pin: United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days to 2 weeks

Mayuri is the founder & editor of ToSomePlaceNew. An Indian-Canadian globetrotter, she has traveled to over 100 cities and 35+ countries. Mayuri has a graduate degree in History and is an MBA. She loves traveling the world, capturing historical nuances, and discussing that over a cup of coffee with her husband, Salil. She currently resides in Edmonton, Canada, and plots travel plans to Europe, the Americas, and beyond. 

Similar Posts

London Bucket list: 69 Unique London Experiences

Looking for the best things to do in London? We got you covered with 69 London bucket list ideas with popular attractions and unique London experiences that you must do once in your lifetime! London city is one of the most popular destinations in Europe and the world. With so much history and many landmarks…

One Day in Budapest Itinerary: See Budapest in a day

One of the stunning European cities, Budapest has been attracting travelers for decades. The capital city of Hungary is laced with tons of history, UNESCO heritage sites, and ruin bars; it is also gastronomic heaven! Here’s the perfect one day in Budapest itinerary and how to make the most of your time! One Day in…

Perfect 2 days in Amsterdam Itinerary

A city intertwined in love; with cyclists and canals, Amsterdam is the glorious capital of the Netherlands. It is a city of unbelievable legacies and heritage, of museums and art, and a place of historical importance. Our 2 days in Amsterdam itinerary was filled with city highlights and more. Truly unique as a city built…

4 Days in Lisbon Itinerary: Experience the Best

Lisbon is a city full of history, culture, and charm. And it is one of our absolute favorites in Europe, and trust us we have explored a lot of cities on the continent. In this 4 days in Lisbon itinerary, we will take you through the colorful alleys, historic landmarks, beautiful views, and loads of…

Rome Itinerary 4 days: How to spend 4 days in Rome

What a Rome-antic city, isn’t it? I didn’t expect to fall in love with Rome like Lisbon or Paris. But I did, and in many ways, some of the corners of Roma reminded me of Paris. In this 4 days in Rome itinerary, you will find how to make the most of your visit, explore…

Barcelona to Montserrat Day Trip Itinerary

Located in the Catalonian region of Spain just outside of Barcelona, Montserrat is a stunning mountain range that offers breathtaking views and plenty of outdoor activities for visitors to enjoy. In this guide, we will share a detailed Barcelona to Montserrat day itinerary with all the possible transportation options to help plan your journey. Montserrat…

Oh, my gosh! I read every word of your itinerary! You did such a great job and supplied a lot of information. I am planning a trip there in September next year as a birthday gift for myself. My husband won’t travel out of the country! I’ve already been to Ireland but might consider returning to Northern Ireland since it rained the entire time I was there! By the way, your photos are beautiful! Thank you so much for sharing! I’m planning to see if I can get a few friends to go but the cost of the trip might be a deterrent since we are all retired now. If I can’t get them to go, I think I’ll do it alone. I went to Italy alone–backpacked at age 68! Thank you again for all the information! I am going to read it again and take notes!

Thank you Sandra! I am so glad you found the post helpful!

You are an inspiration <3 happy travels!

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Home » Itinerary » 10 Day UK

10-Day UK Tour Itinerary

Tailored itineraries.

• Private Group Tours

Luxury Vehicles

• Free Cancellation
• 15+ Years Experience

Ten days in the UK is just enough time to visit some of the most iconic sites in England, Scotland, and Ireland. Our ten-day itinerary will see you staying in London, Stratford-Upon-Avon, Liverpool, Newcastle, Edinburgh, and Dublin as you explore the best of the UK with your private guide.

A lot of traveling is involved, but following the 10-day itinerary below will enable you to move between cities in style and comfort with our luxury vehicles and driver. To discuss booking this trip with our team or to request that our tour planning specialists amend any aspect, then simply complete our online inquiry form.

Our 10 Day private tour includes:

• London Highlights
• Canterbury & Cliffs of Dover
• Oxford & Bath
• Liverpool & Manchester
• Loch Lomond & Glasgow
• Private Guides
• Luxury Transfers
• Expert Insight

Day 1: London Tour

The first day of your 10 UK tour itinerary begins in London, The Capital of England, and a global hub of culture, architecture, and art, not to mention the city most associated with the Monarchy and associated Royal Palaces and scandals!

On your walking tour of central London your private guide will take you to explore:

Buckingham Palace

The Queen’s official London residence and the focal point of most national celebrations. Buckingham Palace may be the most photographed Royal Palace in the world, so makes for a fantastic starting point for your walking tour of London.

Containing a remarkable 775 rooms, there are specific times of the year when the Palace opens to allow private tours of the remarkable State Rooms & Royal art treasures. Contact our tour planners for more details.

Tower of London

The medieval structure has perhaps the most fascinating history of any building in the UK.  Originally constructed as a Castle and defensive fortress under the command of William The Conqueror in 1066, throughout the centuries it has functioned as a palace, a prison and executioners, and an arsenal. 

Currently home to the Crown Jewels, the living quarters of the Yeomen Warders, and apparently 13 ghosts! The Tower of London is simply a must-see on your tour of London!

Westminster Abbey, Big Ben & Houses of Parliament

With 3 UNESCO World Heritage sites within 2 minutes walking distance, this tour can be considered an exploration of the seat of power in the UK. From the Abbey which has been the Royal coronation site since 1066 to the Palace of Westminster and Big Ben, where you can view a parliamentary debate. 

Guided tours of the houses of Westminster are available at certain times of the year. Contact our team for more information .

St Paul's Cathedral

Christopher Wren’s greatest creation, the Baroque style Cathedral was constructed after the 1666 Great Fire of London destroyed the original. Alongside a guided tour of the art, architecture, and hidden histories of St Pauls, you can climb the 528 steps to the top of the dome for a wonderful panoramic view of the city.

Day 2: White cliffs of Dover & Canterbury Day Trip

After your full day walking tour of central London your next day will be spent with your driver guide as you travel to the White Cliffs of Dover, and discover highlights from the town of Canterbury in the comfort, style, and luxury of our air-conditioned executive class vehicle.

White Cliffs of Dover

One of the most stunning natural landscapes in the UK. Taking a coastal walking route along the Cliff path provides stunning views across the English channel.

Canterbury Town

Explore the town of Canterbury – with a gorgeous mixture of cobbled streets, Roman and Gothic architecture, and featuring no less than three UNESCO World Heritage sites.

Canterbury Cathedral

One of the oldest and most significant Christian Cathedrals in the world, Canterbury enjoys a fascinating history having been of prominence throughout Roman times, The English Reformation, and in the modern day as the seat of the Archbishop of Canterbury.

Your guide will describe historic tales, and fascinating historical figures that have contributed to the lore of the Cathedral, including the murder of Thomas Becket in 1170, as you explore the Gothic architecture and gorgeous stained glass windows of the Cathedral.

Canterbury Castle

Explore the ruins of this 11th Century Norman era castle with your private guide.

Your accommodation for the evening will be back in your central London hotel.

Day 3: Oxford - Bath - Stratford-Upon-Avon

On day 3 of your 10-day itinerary, it is time to move on from London and begin making our way through the rest of the UK.

Your driver guide will collect you and your travel cases in the morning as you set off to visit three of the most iconic destinations in all of England, the prestigious Oxford University, the gorgeous Cotswolds Villages, and Shakespeare country, the town of Stratford-Upon-Avon.

Oxford University

Oxford University is not just one campus, instead, it is made up of over 30 colleges and halls spread out across the city. Our day trip has been designed for you to visit the most spectacular and significant sites including:

Christ Church College

Alongside the Cathedral and cloisters, Christ Church demands your attention due to the collections of Old Masters paintings and exhibitions in the Picture Gallery.

Exeter College

Perhaps the most emblematic and representative of the gorgeous Victorian Neo-Gothic architectural style that Oxford is associated with, and one of the oldest as well having been constructed in 1314. Inside Exeter College, you will find ‘The Adoration of the Magi’ tapestry by William Morris.

The Divinity School & the Bodleian Library

The largest and second oldest library in the UK, walk in the footsteps of luminaries such as Oscar Wilde, C.S Lewis, J.R.R Tolkien, and many more who have sat and studied here.

Cotswolds Countryside

Embark on a driver-guided tour through the enchanting Cotswolds, an Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty in the heart of England. Steeped in history and adorned with charming villages built from golden Cotswold stone, your guide will share tales of the region’s rich past and cultural heritage.

Begin your journey with a visit to the picturesque village of Bibury, often referred to as the most beautiful village in England. Wander the streets and marvel at the iconic Arlington Row, a series of 17th-century weavers’ cottages that have graced many a postcard.

Next, travel to the historic town of Burford, known as the Gateway to the Cotswolds. Explore its medieval architecture, independent shops, and the beautiful St. John the Baptist Church, dating back to the 12th Century.

Bourton-on-the-Water

Continue to the charming village of Bourton-on-the-Water, dubbed the “Venice of the Cotswolds” for its elegant low bridges and gently flowing River Windrush. Here, you’ll have the opportunity to stroll along the picturesque riverside and visit the Cotswold Motoring Museum, home to an impressive collection of vintage vehicles.

Stow-on-the-Wold

Your tour will culminate with a visit to Stow-on-the-Wold, the highest town in the Cotswolds. Immerse yourself in its rich history as you explore the town’s market square, surrounded by beautiful honey-colored buildings, and enjoy a traditional English afternoon tea in one of its cozy tearooms.

Stratford-Upon-Avon - Shakespeare Country

Discover the many surviving buildings and sights that would have been so familiar to Shakespeare with your guided tour of Stratford-Upon-Avon. Starting with the house he was born in, to his school and the church where he was christened, married, and buried!

Locations on the Shakespeare Tour:

• The house Shakespeare was born and raised in.
• Holy Trinity Church & Shakespeare’s headstone.
• Stratford Grammar School.
• Tudor buildings including Anne Hathaway’s cottage and others of significance to The Bard.

Your accommodation for the evening will be in Stratford-Upon-Avon. Your tour planning specialist will consult with you to determine the style of hotel to best suit your tastes. Would you prefer a character property with Georgian features or a modern luxury hotel spa? With our local knowledge and insight, anything is possible.

Day 4: Liverpool

Rising to prominence both domestically and internationally during the Industrial Revolution, Liverpool’s docklands were a key port for imports and exports that led to the city gaining the moniker of the second city of the British Empire. Liverpool’s regeneration in the post-industrial era as a city of culture was spearheaded by The Beatles’ impact on the World, recognized in 2008 as a European Capital of culture with an official designation by the EU, and continues to this day as a creative and vibrant artistic hub.

While spending the day with your private guide as you discover the best of one of England’s cultural hotspots you will visit:

Mersey River Cruise

 A fantastic way to orientate yourself with the city and learn about its history. On your boat trip, your guide will provide a commentary full of war tales, smuggling stories, and how the swinging sixties revolutionized the city. Some of the landmarks viewed during the ride include

• Christ the King Cathedral
• Liverpool Cathedral
• Royal Liver Building 360
• Museum of Liverpool
• Tate Liverpool

Royal Albert Dock & Merseyside Maritime Museum

Formerly the industrial center of Liverpool and much of the British Empire, the Docks are now a cultural hub in the city and the site of the Maritime Museum and The Beatles Story exhibition. Allow your guide to transport you through time from the Docks’ beginnings in 1846, through the industrial modernization of the 19th Century, and Liverpool’s role in World Wars 1 & 2.

The Beatles Story

This award-winning exhibition documents the band’s meteoric rise to fame and era-defining success through recreations of key locations from the band’s career including The Casbah Club, The Cavern Club, and Abbey Road Studios.

For Beatles fanatics, we can arrange tours of Penny Lane, Strawberry Field plus John Lennon and Paul McCartney’s childhood homes, and the Cavern Club where the band made their first performance.

As you might expect from a city that combines historical significance with an outgoing and outward-looking character, gastronomy options for your evening meal range from classic Scouse fair like Liverpool Meat Stew, Wet Nelly – a type of English Fruit Cake, and Liverpool Tarts all the way to modern fusion restaurants and examples of worldwide cuisine across the city.

Your tour planners will help you arrange a suitable venue for your dining experience, evening entertainment, and accommodation.

Day 5: Manchester & The Lake District

Bid farewell to the charming city of Liverpool and venture into the heart of North West England with your expert driver guide.

Discover the rich history and modern marvels of Manchester, a thriving metropolis known for its industrial heritage and vibrant cultural scene. Then, immerse yourself in the breathtaking beauty of the Lake District, an enchanting region where serene lakes and majestic fells inspire awe and wonder.

On your tour of Manchester, you will enjoy guided tours of:

The John Rylands Library

Manchester is a recognized UNESCO city of literature, and that is in no small part thanks to the rare books and manuscripts found within the remarkable Gothic architecture of the John Rylands Library within Manchester University. A must-visit destination on your tour, the library contains the ‘Manchester Fragment’, the earliest known fragment of the New Testament, part of St. John’s gospel.

Manchester Cathedral

A Grade 1 listed Masterpiece, Manchester Cathedral provided the stage that much of the city’s story and history has been played ever since Henry V decreed a church should be built here in 1421. The cathedral is the oldest building in Manchester and the Medieval gothic structure combines elegance and beauty of the stained glass windows and spirituality with the spooky vast underground network of crypts to explore with your private guide.

Your driver guide will now take you through The lake District National Park. Highlights from here include:

Manchester Museum of Science and Industry

Explore the Fascinating World of Science at the Museum of Science and Industry (MOSI).

On this guided tour, you’ll traverse the historic site of the world’s oldest surviving passenger railway station and witness the awe-inspiring machines that once powered the Industrial Revolution. Engage with interactive exhibits that showcase Manchester’s scientific and technological contributions to the world, from the development of the first programmable computer to the city’s vital role in the textile industry. This immersive experience will inspire curiosity and appreciation for the ingenuity that has shaped our modern world.

Discover Street Art and Creativity in the Northern Quarter

Embrace the vibrant spirit of Manchester’s Northern Quarter on a guided tour of this eclectic neighborhood, brimming with creativity and artistic expression.

Wander through a maze of narrow streets adorned with impressive street art, showcasing the city’s passion for urban culture and self-expression. As you explore this bohemian enclave, your guide will share the stories behind the murals and introduce you to the local artists who have left their mark on the cityscape. In addition to its visual appeal, the Northern Quarter boasts an array of independent shops, quirky cafes, and live music venues that add to its irresistibly dynamic atmosphere.

Lake Windermere

Enjoy the lush mountain landscapes while your guide describes legends and myths around the biggest lake in all of England on a boat cruise across Windermere.

Grasmere Village

Visit Dove Cottage where the great poet William Wordsworth, author of “As I wandered lonely as a Cloud” lived, and pay a visit to the original Grasmere Gingerbread shop.

St Oswald’s church

Where you will find Wordsworth and his wife’s tombstones, and just behind the church on the banks of the River Rothay is Wordsworth’s Daffodil Garden.

Your accommodation for the evening will be in the Lake District.

Day 6: Arrival in Scotland & Edinburgh Tour

Today you will cross the border into Scotland, the land of Whisky distilleries, Haggis Neeps & Tatties, glorious Lochs, and magical Castles.

On your driver-guided tour from the Lake District to Edinburgh, the perfect place to stop for lunch while admiring the scenery is Moffat, a picturesque town in southern Scotland.

Located halfway between the two destinations, Moffat provides a serene break from the drive. Visit the charming Waterside Café, nestled along the banks of the River Annan. The café offers delicious locally-sourced dishes, catering to a variety of dietary preferences. Enjoy a leisurely meal on their outdoor terrace, where you can take in the idyllic views of the river, the lush greenery, and the quaint stone bridge.

The town boasts delightful, historic architecture and beautiful gardens, perfect for a post-lunch stroll. The surrounding landscape showcases rolling hills and picturesque valleys, providing a stunning backdrop for your dining experience.

Edinburgh in the Afternoon

Welcome to the Capital of Scotland! Did you know that over 75% of the buildings in the city are “listed” meaning that they are protected for being of particular historical and/or architectural interest and significance? Your first evening exploring the most significant of these locations with a walking tour of Edinburgh’s Medieval Old Town before we delve into another of Scotland’s great institutions with a Whisky discovery and tasting experience.

Guided Walking Tour of Edinburgh’s Old Town

Get to know the history of the city as you walk its cobbled streets and narrow lanes. Some of the sites you will discuss with your guide are St Giles Cathedral where you will discover its links to John Knox and learn why it is known as the “Cradle of Presbyterianism”, Greyfriars Kirk & Graveyard, and the monument to Greyfriars Bobby, the Scottish Terrier who spent 14 years guarding his owner’s grave and the.

Scotch Whisky Experience

In the heart of Edinburgh’s Old Town, The Scotch Whisky Experience opened in 1987 when the Scottish Whisky industry combined to fund this showcase celebrating the history and development of Scotch whisky.

Your tour features an interactive trip through the production of Scotch, a session exploring the regional variations in scent and flavor between the different Scotch regions, and of course a tasting experience within the walls of the World’s Largest Collection of Scotch Whisky.

Your accommodation for the evening will be in the center of the old town.

Day 7: Edinburgh Highlights Tour

Today you can take advantage of being able to spend the whole day in Edinburgh by visiting the most famous and iconic sites in the capital. Your guided tours for the day include:

Climb the Walter Scott Monument

The 200-foot high monument to the author of legendary Scottish literature like Ivanhoe, Rob Roy, and Waverley stands rises imperiously into the sky just a stone’s throw from Waverley station and is decorated with 64 characters representing characters from his books and poems.

Arthur’s Seat

Enjoy a trip to the summit of Arthur’s Seat, the peak of a group of hills formed by an extinct Volcano that provides the finest views across the city.

Edinburgh Castle

The most famous landmark in Edinburgh, discover the fascinating historical tales and stories of scandal and intrigue surrounding the many famous figures intrinsic to the history of the castle such as Mary Queen of Scots, the Child King James the 6th, Oliver Cromwell, and many more.

Exhibits on display here include the oldest Crown Jewels in Britain – the Honors of Scotland, and The Stone of Destiny, an ancient symbol of Scotland’s monarchy where rulers were crowned.

Holyrood Palace

The Queen’s Scottish Palace and official residence in Scotland, crowning the iconic Royal Mile thoroughfare which runs from the Castle to the Palace.

Edinburgh Dungeon

The gruesome twosome Burke and Hare, infamous cannibal Sawney Bean, and The Witch of the Potterrow Port Agnes Finnie to name but a few, Edinburgh is a city with a dark and often bloody past and the Edinburgh Dungeon with its interactive live-action exhibitions is the most fun way to reveal this aspect of the city’s character.

Day 8: Loch Lomond - Glasgow

Your itinerary for today will see you travel from the Capital with your driver guide to Glasgow, Scotland’s largest city via one of the country’s most revered natural beauty spots.

Loch Lomond & The Trossachs

The largest lake in the entirety of the UK by surface area, our tour planning specialists can arrange a private cruise along the loch to the waterfalls and woodland walks of Inversnaid where you can keep an eye out for the Wild Scottish Deer and wildlife roaming free.

After your Loch Lomond experience, you will rejoin your driver guide for the brisk 50-minute drive to Glasgow which is generally thought of as being Scotland’s cultural hub.

Some notable stops or attractions you might want to visit include:

• Kelvingrove Art Gallery & Museum
• Glasgow Cathedral
• Glasgow University
• The boutiques and artisan stores of Glasgow’s West End
• Riverside Museum

Your accommodation will be in Glasgow for the evening in advance of your flight to Dublin from Glasgow airport the following morning.

Day 9 & 10: Dublin

After a short 55-minute flight, the remaining 2 days of your 10-day UK tour itinerary will be spent discovering the best of Dublin, the capital of the Republic of Ireland. With its rich mix of history, tradition, and culture It seems like almost every building in Dublin has a story to tell.

Your driver guide will reveal the historic tales, fascinating characters, and distinctive Irish culture behind:

O’Connell Street & The General Post Office

A must-see for anyone with an interest in Irish history or the Easter uprising. The GPO was the spot where the Proclamation was read in 1916, for the very first time.

Trinity College

The oldest and perhaps most architecturally beautiful university in Ireland, founded in 1546 by King Henry VIII you will also find the hallowed ‘Book of Kells’ from 384 AD within its walls.

The Doors Of Dublin

You’ll never see two identical doors as you wander through Dublin city, and their unique and colorful charm gives the city an unmistakable character.

Guinness Storehouse

The homeland of Ireland’s national drink. We don’t believe that Guinness tastes the same anywhere else in the world, and you find out if you agree or not by pouring your own pint in the factory where it all started.

Whitefriar Street Church

Romantics will wish to visit the place of rest for the patron saint of lovers, St Valentine himself at Whitefriar Street Church.

Temple Bar District

Enjoy the traditional bars and music in the city’s Temple Bar district.

Irish Immigration Museum

See if you can trace your roots back to Ireland at the Irish Immigration Museum.

Kilmainham Gaol

Built in 1796 it served as a prison in former times where many Irish revolutionaries were imprisoned and executed by the British.

Dublin Castle

Commissioned by King John all the way back in 1204, and although the majority of what you can see now was actually constructed in the 18th century, the Record Tower from that era is still intact.

The castle is still in use for formal occasions and functions by the Irish government today and tours of the grounds are available at regular intervals.

Upon completion of your Dublin tour itinerary, your driver guide will transport you to Dublin airport and bid you a fond farewell as you leave the UK and Ireland behind and return home with a heart full of divine memories that will remain with you for a lifetime.

Let us know your questions!

+1 (619) 404-6091

Fill out the form with the destinations & wish-list for your perfect trip. Our specialists will be happy to provide additional ideas & inspiration for your vacation

You will then receive a tailor-made tour itinerary which can be revised an unlimited number of times to ensure total satisfaction and the perfect vacation in England

Your guide will meet you at the pre-arranged starting point. You can count on us for 24/7 in-country support and everything else necessary for a wonderful & seamless tour

Request a Custom 10 day UK Itinerary

Every guest to our shores is different, and we believe that each of our clients deserves to have their itinerary tailored to suit their exact tastes and requirements. By only providing private tours, we are able to deliver custom itineraries that are bespoke to each of our guests.

To request your completely complimentary 10-day UK tour itinerary, just get in touch using the form below, and our tour planning specialists will contact you.

Tour Itineraries To Inspire Your Trip

One-Week Tour of the United Kingdom

4 Week Tour of the UK

3-Week UK Tour Itinerary

2 Weeks UK Tour Itinerary

It's time to start planning your ideal england vacation.

• Free cancellation & rescheduling on private tours
• Private & experienced driver-guides
• Fully customizable to suit your group
• Flexible deposits

Stay Connected

Popular Tours

England itineraries.

PTE Travel Ltd | Partnered with DABA Tourism Marketing

Contact Our Team

Uk itineraries.

Booking Guarantee: Flexible cancellations & rescheduling on all tours!

• Privacy Overview
• Strictly Necessary Cookies
• 3rd Party Cookies

This website uses cookies so that we can provide you with the best user experience possible. Cookie information is stored in your browser and performs functions such as recognising you when you return to our website and helping our team to understand which sections of the website you find most interesting and useful.

Strictly Necessary Cookie should be enabled at all times so that we can save your preferences for cookie settings.

If you disable this cookie, we will not be able to save your preferences. This means that every time you visit this website you will need to enable or disable cookies again.

This website uses Google Analytics to collect anonymous information such as the number of visitors to the site, and the most popular pages.

Keeping this cookie enabled helps us to improve our website.

Please enable Strictly Necessary Cookies first so that we can save your preferences!

• UK Package Tours from London (6-10 Days) >

England, Ireland, Wales & Scotland Tour - 10 Days

This 10 day England, Ireland, Wales & Scotland tour gives you the ultimate experience of Great Britain and Ireland. You’ll get to see many highlights of this magical land, including London, Edinburgh, Glasgow, Dublin and Cardiff. We’ll travel through the heart of the glorious English countryside, passing beautiful towns like Shakespeare’s Stratford-upon-Avon and the Roman city of York and into areas of outstanding natural beauty, including The Lake District and the Yorkshire Dales. This England, Ireland, Wales & Scotland Tour departs regularly throughout the year and includes accommodation, breakfasts, some evening meals, driver and more!

To see a full itinerary and available travel dates, see here .

what to expect:

Buckingham Palace

Day 1 – London

Arrive in London, the capital city of the United Kingdom. You’ll have some time to explore the city, perhaps with a walk along the bank of the River Thames or a visit to one of the museums in Kensington. You might also feel like visiting one of London’s diverse neighbourhoods such as Covent Garden, Westminster, Mayfair or Chelsea.

Hotel: Park Plaza Riverbank

Day 2 – Stratford & York

Roman Walls and York Minster

Leaving London, we’ll head right into the heart of the English countryside, known for its green rolling hills and beautiful landscapes. The first stop is the town of Stratford-upon-Avon, the birthplace of William Shakespeare. Visit the house where Shakespeare was born and grew up, as well as the nearby visitor centre. Departing Stratford, we’ll head up north to the city of York. Enjoy an orientation walk passing the ancient Roman city walls, York Minster and the collection of ancient narrow streets, known as The Shambles.

The evening is spent in the spa town of Harrogate.  Enjoy a traditional pub meal.

Hotel Crowne Plaza Harrogate including breakfast and dinner

On day three of this England, Ireland, Wales & Scotland Tour we’ll slowly work our way further North. We’ll drive through the Yorkshire Dales and into the Lake District, a UNESCO World Heritage site and a beautiful part of England, known for its writers and poets. We’ll see Lake Windermere and travel through the countryside, which inspired the English poet William Wordsworth and writer Beatrix Potter. The drive continues until we head into Scotland, passing Gretna Green, where couples used to elope and tie the knot.  We continue on to Glasgow, the third largest city in the UK, with an orientation that passes many of the famous sites.  In the evening there is an optional extra to dine at a traditional venue featuring Scottish entertainment.

Novotel Glasgow Center, including breakfast

Day 4 – Edinburgh

A full day to explore all that Edinburgh has to offer! This is the capital city of Scotland, perched on a hill with stunning views all around. Led by a local specialist, highlights of the day include visiting Edinburgh Castle and seeing the Royal Mile, the Palace of Holyroodhouse, the beautiful new Scottish Parliament building. In the evening, we return to the same hotel in Glasgow and will have a delicious meal at a local restaurant (included).

Day 5 – Belfast

We’ll head down the Scottish coastline and take a short ferryride across to Northern Island, arriving soon after in Belfast. Belfast is the capital city of Northern Island and we’ll see the City Hall and the place where the Titanic was built. From here, it’s straight to our hotel in Dublin (either Ballsbridge hotel or Mespil hotel)

Day 6 – Dublin

St Patrick’s Cathedral

A full day to explore Dublin, the capital city of Ireland. Joined by a local specialist, you’ll get to see many of the highlights of the city including St Patrick’s Cathedral, Trinity College, the Guinness brewhouse and more! Spend the day soaking up the special and unique Irish culture.

Day 7 – Ireland

Departing Dublin, we head to the Irish National Stud Farm, famous for rearing racehorses. We’ll have a guided tour of the farm, followed by a walk in the Japanese gardens, considered the finest of their kind in the whole of Europe. From here, admire the medieval castle at Kilkenny Castle before some free time for lunch. We then head south to Waterford Crystal, the factory that produces iconic crystal gifts and high-quality glassware.

Evening accommodation at the Marina/Fitzwilton

Day 8 – Cardiff

Cardiff Castle

Day 8 of this England, Ireland, Scotland & Wales tour is spent in Cardiff. We start the day by taking the ferry over the Irish Sea, and head to Cardiff, the capital city of Wales. Highlights of the city include the Millenium Centre, National Assembly and Cardiff Castle. Dinner is also included, and we’ll eat with a local Welsh family in the beautiful countryside.

Day 9 – Bath & Stonehenge

Cross back into England, and head to Bath, a UNESCO World Heritage city that’s famous for its Roman Baths and Georgian period architecture. Having explored Bath, we head to Stonehenge, another UNESCO World Heritage Site famous for its neolithic stone circle. In the evening we return to London, staying at the Park Plaza Riverbank/Park Plaza County Hall.

Day 10 – Depart London

The final day of this England, Ireland, Scotland & Wales tour – say goodbye to your fellow travellers and head home!

further details

Tour includes:

• Breakfasts every day (except day 1)
• Transportation via luxury coach with WIFI and train travel. (As well as a ferry to and from Ireland)
• Driver and separate travel director
• Audio headsets

Tour excludes:

you might also be interested

England & scotland tour - 10 days, get free updates.

10 day UK trip itinerary

TLDR Summary

10-Day UK Trip Itinerary

• Consider focusing on a specific region or city, such as London and Edinburgh , to have more time to explore.
• Be mindful of travel times between destinations and the feasibility of day trips.
• Prioritize your must-see attractions and be flexible with your itinerary.
• Plan for some downtime and rest during your trip.

Itinerary Suggestions

Based on the discussions, it is recommended to focus on a specific region or city rather than trying to cover too many places in a short amount of time. Here are some suggestions:

London and Edinburgh : Spend the majority of your trip exploring these two cities, as they offer a wealth of attractions and history. Consider allocating at least 4-5 days in each city to fully experience them [2:2] .

London and Day Trips : Stay in London and take day trips to nearby attractions such as Stonehenge, Bath, Cambridge, or Brighton. This allows you to base yourself in one location while still experiencing different areas [4:3] .

London and Wales : Combine London with a visit to Wales , particularly Snowdonia and Pen Y Fan for nature lovers. You can also explore Cardiff for its historical sites [3:9] .

Considerations

• Be realistic about travel times between destinations and the feasibility of day trips. Some day trips, like Edinburgh from London , may not be practical due to the long travel time [4:8] .
• Prioritize your must-see attractions and be flexible with your itinerary. Don't try to cram too much into each day, as it can lead to exhaustion and not fully enjoying the experience [5:5] .
• Plan for some downtime and rest during your trip. It's important to have time to relax, especially if you're traveling for 10 days straight [4:7] .

Remember, it's better to fully experience a few places than rush through many without truly enjoying them. Adjust your itinerary based on your interests and preferences, and don't be afraid to make changes as you go along. Happy travels!

Not helpful

Automatically access Gigabrain whenever you Google.

Source threads.

10 Day Trip in the UK

• The original poster (OP) is planning a ten-day trip in the UK in May, with the intention of visiting Isle of Skye , Edinburgh , Bristol / Bath , and ending in London for a concert.
• Some commenters suggest that a week or two in London alone would be enough to fill the trip, and question the necessity of visiting Isle of Skye .
• Renting a car to drive to and through Isle of Skye from Inverness is considered a sensible idea, as it allows for more flexibility and the opportunity to see the countryside.
• Public transport is also an option for getting around, with trains and buses being reliable and convenient.
• Driving in Scotland is generally seen as manageable, with smaller hatchback cars recommended for the narrow roads.
• Suggestions for other places to visit include Glenfinnan Viaduct , Linlithgow , Sterling , Glencoe , Fort William , Eilean Donan , Cotswolds , and Lake District .
• Some commenters mention the option of adding Ireland to the trip, but it is generally seen as too much to fit into a ten-day itinerary.
• Bath receives high praise as a base for exploring the Cotswolds , Bristol , Glastonbury , and Wells .

I'm planning a ten-day trip in the UK in May, which I'm wanting to end with London, as I'm going to a concert. I've been considering doing Isle of Skye (a couple days), Edinburgh (a couple days), Bristol/Bath (perhaps just a day) before London (a few days), and I would love any tips and advice, particularly in regards to Isle of Skye.

If I fly to Inverness and rent a car to drive to and through Isle of Skye, then head to Edinburgh with a detour at Glenfinnan Viaduct, is that a sensible idea/route? I'm used to driving in America and I read about the narrow lanes within Skye and obviously that you have to drive on the left side of the road. Is that hard to become accustomed to? I also read that getting an automatic for the car rental will be more expensive since there are mostly manual transmissions in the UK. Or should I nix the rental car altogether, and go with a bus tour group? I know you don't get to see as much with a tour group but it may make more sense since I'm traveling solo.

Lastly, I'm guessing this is a yes, but is trying to tack on Dublin and Galway at the start way too ambitious? I ask because it turns out that flying into Dublin is way cheaper than flying into England or Scotland. But it seems like I'd be spending very little time at each of these locations if I start there since I'd have to fly over to Scotland. So essentially, this alternative itinerary would be Ireland-Scotland-England.

Thank you in advance!

You'll want a car if you intend to see the countryside, but it's a pain in the ass if you're in London . I did a nine- day road trip in the south of England where I picked up a car upon arrival at Heathrow and drove backroads to Bath where I stayed for four days and used as a base to see the Cotswolds , Bristol , Glastonbury , and Wells . Then turned south and stayed in Amberly , and then turned the car in at a train station in London and stayed for another four nights. It was a fantastic and relaxed trip.

If you're okay with lots of time on the road you could drive from Scotland , but that wouldn't leave you a lot of time to see things or relax. But if you do that I highly recommend making time for the Lake District and York .

I was thinking of only getting a car if going around Scotland to Isle of Skye , and not from driving from Scotland to England (would take a train or plane), but this is good for me to know should I want to explore more of the south of England .

I have friends in Bristol , and they said Cotswolds and Lake District are lovely, but more so better for a week-long getaway. I don't know much/anything about Glastonbury ( besides the festival takes place there), Wells , Amberly , or York , but I'll certainly look into them. Thank you so much for your insight.

Of course, a lot of this comes down to personal preference. I'm from the US and have been to the UK several times, with three stops in Edinburg . First, I have never needed a car, because the trains and buses can usually get you anywhere. I buy a Brittail pass before I go for the number of days I think I'll use it, but only for longer trips -- it's usually cheaper to pay separately for short journeys.

If you start the trip in Dublin , take the train to Belfast and then the ferry to Glasgow , you could get to the Isle of Skye from that side. It would take an extra day or two, but those cities are worth seeing as well.

Personally, I adore Bath and highly recommend giving it a couple of days, during which you check out one or more small group tours by a company called Mad Max that take you to the Cotswalds , Wells , Avebury , and a whole lot of other fantastic places.

Getting around London is absolutely hell by car or bus. I recommend just using the Tube.

You can take a fun day trip from Edinburg to John O'Groats but I never went to Isle of Skye . I'll let others advise you on that.

Yes, the car was only if I were to go to Isle of Skye , but definitely wouldn't use it around cities like Edinburgh or London . Good to know about when the BritRail pass is useful.

I think if did go to Ireland , I'd want to do Galway too, so I think I've answered my own q at this point if trying to add in Ireland is too much, haha. Your high remarks of Bath have definitely piqued my interest more. I have friends that live in Bristol , and they highly recommended Bath as well. Another friend told me about The Cotswolds , but haven't heard about Wells or Avebury , so will look into them.

Will look into John O'Groats as well, as I did see it on the map, but literally only recognize the name as a restaurant in LA , haha.

Thank you so much for the insight. I really appreciate it.

I definitely wouldn't add another country for such a short trip. You can fill a week or two just in London . Is Sky a must? It's amazing, but very much out of your way, what is it that draws you there? You can get around by public transport, but I agree it would be a good idea to rent a car, you can see so much more. 5-6 days driving around Scotland would be heavenly.

I must’ve seen a photo on the internet once, probably Condé Nast Traveler , and decided I had to go, haha. But I got a similar reaction from my two friends who grew up and live in England in Bristol . Perhaps it’ s not worth all the effort to go to Skye esp if I’ll be trying to do the driving solo?

Honesty now that I think about it, do it, I don’t have any issues with driving in Scotland , solo is perfect because you can get a small hatch back for the tiny roads, and they’re not busy at all, even around Edinburgh . Visit Linlithgow , Sterling , Glencoe , Fort William , Glenfinnan , then take the ferry across, explore Skye , on the way back visit Eilean Donan Castle then Lock Ness , Urquhart Castle , Inverness , Highland folk museum , Blair Castle , Dunked , Dunfermline . Hiking is highly recommend too, but you don’t have time. You could spend 5-6 days doing something like that, fly to London , and Bath is a day trip, the train is like 1.2 hours.

Please check my itinerary for London/Porto/Barcelona 10 day trip

This trip is planned for last week of October thru 1st week of November. Husband and I are in our late twenties/early 30s. We are definitely looking for a good combination of sight seeing (want to see Big Ben, Buckingham palace, La Sagrada Familia, Park Guell, boardwalk in Barcelona) and relaxing (food and drink focused, not really party animals). We are both pretty novice international travelers. AKA we have only traveled together within the US and Mexico.

Day 0: Arrive on Saturday

Day 1 (Sunday): First full day in London (chill, bus tour, cute neighborhood** in evening)

** Cute neighborhood recommendations in London appreciated. Somewhere that's close to public transit but also has walkable coffee sandwich shops and gardens/parks.

Day 2 (Monday): London (walking tour)

Day 3 (Tuesday): Travel to Porto from London - Porto Night 1

Day 4 (Wednesday): Porto Night 2

Day 5 (Thursday): Madrid Night 1

Day 6 (Friday): Barcelona Night 1

Day 7 (Saturday): Barcelona Night 2

Day 8 (Sunday): Barcelona Night 3

Day 9 (Monday): Barcelona Night 4

Day 10 (Tuesday): Leave for airport around 6:00am

Our main concerns is the following:

Do we try to squeeze in a trip to Porto and Madrid OR just spend time in London and Barcelona OR LDN/Porto/BCN? I have heard lovely things about Portugal but I'm worried that the trip will feel rushed. Our budget (excluding plane tickets) is $10k. Also I am less familiar with what there is to see in Porto.

Way too rushed. Split this trip between London and Barcelona , 4 days each.

Agree with the above . London & Barcelona have enough to occupy you for 10 days ( plus the transit that eats up a lot of time )

Way too much travel time, not enough time in any location to actually do much, other than Barcelona . My suggestion is that you pick one area, either Spain or UK, and see 3 cities there, say 4 days in London and 3 each in Edinburgh and the Cotswold /lakes district .

We have a preference of seeing Spain / Portugal . Does it make more sense to just have our first full day in London and then go see Porto for 3 nights and then Barcelona for the rest of the trip? We are flying into London as there is a direct flight from our current city.

Got it. That's tough. We have the luxury of doing 3 big international trips per year, and actually have Spain next spring. We are doing San Sebastian for 3 days, Barcelona for 4, Seville for 4 and Madrid for 5. Portugal will be 5 each in Porto and Lisbon with 4 in Algrave in 2025.

Porto will give you a great taste of Portugal , history, wine/vineyards, food, etc. and Barcelona will be the same for Spain .

We like longer in a place to get a better feel for it and add on side trips like Toledo from Madrid or Sinatra from Lisbon .

Neighbourhoods in London i love spending time in. East London ( Spitalfields, Bricklane, Wapping ), Southwark ( London Bridge- Borough Market), Soho , Seven Dials , Carnaby St, Greenwich, Sloane Square area.

Are 10 days enough to see England and Scotland?

My wife and I are thinking of visiting the UK next year. We love to be in nature more than the cities. My wife is also a history buff so she enjoys trips to museums wherever we go.

I would like to know the answer to a few general questions and probably recommendations if anyone has one for us:

• Is April a good time to visit?
• Are 10 days good enough to cover major places and do some hiking along the way?
• What is the best mode of transport to go from one place to another? I am basically concerned about between cities and not within a city. Is it better to rent a car or would it make sense to just hop on trains or buses?
• What kind of accommodation is the best? Is AirBNB a good idea? Or is there any other better option?

We don't travel in luxury. We don't care about fancy hotels or luxury food. Just want to see the world while saving money.

• Early April will be cold in the north. Low temps in the 30s in Scotland ; high temps in the mid-50s. But fine in London and the south.
• I would say 10 days is fine. You can obviously spend a month in England , but 10 days is a good trip, especially if you're not itching to spend all your time in cities.
• Trains work very well in England . Extraordinarily well by US/Canada standards. But... if you want to do some hiking in rural areas, a car might be handy.
• I've had good luck with inns and BnBs in England and Wales . All pre-"AirBnb" era. but the countryside, generally, has a lot of small inns and BnBs.

I would put in a plug for Wales , which is beautiful and contains some great hiking areas. I think a key itinerary planning question for a 10 day trip is "do I really want to do Scotland ?" Because if the answer is yes, that chews up a certain number of days. And losing 4 days from a 10 day trip really dictates a lot of the other itinerary. You can do a really beautiful 10 day trip in southern England and Wales (I've done it). Or you can do a trip that includes 4 days to go to Scotland , see Edinburgh and hike in the highlands for a day. But those are different trips. If you expand it to 12-13 days, you can start talking about both.

Sorry for responding to an old post! I’m not super interested in seeing London but am very interested in Wales and Scotland . My family did a 13 day/12 night tour of Ireland and Northern Ireland (including one day on Skellig Island which was absolutely amazing) and although it felt a tad rushed we did a loop of the entire island. Would this be possible for Scotland and Wales as well? We would probably fly into London and burn one day there so we are thinking of 10-14 days.

I think so. Wales is sort of a slightly larger version of SW Ireland (Ring of Kerry, Skellig, Killarny). Similar feel, albeit with some larger cities in the South if you're interested. If you skip South England , and just power out to Wales , you could do a 5/5 Wales / Scotland trip and feel pretty darn good about it.

Hi, thanks for the detailed response. I will definitely take that extra 4 days into consideration for Scotland . I don't want to just rush in to check off any countries from my travel list. Might as well try to add a couple more days to the trip. That' s a very helpful input. Thanks again.

Yeah you’re going to want actual BnBs instead of Airbnb . Or look into pub accommodations— many pubs in small towns have rooms to rent. It’s a country full of independent operators, and you seem like the kind of tourist who would want to encourage that.

If you like being outdoors, look at something like the Cotswold way , where you can hike from town to town, stay in small inns, and pay someone else to ferry your luggage.

10 days is going at a fast lick. London is massive so you need at least 2 whole days to see just a selection of the main tourist sites let alone get a feel for the real city by getting away from the tourist traps. Getting trains out of London is easy enough if there isn't a strike on which is probably likely given the govt is a shitshow at the moment but then getting between cities can be harder depending on which places you want to get to and that's just getting to cities. If you want to get out and do hiking there are loads of places to see depending on what you want to see. There are numerous areas of natural beauty where there are lots of countryside and walks to do. The South Downs , the New Forest , Dartmoor , The Lake District , the Cotswolds , The Peak District and many more. I just came back from a short trip in Scotland that took 10 days and that was skipping big cities and seeing the west coast and the Isle of Skye on a road trip. We were moving between places every day pretty much. We only stopped 2 nights at Ben Nevis to climb the peak. If you want to do Scotland I'd recommend doing going to Edinburgh for a couple of nights, then getting the train to Glasgow , do a night there at least and then take a tour around the west coast up to Loch Lomond and through Glen Etive where they filmed Skyfall , visit Glencoe and Glenfinnan for the Harry Potter train viaduct, go up to Fort William and Ben Nevis , even if you don't go all the way up you get amazing views on a clear day from halfway up and there is a little loch midway up you can walk around. If you can go to Skye and see that as there is an abundance of hikers go up there and the scenery is spectacular. Loch Ness is huge but I didn't find it as spectacular scenery wise as other places, it's a very long Loch but that's about it and Inverness didn't grab me as overly interesting. There are also distilleries where you can do a tasting. I did one at Singleton which is a brand now owned by Diageo so it was very slick and very new in there but good value for what you got. Their shop then has a good selection in there but I'd do a tour and then go to a whisky bar where they have different whisky flights to try and find your favourite malt if that's something that interests you. I'd not try and overdo it with destinations, you can't fit it all in so work out a priority list and look for some tours to either join or follow your own in a hire car. You'll cover a lot more on a tour than trying to do it yourself by public transport and a car will be pretty necessary for any hiking you go on as otherwise you're at the mercy of trains. Look at downloading an app like Komoot for hikes but I find the OS Maps app is better and has some properly set up hikes in there from walking magazines and will normally be circular routes, with a pub for a drink or food and will start from parking or train stations. It does cost for a membership but it's a good app and has proper Ordnance Survey maps in it so is great for hiking and even just planning your own hikes in. April isn't always the best month. It's not typically warm, can be snowing in some places and is usually fairly overcast and wet so bring some decent footwear for mud and puddles and a good waterproof coat but you can ways but a hat and gloves here if needed. Try and avoid the school holiday dates if you can as places will be busier and more expensive.

• As good as any. The weather will be a bit wet especially in Scotland . You'd find better weather in May.
• No, but you can still have a fine time. Just don't think you can "do the UK" in 10 days. Pick some places and enjoy them.
• Between large cities, trains work fine. To smaller cities, they may or may not be adequate for you and to towns and villages they tend not to work. They work less in Scotland than south-east England.
• I suggest choosing your accommodation agency based on how much reputation they have for things going wrong, and choosing established hotels, holiday homes, etc, whichever provider you use.

The major upland ( i.e. not flat) hiking areas in the UK are Devon & Cornwall , Lake District & Yorkshire Dales , Peak District , Mid and North Wales , Loch Lomond & Glencoe area , Cairngorms , and most of the central and north Highlands of Scotland . You'll notice most of those are not near major cities except the Peak district (between Manchester , Sheffield , and the Leeds - Bradford conurbation) and Loch Lomond (near Glasgow).

So trying to cover both major cities with museums and dramatic natural landscapes in 10 days is difficult. I suggest you either stick to the West Country , therefore Exeter , Plymouth , Dartmoor , etc ; or Glasgow , Stirling , and Loch Lomond up towards Glencoe . You'll need a car to tour either area outside the cities, so I suggest basing yourself in the city for some of the time, then renting a car and going into the landscape for the rest of the time.

I’m planning 14 days in May, and have found good deals with Airbnb ($60 a night outside Leeds )

I was told I should: rent a car if I’m going outside a city in Scotland Look into the Brit Rail Pass (it’s exclusively for foreigners visiting the UK) Remember travel time when planning your trips between cities.

Hi, thanks for the Rail pass recommendation. Is your trip similar to mine? If yes, do you mind sharing a bit more through DM?

since you love nature you may like the North of England specifically Lake district . You may also like Wales as they have Snowdonia and Pen Y Fan.

UK Itinerary

Hi! First time solo traveler (25F, American) going to the UK for 10 days in March. I had a group tour booked through Trafalgar, which unfortunately got cancelled. I'm trying to decide how to spend my time. My original itinerary was London for 2 nights, Stonehenge, Bath Cardiff (stay in Cardiff), Liverpool, through the Lake district to Edinburgh (2 nights in Edinburgh), York, Stratford-upon-Avon back to London. I'm wondering if it's worth it/feasible to keep this itinerary solo? I know the group was planning on bussing from location to location for most of the travel.

I love music, museums, architecture and history if that's helpful in the deciding factors.

So I guess my real question comes down to is it worth hopping from city to city or should I just do day trips from London/Edinburgh?

&#x200B;

I appreciate any insight/info! Thanks!

As someone who lives in the UK and has traveled around it a lot, I'd recommend just splitting your time between London and Edinburgh , maybe with a night in York on your way between them. Unless there's something you really wanted to see/do in any of the other places, the itinerary seems a bit box-ticky. you could easily spend the whole time in London and not run out of things to do and Edinburgh 's not far behind. There's also lots of places you could do day trips to as well.

Also, if you do go between London and Edinburgh , take the train, taking a coach is not worth the savings.

If you get a rail card and book in advance, the train from London to Edinburgh is only £30 ish !

Agree. As expensive as the train is, the coaches can be extremely painful as they usually stop off at so many towns and cities you will want to go crazy. I think there is some direct coaches to avoid all this of you look around.

Contrary to what I just said, there is train strikes on in the UK at the moment and trains are crazy pricey if you book last minute.

I also agree what other people have said, sounds like too many places in a short space of time. I would stick to 3 or 4 cities. London , bath , Bristol ? York and Edinburgh all have good pub scenes and music, as far as I am aware . Have a lovely time!

Megabus doesn't have that many stops along the way between London and Edinburgh , and definitely considerably cheaper than the trains!

I would recommend staying in London and maybe one other city and doing day trips. Stonehenge / Bath is an easy day trip from London , as are Cambridge , Brighton , Oxford , among others. I was warned ahead of time that Stonehenge might be underwhelming, but it was a highlight of the trip for me; the key is, you need to be willing to imagine what it might have looked like in its prime (the audio guide is good for helping with this).

Maybe look into a cheap flight from London to either Edinburgh or Glasgow . Sometimes easy jet is much cheaper than the train. Also look ahead if your going by train as we are currently having several rail strikes at the moment. Hopefully the pay issue will be resolved before March, but it’s worth keeping an eye on it. Edinburgh has a several free museums that are well worth a visit, Grey Friars Bobby statue is worth a photo op. Do a night time ghost tour, castle and a walk up Arthur ’s seat . Edinburgh zoo is also worth a visit. York is a fantastic city, and a walk around the wall is fun. The shambles are fun to walk through, and a tour of York Minster is worth the money, if it’s open go onto the roof as the view is fantastic. There is also a pub close to York Minster that has part of a Roman bath in its cellar.

What are you trying to see or do specifically on the trip? I gather that museums are part of it. As for architecture, you won’t struggle to find interesting examples - it just seems a bit like you won’t have time to stop and look for all the rushing around! The music/performing scene in the cities you mention is really great, but that’s generally going to be a late night pub/bar setting and might not fit terrible well into such a densely packed itinerary.

The current itinerary has an awful lot of jumping around cities without seeing much of any of them. Edinburgh and London in particular easily have a week’s worth of exploring/day trips and the Lake District has weeks worth of hiking. It sounds a lot like you’re going to spend 10 days pouring money into tourist attractions interspersed with long bus journeys.

I see that Stonehenge is geographically on your route, but I personally wouldn’t make any special effort to include it beyond driving past - it’ s profoundly underwhelming and over-touristed to actually visit.

Just depends how much you want to move around. The more places you go, the more time on a bus/train you have.

I don't think you can see London in 2 days. You can easily spend at least a week doing new stuff every day and not getting bored. Obviously that doesn't fit into a 10 day itinerary but if you do choose to spend more time in London like you said then it'll still be an awesome time so don't underestimate more time in fewer places.

London Trip Advice Please! 10 Day Itinerary

My husband and I are traveling to London this year and this is our tentative itinerary for our 10-day trip. I want to know if this is doable or if we're being too ambitious some days. Only the one day of seeing the Harry Potter studio tour is non-negotiable as we already bought tickets for that day.

Morning - Arrive in London at 9:35 am

Lunch - The Gate

Afternoon & Evening - Hammersmith Bridge, Kensington Palace, and Hyde Park

Morning - Big Ben + Westminster Abbey

Lunch - Neat Victoria

Afternoon & Evening - Buckingham Palace (from the outside only) + Wellington Arch + Harrods + Natural History Museum

Dinner - Sutton and Sons

Morning - Trafalgar Square + Leicester Square

Lunch - Mildred's Covent Garden

Afternoon & Evening - Piccadilly Circus + House of MinaLima

Dinner - Undecided

Morning - Graffiti Tunnel + Millennium Bridge

Lunch - Undecided

Afternoon & Evening - HMS Belfast + Tower Bridge + Tower of London

Morning - Dr Who Store

Afternoon & Evening - Meeting friends & family

Morning - British Library + King's Cross

Afternoon & Evening - Word on the Water + Brick Lane + Spitalfields Market

Morning - Notting Hill

Afternoon & Evening - British Museum + London Theatre

Morning - Free

Afternoon & Evening - WB Tour

Morning - London Eye + Thames

Flight back home at 11:30 AM

This is what we have so far. Let me know if we're missing anything, if any day is too stuffed (impossible to see in one day), or if I should swap anything out. Thanks in advance for any suggestions or input!

Edit: Removed Edinburgh feom Day 7 after feedback.

In my eyes that’s a bit packed, the main issues I can see being

Day 2 afternoon and evening: doubt you can fit that in. The NHM on its own I’d say you can probably devote the morning, lunch and much of the afternoon in it, and I’d recommend doing so to get the most out of the day

Edinburgh day trip isn’t happening, considering it’ s a 4h40 trip each way by train or probably a 4 hour trip by plane (including arrivals, checkin etc). I wouldn’t even try tbf, Paris or Brussels is probably a more realistic day trip

Day 4 afternoon and evening also looks packed - Belfast and the tower in one day will likely be a lot

A day trip to Edinburgh is lunacy. You need a night there at least. York is a bit more achievable as a day trip and is a lovely city.

I was just in London for 7 days and can't imagine seeing that much that quickly without some fatigue. Where are you staying while in London ? Commute times will also affect your daily schedule. Some specific comments or tips:

Day 2: You need to buy your Big Bend tickets ASAP because they sell incredibly fast. If you can't find tickets then approach Parliament security gate and ask about viewing a live session of Parliament. You can at least enter the building that way and see the main halls whether you want to view the session or not. You can also leave any time you'd like.

Day 4: Have lunch somewhere in Borough Market . You'll have dozens of stalls to choose from if you don't mind fighting crowds. You're also clearly a Potter fan so you'll also get to see the original Leakey Cauldron entrance here. The afternoon you listed is definitely busy.

Day 6: The tourist trap Harry Potter platform 9 3/4 is here with an hour line for a photo with a trolley half way through a brick wall. However, buy any train ticket or day pass for King's Cross . A ticket gets you into the King's Cross platforms where they actually filmed for the movie! There was nobody there when I visited on a Saturday because everybody just visits the tourist trap spot.

In general also check show times at Royal Albert Hall . I saw two live concerts there in box seats for $40 total thanks to deals on their website. Prioritize eating some Indian food because you'd be hard pressed to find any better outside India or the US.

I think your days are a little too busy.

If you go to Hammersmith bridge , you have got to walk along the Thames path and have a pint at one of the excellent pubs there. This could easily take a couple of hours at least. It is well worth the time.

Maybe try not to force yourself to do all of those things, every single day. Be fine with doing only one excellent thing per day if that's how it works out. Remember to have rest and have fun.

Edinburgh is pretty much at the other end of the U.K, I’d suggest adding an extra day there. In my honest opinion I think it’ s silly to try and do in a day, you’ll be absolutely shattered and probably won’t have time to do much of what you want to do/see.

If that’s not possible, how are you getting there? Trains can take hours, if you’re flying please be aware that most London airports aren’t actually in London (except for City).

Is this a good 2 week itinerary for my first UK trip?

After a lot of great feedback, seems like Skye is too short notice for decent bookings/pretty remote , Cardiff is unremarkable and Snowdonia while nice is not as nice as the Lakes District

Soooooo.....

How does this sound to you good folks

5 nights London- 2 nights Edinburgh- (museums/nightlife) 3 nights Lakes District (hiking/relaxing)- OR 3 nights Snowdonia/wales OR 3 nights somewhere else in Scotland 2 nights Bath/Cotswolds/exploring-maybe Stonehenge 2 nights London then home

I have an extra night right now and need suggestions! Should I add it to one of the spots I already have picked out or is there a fun one night/day and a half city/area I should stop at on my way from the Lakes to Bath?

I plan on either hiring a car in Edinburgh and driving the rest myself (I am from America and am used to driving long distances :)

Very open to suggestion though!

Hi all Planning a trip to the UK next month and wanted to ask people who've been/live there

The bulk of my trip will be in London (8 nights) as I have friends there/an event to attend

But I'd like to split the trip in half and see some nature/hike, which I love to do

So it seems like these are my three options right now, but I'm open to suggestions!

Day 1-5 London On the night of 6, sleeper car to Edinburgh Day 7-9in Edinburgh

Now here's my two choices Days 10-12 in Isle of Sky

Days 10-12 split amongst the Lake District, Snowdonia and Cardiff

Skip Edinburgh and just do lake district and wales for 6 nights

Either way I'd head back to London for 2 nights before I headed home

So basically two questions;

Isle of Sky or Lake District/Wales, for the nature part of my trip ?

Is Edinburgh significantly different enough from the rest of the UK that it's worth a 4 day trip to, or should I just rent a car in London and drive to the North west of the UK ?

ALSO- this is just based on my research but if you can recommend a better nature/hiking locale than the ones I've named, please recommend!!

Lakes to Snowdonia is going to be many hours driving, and again on to Cardiff is going to be many more hours driving, I wouldn't do that as it just consumes so much of your short time.

I don't personally think Edinburgh is worth the extra trip in that time, but it is nicely time efficient with the sleeper so it's not too bad, and I don't what you want on the trip, it's certainly worth a visit.

All of the options for the nature part are great, but pick one ( Lakes or Snowdonia or Skye ) I'd probably go for Skye if you don't mind the travel and fly inverness/ london to get back (ie 4-5 hours with waiting rather than over 10) but that's based on me.

The Lakes would make more sense if you're driving it back to London .

Windermere to Betws-y-Coed is only about 3.5 hours driving, the bulk of it is a fairly simple run down the M6 and A55 . Personally I wouldn't extend that to Cardiff , using the gained time to explore the two national parks instead.

Stonehenge for two nights? Really. Most people it's a drive past stop more like two hours than two days. And you can't go up to the stones anymore. Avebury you can but again it's more a stop to stretch your legs than a two day stop

I personally would include Snowdonia and would possibly stay Caernarfon to get the castle etc - would be a shame for you not to go to a welsh speaking part of the UK as it does make it seem different from the rest

There's really not a lot to do in Cardiff as a tourist

Literally no one has recommenced it so it's off my list! Poor Cardiff ! Hahah

My home town haha btw I agree only thing I can think of is Cardiff castle and tbh would only take you 45 mins if that to see the whole thing

Just noticed your username haha if you do end up down these ways plenty of smoke 😶‍🌫️

The Lake District is closed on alternate Thursdays for cleaning, so best that in mind with your scheduling.

I can never remember which Thursday it is whenever I've visit and always get it wrong.

There is however a hole in the fence by the emergency access gate round the back so I did sneak in one night.

Except when it falls on a full moon. 🌕

London has plenty to see and do and 5 days seems like a good amount of time.

Edinburgh is great and worth a visit. The train journey from London is about 4.5 hours and quite a pleasant journey if you dont take the sleeper so if you need to save time you can do that.

The Isle of Skye is a loooong way from Edinburgh and will doubtless be beautiful but it’s really in the middle of nowhere.

The Lake District or Snowdonia will similarly have natural beauty (of a different sort) but more amenities and be much closer to London for when you need to return home. However, splitting 3 days between the Lake District , Snowdonia and Cardiff will really be a rush. I’d probably recommend spending those 3 days in either Snowdonia or the Lake District since you’ll have time to enjoy the nature, go hiking etc.

What would be your dream two week U.K. travel itinerary

Good People of Reddit

Following a spate of, shall we say, ambitious travel itineraries on here recently, I was thinking, what is, in your opinion, the perfect two week itinerary for someone who has never visited the U.K. before.

With a sensible budget, the option of a car and flying in and out of wherever suits, whatever time of year you’d prefer, what would you suggest?

It could be for whomever, but I’m basing mine on my own circumstances of two adults and a 8 year old.

EDIT- I’ve really enjoyed all your replies. Just to point out, I’ve lived in the U.K. my whole life, I was wondering what everyone else thinks are the best parts of our country.

For me- I think I’d do the following

Day 1-3 London

Day 4 - Train to York

Day 5 - York

Day 6- pick up a car and Drive the long way to Whitby. Maybe NYMR.

Day 7- Beamish museum. Overnight in Newcastle, drop the car off.

Day 8- train to Edinburgh, castle

Days 9-11 use Edinburgh as a base to explore, but finish up in Glasgow.

Day 12- Glasgow to either the lakes or Manchester. I feel that I’d prefer the lakes but one night isn’t really that long there.

Day 13- One last night in London to mop up anything you missed at the start.

3 days in Slough 2 days in Aldershot 1 day in Luton 2 days in Wigan 1 week in London

Why would you waste all that time in London ? trim it down for a couple of days in Swansea .

Probably add a couple of nights in Scunthorpe to make it complete

Realistically no one's going beyond day 2 here

I hear Bradford is gorgeous this time of year

Edinburgh is worth seeing. London , obviously. Theatres , Royal Parks , walking tours (Lookup London), Daunt Books ,

If you like hiking, Crib Goch in Wales is good in the formally named Mount Snowdon . It's a loop, so hard to get lost but qualified mountain leaders can be hired and probably would suggest better hikes.

Cornwall is nice but difficult to get to. Better to fly from London than drive / train if you get a good deal.

Bath is quite nice and if you are up that way, stay in the cotswolds which is also nice. Both easy commute from London .

In London , check out Brompton Dock - you can hire the iconic folding bike from a locker for a very reasonable day rate and return to the locker. These are outside some bust stations. Otherwise, plenty of hire bikes- some of the e- bikes cant go into certain areas and often a taxi is cheaper.

When I get to mine Yorkshire will feature heavily

1 week in London (or at least 5 days), a day trip to Cambridge , a couple of days in a different city e.g. York or Edinburgh and a a few days to hike either along the coast somewhere e.g. Dorset or Yorkshire , or in Yorkshire Dales , Lake District or Scotland . If you don't like hiking then a drive around Scotland or Cotswolds , for instance.

Oxford , not Cambridge , unless you really like cows .

Prefer Cambridge

Go to Oxford if you like housing estates with decaying ford focuses and mattresses in the street.

The Scottish 500 with her. Maybe interlinked with camping in the wilds and getting wild.

Problems with my 10 day Ireland itinerary?

My husband and I are going to Ireland for 10 days near the end of September. I'm about to start booking hotels/airbnb's, but since this is the first big trip like this that I've planned, I was looking for a little feedback before booking anything in stone.

Just a little background on us:

We're both 30. I'll be the DD for pub nights since I'll be about 4 months pregnant when we go. We don't like to rush around from one sight to the next- we want time to explore the area and soak it all in, but we also don't want too much "dead" space. We're middle-of-the-road people when it comes to how busy or slow we like a vacation to be.

Current Itinerary-

Day 1- Thursday- plane lands approx. 10 am in Dublin. Rent a car and head to Glendalough. Continue to Kilkenny where we'll explore and sleep.

Day 2- Friday- Explore Kilkenny Castle, St. Canice's Cathedral, Rock of Cashel and Hore Abbey. Drive to Cork and sleep.

Day 3- Saturday- Explore Cork/Cobh/Kinsale and visit Blarney Castle. Drive to Killarney and sleep.

Day 4- Sunday- Killarney National Park. Drive to Dingle and sleep.

Day 5- Monday- Slea Head Drive and Skellig Michael boat tour (is this too kuch for one day or do-able? Boat tour would be 2:30pm). Sleep in Dingle again.

Day 6- Tuesday- Drive to Adare and explore. Drive to Doolin. Burren National Park if possible. Sleep in Doolin.

Day 7- Wednesday- Cliffs of Moher. Sleep in Doolin again. (Too little of a day?)

Day 8- Thursday- Aran Islands. Drive to Galway and sleep.

Day 9- Friday- Explore Galway and sleep there again.

Day 10- Saturday- Drive to Dublin and explore. Sleep there- leaving at 8 am the next morning.

Please let me know if my route is too convoluted or if my days are unbalanced with too much some days and not enough others. Any tips or help is greatly appreciated! I've already benefitted so much from this sub and appreciate the kind people here!

*Edit- thank you so much for all the suggestions! I have made some pretty big changes and am feeling good about it. Here is the revised itinerary:

Day 1- Land at 10, pick up rental car, drive straight to Kilkenny and get some food, chill out and sleep there.

Day 2- Spend the day seeing sights and exploring Kilkenny. Sleep there again.

Day 3- Killarney National Park. Sleep in Killarney

Day 4- Gap of Dunloe. Sleep in Killarney again. (Yay for multiple nights!)

Day 5- Drive to Portmagee in the morning, explore and Skellig Michael boat tour. Drive to Dingle to sleep (I know- a big driving day, but I'd really like to spend 2 nights in Dingle).

Day 6- Slea Head Drive and explore. Sleep in Dingle again.

Day 7- Cliffs of Moher. Sleep in Galway.

Day 8- Aran Islands. Sleep in Galway.

Day 9- visit a bog near Galway that my husband wants to see. Explore/Sleep in Galway.

Day 10- Drive to Dublin and explore. Sleep in Dublin.

Day 11- Go home!

Again, there are a lot of people here who put in real time to give me advice and let me know what I was doing wrong and I'm very touched. Each comment has helped shape our plans and solve a few of the dilemmas I had, so thank you again!

Too much !!!! You are switching hotels everyday and will spend so much of your time driving. I would focus on what you really want to see si you have more time to enjoy

Only one big problem: one-night stays. You are going to be so tired of your vacation before it's over, trust me. I would narrow down your location list and take more time to actually experience each place; do two-night (minimum) stays. Definitely go to Dingle ; I've been to Ireland twice, and it's been the best part of each trip. You can easily do the Sea Safari boat tour and Slea Head drive in a day, but taking your time on Slea Head and exploring the sights (Clogher Strand, Dunquin Pier, Coumeenoole Beach, and maybe Gallarus Oratory) along the way is definitely worth it! If your husband enjoys great beer, stop by Tig Bhric & West Kerry Brewery and try their sampler. Their red ale is amazing. The Stonehouse restaurant is along Slea Head Drive , overlooks the ocean, and has good beer and great food as well. In Dingle , definitely check out Dick Mack's (120+ year old pub) and get a meal at The Fish Box (best fried fish in Ireland). Slaínte!

Wow, thanks for all the recommendations! I've revised our itinerary so we're staying at least 2 nights in each place and I feel so much better already. We are really excited to explore Dingle and I'll put your recommendations on our list! Thanks again :)

No problem. You won't regret dropping the one-night stays. Honestly, one of the best parts of my last trip was realizing that our second accommodation was a four-night stay after we arrived. I like to relax and enjoy the restaurants, pubs & sights wherever I'm at.

>and get a meal at The Fish Box (best fried fish in Ireland ). Slaínte!

I found Reel Dingle Fish & Chips to the best I’ve ever had. We ate at Fish Box the first night due to similar suggestions (and they definitely are really good), but I saw another site that suggested Reel Dingle Fish & Chips as supreme and they were absolutely correct! The best monkfish I’ve ever had, and the lads were so kind as to give us a bit of fried Stringray for free to try since we hadn’t before and that too was amazing. I toured the coast and had fish & chips everywhere I went (always looking up the suggestions for best spots before going), and I stand by Reel Dingle Fish & Chips as the best in Ireland

Day 3 - you definitely don't want to do Cobh and Kinsale on the same day - they are on opposite sides of the city and you will waste a fair chunk of time just crossing the city.

Personally I'd recommend Kinsale over Cobh all day long. However I say that as someone who is a bit baffled by the popularity of Cobh as a tourist destination.

Trying to fit in Cork city , Kinsale (or Cobh ) and Blarney Castle and driving to Killarney will be a busy enough day.

For your day in Killarney consider doing the Gap of Dunloe Tour - it' s a trip through the national park, partly by boat and pretty much always get great reviews.

Day 5 in Dingle is very do-able imo, especially compared to some of your other days.

Thanks so much for your recommendation! We added Gap of Dunloe to our revised itinerary and slowed our trip down in general as well. Thanks for the feedback!

I agree with the others, slow down! 🐌 We spent 2 weeks, explored only the areas around Galway and Dublin and still didn't see everything!! For sure, the first day after landing is rough! (we landed at 1000 from Texas). We took it easy, dropped the luggage at the hotel and explored, and dropped into bed by 7 pm! The second day is much easier.

But everywhere, we wanted to stay longer. Maybe narrow down your sights to just one or two general areas, like Killarney and Dingle , Ring of Kerry , etc. You'll have a great time and will have time just to relax and enjoy!😊

We definitely took your advice and have slowed down the trip! Thanks so much : )

It would be better to do this trip well, and have a relaxing, memorable time than to have it all go by in a blur of getting there, unpacking, packing and leaving.

For the love of all that's holy, stay in Dublin at least one night before getting behind the wheel of a car and driving on the opposite side of the road in an unfamiliar country.

Please stay at least two nights in one place---that way you get a full day in, and not just arrival day + departure day.

After part of a day and a night in Dublin , rent your car and take off for Kinsale , seeing the Rock of Cashel on the way. Stay in Kinsale for two nights. You can easily visit Cork , Cobh , etc.

Kinsale to Killarney Park to Dingle is...doable. But it means you're skipping all of the ring of Kerry . If you do mean to do that, think about staying in this area about three days, especially if you want to do Skellig Michael .

Skip Galway and spend two three nights in Doolin . You'll need one full day for Aran , and another full day for Connemara , so maybe three nights?

Go straight back to Dublin .

Thank you so much for taking the time to write this out! We are definitely taking your advice and slowing our trip down. I'm feeling much more confident. Thanks again!

Have a great time! I'm kind of wishing you were spending more time in Kerry than Doolin---I hope you are.

If you need any other tips , just ask. We loved Ireland .

Itinerary check for London/France/Spain 10 days

Nights 1-3: London. Intent here is to recover from jet lag.

Nights 4-5: France. We’re taking the train and arriving into Paris at 1pm local time. We really just want to go see the Eiffel Tower, take photos, and just get a small taste of Paris.

Would it be too crazy/stressful to spend NIGHT 5 in Bordeaux or just spend the 2 days in Paris? Since Bordeaux is on the way to Barcelona, maybe it makes more sense?

The train ride to Bordeaux is only 2 hours… and then the following day just take the 1 hour flight to Barcelona. Bordeaux seemed pretty but I honestly know nothing about Bordeaux. Also concerned about all this travel on trains while carrying a large suitcase.

Nights 6-10: Barcelona. We just want to go shopping, go to nice restaurants, go to the boardwalk, go to the Sagrada Familia, go to a botanical garden, maybe an art museum.

We really aren’t trying to do everything and value taking it easy over trying to do too much.

Any recommendations? Thanks.

I would pick 2 out of these 3 cities i.e. London & Paris , for instance, and actually see them. You won't experience much of London in 2 days and while tired.

Also, try to pack small to make your life easier. You won't need a large suitcase for 10 days. Head over to r/onebag for some inspiration on how to do it.

Hmm. Really would prefer Spain over France . Any better ways to break up my time in Spain ? Our return flight to the US is departing from Barcelona and don’t feel like changing the plans.

It was just an example, you can do London + Barcelona if you prefer. All 3 cities deserve at least a few days to do them justice. Obviously you can go to Paris , take photos with the Eiffel Tower and leave but I personally think this is such a wasted opportunity. There's so much to see and experience there, especially if you like art.

Same goes for London - it's huge with plenty to do and 2 days isn't enough.

absolutely stay in paris on day 5. going to paris for a day should be a crime. the eiffel tower is cool looking, sure, but it gives you no taste of what france is like at all. it’s the worst way to spend time in paris

Notice: Are you asking for travel advice about Spain ?

Read what redditors had to say in the weekly destination thread for Spain

You may also enjoy our topic: Spain off the tourist trail .

I am a bot, and this action was performed automatically. Please contact the moderators of this subreddit if you have any questions or concerns.

Bordeaux is not in the same league as the other cities, not by a long shot. Skip .

Top People to Talk to

Digbychelsea, necessarydoubt8667, independentyoung3027, splitopenandmelt420, hamsternoir.

Here are some key considerations for planning a 10-day trip itinerary in the UK:

Choose Your Destinations: Decide which cities or regions you want to visit in the UK. Popular choices include London, Edinburgh, Bath, Oxford, and the Scottish Highlands. Consider your interests and prioritize the places you most want to see.

Travel Logistics: Plan your transportation between cities. The UK has an extensive train network, making it convenient to travel between major cities. Alternatively, you can rent a car for more flexibility, especially if you want to explore rural areas.

Allocate Time: Determine how many days you want to spend in each destination. Keep in mind that larger cities like London and Edinburgh may require more time to fully explore, while smaller towns may only need a day or two.

Must-See Attractions: Research the top attractions in each destination and prioritize the ones that interest you the most. For example, in London, you might want to visit the Tower of London, Buckingham Palace, and the British Museum.

Balance Your Itinerary: Aim for a mix of city exploration, cultural experiences, and natural beauty. Consider including a mix of historical sites, museums, parks, and local experiences to get a well-rounded experience of the UK.

Flexibility and Rest Days: Don't overpack your itinerary. Allow for some downtime and flexibility to explore unplanned discoveries or simply relax and soak in the atmosphere.

Local Recommendations: Seek recommendations from locals or fellow travelers who have visited the UK. They can provide valuable insights and suggestions for off-the-beaten-path destinations or hidden gems.

Note: It's important to check the latest travel restrictions, visa requirements, and any COVID-19 related guidelines before planning your trip.

Winter is here! Check out the winter wonderlands at these 5 amazing winter destinations in Montana

• Travel Destinations

What Is The Cost Of A 10-Day Trip To The UK

Published: November 20, 2023

Modified: December 28, 2023

by Astrid Conaway

• Budget Travel
• Travel Guide

Introduction

Are you dreaming of exploring the enchanting landscapes, historic landmarks, and vibrant cities of England? Planning a trip to the UK can be an exciting and rewarding experience, allowing you to immerse yourself in the rich culture and history of this remarkable country. However, before you start packing your bags, it’s essential to have a clear understanding of the potential cost involved in a 10-day trip to the UK.

When it comes to budgeting for your journey, several factors will influence the overall cost, including flights, accommodation, transportation, food and drinks, sightseeing activities, shopping, and miscellaneous expenses. By considering each aspect, you can plan your trip effectively and ensure that you make the most of your time in the UK while staying within your budget.

In this guide, we’ll break down the average costs you can expect for each element of your trip, giving you a comprehensive overview of what it takes to embark on a 10-day adventure in England.

From the bustling streets of London to the picturesque landscapes of the Cotswolds, the UK offers a diverse range of experiences for travelers. Whether you’re an architecture enthusiast, a history buff, a nature lover, or a shopaholic, there’s something for everyone to enjoy in this captivating country.

So, let’s dive into the details and calculate the costs of your dream vacation to the UK. By the end of this guide, you’ll have a clear idea of how much you’ll need to budget and can start planning an unforgettable trip!

One of the most significant expenses when traveling to the UK is the cost of flights. The price of your plane tickets will depend on various factors, such as the time of year, the airline you choose, and how far in advance you book your tickets.

On average, round-trip flights from major cities in the United States to London can range from $500 to $1,500 per person. Prices tend to be higher during peak travel seasons, such as summer and major holidays, so it’s advisable to book your tickets well in advance to secure the best deals.

It’s also worth considering alternative airports or flexible travel dates to find more affordable options. For example, flying into regional airports like Manchester or Birmingham instead of London can sometimes result in lower fares. Additionally, traveling on weekdays or during off-peak periods can also help you save money.

Budget airlines such as Ryanair and EasyJet offer cheaper fares within Europe, so if you plan on exploring other cities or countries during your trip, it may be worth considering these options for shorter flights.

Another factor to consider is baggage fees. Some airlines include baggage allowance in their ticket prices, while others charge additional fees. Be sure to check the baggage policy of your chosen airline to avoid any unexpected costs.

To save on flights, consider signing up for fare alerts or using flight comparison websites, which allow you to compare prices from multiple airlines at once. This way, you can find the best deals and make an informed decision about your flight arrangements.

Remember to factor in the costs of transportation to and from the airport as well. Depending on the distance, you may need to budget for a taxi, shuttle, or public transportation to reach your accommodation.

By being proactive in your flight search and considering all available options, you can find affordable airfare to the UK and allocate your budget to other aspects of your trip.

Accommodation

When it comes to choosing accommodation for your 10-day trip to the UK, there are plenty of options to suit different budgets and preferences. The cost of accommodation will vary depending on the type of lodging, location, and the time of year you plan to visit.

In major cities like London, you can expect to pay more for accommodations compared to smaller towns or rural areas. Luxury hotels in prime locations may cost several hundred dollars per night, while mid-range hotels or budget-friendly options can range from $100 to $200 per night.

If you’re looking to save money, consider staying in budget hotels, guesthouses, or hostels, which offer more affordable rates. Hostels, in particular, are a popular choice for budget travelers, as they often provide dormitory-style rooms or private rooms at a fraction of the cost of a hotel.

An alternative to traditional hotels and hostels is booking through Airbnb, where you can find a variety of accommodation options, including apartments, houses, or even unique stays like converted barns or cozy cabins. The prices on Airbnb can vary, but you can often find good value for money and the added benefit of having access to a kitchen, which can help save on dining expenses.

Additionally, consider the location when choosing your accommodation. Staying in the city center or popular tourist areas may be convenient but can come with a higher price tag. If you don’t mind a slightly longer commute or prefer a quieter neighborhood, looking for accommodations outside of the city center can help you save money.

Lastly, keep an eye out for any deals or promotions when booking your accommodation. Many hotels offer discounts for extended stays or special rates during off-peak seasons. It’s also beneficial to read reviews and verify the amenities and location before making your final decision.

With a little bit of research and flexibility, you can find suitable accommodation that fits your budget and provides a comfortable base for your adventures in the UK.

Transportation

Getting around in the UK is relatively easy, thanks to its well-connected transportation network. However, it’s important to factor in the cost of transportation when planning your 10-day trip.

If you’re arriving by plane, you’ll need to consider the cost of getting from the airport to your accommodation. In major cities like London, you can opt for public transportation options such as the Underground (also known as the Tube), buses, or trains. Single journeys on the Tube generally cost around £2-3 (approximately $3-4), while bus fares are typically slightly cheaper. Alternatively, you can take a taxi or use ride-sharing services like Uber or Lyft, which may be more convenient but come at a higher price.

For traveling between cities or regions in the UK, trains are a popular and efficient mode of transportation. The cost of train tickets will vary depending on the distance and the class of travel. It’s advisable to book train tickets in advance to secure the best prices, as last-minute fares tend to be more expensive. If you plan on taking multiple trips by train, consider purchasing a rail pass, such as the BritRail Pass, which can offer savings and flexibility.

Another option for intercity travel is by coach (bus). Companies like National Express and Megabus offer affordable fares, and if you book in advance, you can find tickets for as low as £1 (approximately $1.30). However, keep in mind that traveling by coach may take longer than trains.

Within cities, public transportation is a convenient and cost-effective way to get around. Most cities have extensive bus networks, and larger cities often have tram or subway systems. Oyster cards in London and contactless payment methods make it easy to pay for public transportation without the hassle of buying individual tickets.

If you prefer more freedom and flexibility, you can also consider renting a car. However, it’s important to note that driving in the UK is on the left-hand side of the road, which may take some adjustment if you’re not accustomed to it. Car rental prices vary depending on the type of vehicle, rental duration, and insurance coverage.

Lastly, if you’re planning on exploring rural areas or national parks, hiking or cycling can be a great way to save on transportation costs while enjoying the stunning natural landscapes.

By researching different transportation options and planning your routes in advance, you can navigate the UK efficiently and stay within your budget.

Food and Drinks

Exploring the culinary delights of the UK is an essential part of any trip. However, it’s crucial to consider the cost of food and drinks to ensure you stay within your budget during your 10-day adventure.

The UK offers a wide range of dining options, from high-end restaurants to casual eateries and street food stalls. The cost of dining out will vary depending on the type of establishment and the location.

In major cities like London, you can expect to pay more for meals compared to smaller towns or rural areas. Fine dining restaurants can have prices ranging from £50 to over £100 per person (approximately $65 to $130), while mid-range restaurants or pubs may charge around £15 to £30 per person (approximately $20 to $40) for a meal.

If you’re looking to save money, exploring local markets or grabbing takeaway options can be more budget-friendly. Street food stalls and food markets offer a variety of delicious and affordable options, allowing you to sample different cuisines without breaking the bank.

When it comes to drinks, alcohol can significantly impact your expenses. Prices for alcoholic beverages at restaurants and bars can vary, with London generally being more expensive compared to other cities. Pubs can offer a more affordable option for enjoying a pint of beer, and many places have happy hour promotions or drink specials to help you save on your bill.

If you prefer cooking your meals, consider booking accommodations with access to a kitchen. This way, you can buy groceries from supermarkets or local farmers’ markets and prepare your meals, which can help cut down on costs. Additionally, trying local delicacies or regional specialties can be a fun and cost-effective way to immerse yourself in the UK’s culinary culture.

Remember to also budget for drinks and snacks throughout the day. Coffees, teas, bottled water, and snacks can add up, especially in touristy areas. Instead of purchasing drinks from cafes or shops, consider carrying a reusable water bottle and refilling it throughout the day to save money.

By combining a mix of dining experiences, from indulging in a few special meals to exploring more affordable options, you can enjoy the UK’s culinary offerings while staying within your desired budget.

Sightseeing and Activities

Visiting famous landmarks, exploring museums, and participating in various activities are all part of the experience when traveling to the UK. However, it’s essential to consider the cost of sightseeing and activities as you plan your 10-day itinerary.

Entry fees to popular attractions and museums can vary, with major landmarks often having higher admission prices. For example, visiting iconic sites like the Tower of London or Buckingham Palace in London can cost around £25 to £30 (approximately $33 to $40) per person.

Thankfully, there are many free or more affordable alternatives available as well. Numerous museums and galleries in the UK offer free entry, allowing you to enjoy remarkable art and cultural exhibitions without spending a dime. Some notable examples include the British Museum and the Tate Modern in London.

When planning your itinerary, consider exploring parks and gardens, which are usually free to enter and provide a tranquil escape from the bustling cities. Additionally, many cities offer free walking tours where you can learn about the city’s history and architecture while getting a local’s perspective.

If you’re interested in theater, consider purchasing tickets for West End shows in advance to secure better deals. There are also discounted or last-minute ticket options available for those on a budget.

Outdoor enthusiasts can explore national parks and hiking trails, which offer breathtaking views and natural beauty. While some activities within these areas may require a fee, taking advantage of these natural wonders can provide a rewarding and cost-effective experience.

Lastly, keep an eye out for special events or festivals happening during your visit, as they can offer unique cultural experiences. From music festivals to local celebrations, participating in these events can be a memorable part of your trip to the UK.

By finding a balance between paid attractions and free or low-cost activities, you can make the most of your sightseeing while managing your expenses during your 10-day adventure in the UK.

Shopping can be a tempting activity during your 10-day trip to the UK, with a myriad of shopping destinations catering to all tastes and budgets. However, it’s important to budget wisely and consider the cost of shopping as you plan your itinerary.

The UK offers a wide range of shopping opportunities, from luxury designer brands to high-street fashion, and unique independent boutiques. London, in particular, is a shopping paradise with renowned shopping districts such as Oxford Street, Regent Street, and Carnaby Street.

When it comes to luxury shopping, London’s Bond Street and Knightsbridge, home to Harrods and Harvey Nichols, are must-visit destinations. Here, you can find designer fashion, exquisite jewelry, and high-end cosmetics. Keep in mind that luxury items come with a hefty price tag, so it’s important to set a budget and prioritize your shopping list.

For more affordable fashion, ethnic markets, and vintage boutiques, cities like Manchester, Birmingham, and Brighton offer a diverse range of options. These cities have vibrant shopping scenes, where you can find unique pieces and support local businesses.

It’s worth mentioning that the UK is known for its popular high-street fashion brands, offering trendy and affordable clothing options. Stores like Topshop, Zara, H&M, and Primark provide a wide selection at competitive prices.

When it comes to souvenirs, don’t forget to explore local shops or markets to find unique mementos of your trip. Whether it’s traditional tea sets, Scottish kilts, or handmade crafts, these items can be a special reminder of your time in the UK.

Additionally, keep an eye out for seasonal sales, especially during key shopping periods like Boxing Day (December 26th) or the summer and winter sales, where you can find significant discounts and save on your purchases.

Lastly, be mindful of your baggage allowance if you plan on doing extensive shopping. Consider leaving extra space or even purchasing an additional bag to avoid any unexpected fees at the airport.

By setting a shopping budget, exploring various shopping areas, and being selective with your purchases, you can enjoy the shopping experience in the UK without overspending.

Miscellaneous Expenses

When planning a trip to the UK, it’s important to account for various miscellaneous expenses that may arise during your 10-day adventure. These expenses can include unforeseen costs, small purchases, and additional activities that may not fall within the traditional categories.

One miscellaneous expense to consider is travel insurance. While not mandatory, having travel insurance can provide peace of mind and protect you from unexpected events such as trip cancellations, medical emergencies, or lost luggage. The cost of travel insurance will vary depending on factors such as your age, trip duration, and coverage options.

Another factor to consider is tipping. In the UK, tipping is not as prevalent as in some other countries, but it’s customary to leave a small tip for good service at restaurants, cafes, and bars. It’s generally acceptable to leave a 10% to 15% tip if you receive excellent service, but it’s ultimately discretionary.

Public restrooms, especially in major cities, may require a small fee for usage. It’s advisable to carry some change or small bills for these situations, as not all public restrooms accept card payments.

If you plan on using your mobile phone during your trip, be aware of potential roaming charges or consider purchasing a local SIM card. Data plans and call/text rates may vary, so it’s important to check with your mobile provider or explore local options to avoid hefty charges.

If you’re a museum lover or plan on visiting multiple attractions, consider purchasing a city pass or museum pass. These passes often offer discounted rates and allow you to visit various attractions without paying individual entry fees.

Additionally, budget for any personal expenses such as toiletries, medication, and other convenience items you may need during your trip. It’s always a good idea to carry a small emergency fund for unexpected situations or last-minute purchases.

Lastly, it’s important to account for any transportation costs or admission fees to events, concerts, or other activities that may not be part of your initial plan. These spontaneous experiences can add to the richness of your trip, so be prepared to set aside some funds for these opportunities.

By budgeting for miscellaneous expenses and having a contingency fund, you can ensure a smoother and more enjoyable experience during your 10-day trip to the UK.

Now that we’ve covered all the different aspects of expenses during a 10-day trip to the UK, let’s calculate the estimated total cost. It’s important to note that these figures are approximate and can vary depending on personal preferences, travel style, and exchange rates.

Flights from major cities in the US can range from $500 to $1,500 per person, depending on the time of year and how far in advance you book. Accommodation costs will also vary, with budget hotels or hostels ranging from $100 to $200 per night, mid-range hotels around $150 to $250 per night, and luxury hotels starting from $300 per night.

Transportation costs will depend on the distance and mode of travel. Train tickets between cities can range from $30 to $100, while coach fares can be as low as $10 for shorter journeys. Local transportation within cities can add up to $10 to $20 per day, depending on the frequency and distance covered.

Food and drinks expenses will vary depending on your dining preferences. You can expect to spend around $30 to $50 per day for meals at mid-range restaurants or pubs, with street food or self-catering options being more affordable. Budgeting an additional $10 to $20 per day for drinks and snacks is reasonable.

Sightseeing and activities will also have an impact on your total cost. Entry fees to major attractions can range from $10 to $30 per person, but there are also numerous free or low-cost options available. Budgeting $100 to $200 for attractions and activities should be sufficient.

Shopping expenses will depend on personal preferences and the desired purchases. Setting aside $100 to $200 for shopping can give you the freedom to explore local markets, buy souvenirs, or even indulge in a few shopping splurges.

Miscellaneous expenses such as travel insurance, tipping, restroom fees, and personal items should be factored in as well. Depending on your choices, budgeting an additional $100 to $200 for miscellaneous expenses is recommended.

Adding up these estimated costs, a rough total for a 10-day trip to the UK can range from approximately $2,000 to $5,000 per person. However, it’s important to remember that these figures can fluctuate based on individual preferences and travel choices.

Keep in mind that this estimated total cost does not include any extra activities or high-end shopping sprees, which could increase the overall expenses. It’s always recommended to plan and budget accordingly to ensure a comfortable and enjoyable trip while staying within your means.

By considering these costs and personalized factors, you can create a realistic budget for your 10-day adventure in the fascinating United Kingdom.

Planning a 10-day trip to the UK can be an exciting and memorable experience. By considering the essential aspects of your journey – flights, accommodation, transportation, food and drinks, sightseeing and activities, shopping, and miscellaneous expenses – you can create a realistic budget that aligns with your preferences and financial capabilities.

Flights and accommodation will likely be your biggest expenses, so researching and booking in advance can help secure the best prices. Consider alternative airports, budget airlines, and different types of accommodations to find options that suit your budget and preferences.

Transportation costs can be managed by utilizing public transportation, booking train or coach tickets in advance, and exploring walking or cycling options in certain areas. Food and drinks expenses can be controlled by diversifying your dining experiences, opting for budget-friendly options, and trying local markets and street food stalls.

When it comes to sightseeing and activities, balance paid attractions with free or discounted options to make the most of your trip without overspending. Shopping can be a tempting aspect, so prioritize your purchases and consider local markets and sales events for unique and affordable finds.

Lastly, remember to budget for miscellaneous expenses such as travel insurance, tipping, souvenirs, and unexpected costs. Having a contingency fund will provide peace of mind and allow you to be flexible with spontaneous opportunities that may arise during your trip.

It’s important to note that the estimated total cost provided is a guide and can vary depending on personal preferences and exchange rates. By planning ahead, taking advantage of deals and discounts, and being mindful of your expenses, you can enjoy a fulfilling and budget-friendly 10-day trip to the UK.

So, pack your bags, immerse yourself in the rich history and culture, and get ready to create unforgettable memories as you explore the charming cities, stunning landscapes, and remarkable landmarks of the United Kingdom!

• Privacy Overview
• Strictly Necessary Cookies

This website uses cookies so that we can provide you with the best user experience possible. Cookie information is stored in your browser and performs functions such as recognising you when you return to our website and helping our team to understand which sections of the website you find most interesting and useful.

Strictly Necessary Cookie should be enabled at all times so that we can save your preferences for cookie settings.

If you disable this cookie, we will not be able to save your preferences. This means that every time you visit this website you will need to enable or disable cookies again.

Finding the Universe

Travel tales, photography and a dash of humor

2 Weeks in the UK – My Perfect UK Trip Itinerary

Last updated: March 10, 2024 . Written by Laurence Norah - 219 Comments

If you are looking for a two week UK itinerary which includes Ireland, you have come to the right place. This UK road trip itinerary has you starting in London, and using a rental car as the transportation method. It covers some of our highlights in the UK, including cities, castles, and stunning natural scenery.

I have spent a great deal of time living in and exploring the UK. I’ve drawn on my experiences travelling here to put together my perfect two week UK trip to help you plan your own trip.

This UK itinerary (which also includes Ireland) covers England, Scotland, Northern Ireland and Wales. It’s a self-drive road-trip, although could also be modified to support travel by public transport if you prefer.

If you haven’t driven in the UK before, do check out my guide to driving in the UK for helpful tips. We also have a guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK if you need budget planning help.

Without further ado, allow me to present my two-week UK itinerary.

A 2 week UK Trip itinerary

This itinerary is very busy and fits a lot in, including time in Ireland. It is doable, but just be aware that it will be fast paced with quite a lot of driving. Naturally, you are welcome to take the itinerary and adjust it to meet your own interests and pace.

For example, many folks prefer to focus on the UK with their two weeks, and skip the island of Ireland, returning instead via the Lake District and Wales. However, if you want to see as much as possible, this itinerary is how to do it.

Days 1 & 2: London

The UK’s capital is one of my favourite cities in the world. It’s been hanging around for over 2000 years on the banks of the Thames, and there is just an incredible wealth of things to see, from historical sights, to amazing museums, to crazy street markets.

It’s a wonderfully walk-able capital, and you can easily take in the major central sights in a day or so, leaving you the second day to explore museums, art galleries, or go a little further afield and take in some of the other sights, from crumbling cemeteries to massive parks. And if all else fails, you will never be short on an incredible pub to while away some time before heading on.

For inspiration for your visit, take a look at our 2 day London itinerary , which covers the major highlights of the city, and also links to lots of other information about visiting, including tips on finding Harry Potter locations in London through to Winston Churchill locations in London – something for everyone!

My advice for London is to invest in an Oyster card to save money on your transport (don’t hire a car until you leave the capital – and check here for great rates on car hire ), and if you think you’re going to use it, look into buying a London Pass to save money on London’s top attractions.

Available in 1, 3 and 6 day versions, as well as a version with an included Oyster card, the savings can really be quite impressive if you plan on visiting a few locations. You can read a full break down on when the London Pass is worth buying here , and buy one yourself here .

Finally, London is probably going to be the most expensive city in the UK for your accommodation. We recommend booking well in advance to get a good deal.

Some of our recommended accommodation options in London are:

The Walrus Bar and Hostel , The Z hotel in Shoreditch , Point A Hotel , Lime Tree Hotel and the  Resident Victoria Hotel . You can see more London hotel listings here on booking.com . We also love the curated apartments available on Plum Guide .

Days 3 & 4: Oxford & the Cotswolds

One of the stipulations of the original question was the wish to avoid feeling too much like a tourist. Unfortunately, this is nearly impossible in Oxford , as nearly everyone there is either a tourist or a student. I lived in and around Oxford for a number of years, and generally felt like a tourist most of that time too.

Part of the reason for that is that this tiny city is absolutely jam packed with incredible buildings, largely in the form of the Oxford Colleges. These are seriously wealthy establishments, who clearly had no problem flaunting that wealth in an architectural fashion back in the day.

This means that yes, it is full of people wandering around, mouths agape, at quite how pretty the whole thing is. Yes, it’s jam packed with tourists. But for good reason!

So strap that camera on and snap away. Then go for a punt on the river, and enjoy some Pimms or a cream tea. Seek out the Harry Potter filming locations . Take a walking tour of the Universities . There’s no shortage of way to fill your time!

Read more tips for spending a day in Oxford, here .

From Oxford you are also well located to take in the incredibly picturesque Cotswolds area – all quaint villages and rolling countryside. The England that everyone imagines England to be like, with country pubs, village greens and cricket ovals. Lovely stuff. Check out hotel prices for  Oxford here .

Days 5 & 6: Peak District and Manchester

From Oxford I’m going to suggest heading “up north”, towards the Peak District national park. Think rolling hills, quaint villages, and beautiful walks.

There are also some fabulous stately homes to visit , not to mention that on the way from Oxford you can stop off at Warwick Castle – one of the UK’s best-preserved castles.

If you’re interested in the industrial revolution in the UK I can highly recommend a visit to the city of Manchester.

Of course, if the industrial revolution isn’t your thing there are plenty of other reasons to visit Manchester, including excellent retail therapy, an awesome food scene, and a variety of architectural highlights. Not to mention the music scene!

You can see my guide to things to do in Manchester for lots more ideas, and you can see hotel prices for Manchester here .

One other thing you might consider as you pass through the Peak District and Manchester is a visit to Alton Towers . This is arguably the UK’s best known theme park, and would make for a great thrilling day out for those of you who like that sort of thing.

Day 7: York

Not that far from Manchester (England is so quaintly explorable!), the city of York is another of my favourite UK cities.

From the incredible Gothic York Minster (a climb to the top is highly recommended) to the winding, tumbled down alleyways of the shambles, to the Viking history – this is a city that just cries out for exploration.

It’s also an awesome place if you’re into ghost stories. There are a whole number of ghost walks that take in the spooky past of York, so if you want an evening of entertainment and intrigue, likely accompanied with a number of fine drinking establishments, an evening ghost walk is a great bit of fun.

I’m not a great believer in this sort of thing usually, but I took a tour and thoroughly enjoyed it!

If you do plan on seeing a few things in York, you might save money with a York City Pass , which includes most of the attractions in the city as well as access to the York Sightseeing bus or York City Cruises. You can buy that in advance here .

For more York ideas, see our guide to spending two days in York , which has a comprehensive itinerary as well as tips on where to stay and how to get around.

For accommodation, you can check out and book the best York hotels here .

Days 8 & 9: Edinburgh via Northumberland

From York we’re going to wave farewell to England, and head up to Scotland’s capital city, Edinburgh. On the way though, you’ll be passing through some of England’s least travelled, yet stunningly beautiful, landscapes.

I am of course talking about Northumbria. From miles of deserted beach, to crumbling castles, to the Roman equivalent of the great wall of China, Northumbria really has a lot to offer someone looking for a slightly off the beaten track England experience. The rolling landscapes are breath-taking and you’ll find yourself alone much of the time. Worth taking a bit of time to explore, in my opinion.

Then of course, it’s up to Edinburgh , where you’ll not be short of amazing things to look at. From Edinburgh castle, to Arthurs Seat, from fine whiskys, to Princes Street, there really is enough here for a number of days of entertainment. And if you visit during the Fringe festival… well… plan on being entertained for a good many weeks!

See more ideas on spending some time in Edinburgh in this detailed two day Edinburgh itinerary that I put together, as well as our guide to things to do in Edinburgh , our tips on visiting Edinburgh in winter , and our guide to finding Harry Potter in Edinburgh .

Then  check and book your Edinburgh hotels here.

Days 10 – 12: Ireland

Because the UK is an easily explorable place with decent roads and relatively short distances to drive, it is totally possible to include another country – Ireland! – in a trip like this if you’re up for it.

Do be aware that if you are renting a car, some car rental companies have restrictions on taking cars on ferries, or into other countries – so make sure you check before you go as there may be an additional fee to pay.

Of course, you could also fly to Ireland (Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin for example), and use different rentals for different parts of your adventure!

If all that sounds like too much hard work, you could extend your time in Scotland, or alternatively, you could take in the west coast of the UK, including Glasgow , the Lake District, and Liverpool, as well as popping into Wales for the stunning Snowdonia national park, and rejoin this itinerary in South Wales or Bristol . The choice is yours!

If it is Ireland you want though, it’s a short ferry ride from Scotland (Cairnryan to be precise, which is 2-3 hour drive from Edinburgh) across to Belfast in Northern Ireland, from where you can spend a few days exploring the Emerald Isle.

We have travelled from Cairnryan with both Stena Line and P&O Ferries, both of which have been a fast, comfortable and efficient service. We normally use Direct Ferries for ferry booking as they compare prices across all the providers and support payment in multple currencies. You can book your ferry tickets here .

This part of the world has a lot to offer, and three days is quite a short amount of time. We can recommend spending some time in Belfast and driving north along the causeway coastal route to see such highlights as the Giant’s Causeway, ruined castles and spectacular coastline. Then, head south into Ireland, and see fabulous Dublin.

I’ve explored Dublin and her surroundings, taken a trip down to the Dingle Peninsula , kissed the Blarney Stone at Blarney Castle, gazed at the Cliffs of Moher ,  and visited the Dark Hedges of Game of Thrones fame – to name but a few of our wonderful experience on the Irish Isle.

In Dublin there’s the Guinness Factory, of course, as a popular highlight, but also oodles of Gaelic history and culture to get excited about.

There are also of course the Irish people, well known for their love of a good time! Personally, I’d head on down the coast from Belfast, through Dublin and down to the port of Rosslare, where after three exciting days in Ireland another ferry service will whisk you across to the last of the four countries to make up the UK: Wales!

Day 13: South Wales and Cardiff

In Wales you will arrive either at Fishguard or Pembroke – both excellent places to explore the Pembrokeshire Coast national park . Here you will find beautiful beaches, rugged cliffs, and fabulous opportunities for walking.

You’re also not too far a drive from Cardiff, the Welsh capital. Four capitals in a fortnight – not bad going! Here you’ll find castles, sporting venues and more Welsh based culture than you can shake a stick at. Plus, arrive at the right time of year and you’ll find the Great British Cheese festival in full swing. What’s not to be excited about? For more about travelling in Wales and highlights along this route, see our detailed Wales road trip itinerary .

Find and book your Cardiff hotels here .

Day 14: Bristol & Bath

From Cardiff you’ll cross the enormous Severn estuary over the impress Severn road bridge and be back in the UK, or Bristol to be precise. Here you’ll find all sorts of interesting items of historical interest, largely running on a nautical theme, as well as some of the best street art in Britain .

For over a thousand years Bristol has been an important English port. From early explorers and traders, to the dark years of the African slave vessels, to filling Australia with immigrants, it is hard to understate the role that Bristol has played in Britain’s sea faring history. There is, after all, a reason for the expression “ship-shape and Bristol fashion” having a place in the English language.

I can highly recommend taking a trip round the SS Great Britain when you’re in Bristol. Built in 1843, and designed by the engineering genius who was Isambard Kingdom Brunel – the man who almost single-handedly revolutionised both engineering and public transport in the UK.

The SS Great Britain is notable as being the first steamer to cross the Atlantic – setting a record pace for the time of 14 days. An amazing bit of history. Note that tickets are slightly cheaper if you book them online, which you can do online here .

For more ideas in Bristol, check out our guide to things to do in Bristol , which should give you plenty of ideas to fill your time. Find the best prices on Bristol hotels and book here .

From Bristol it’s on to the Roman spa city of Bath, a world heritage site. Like Oxford , this is a difficult place to be anything other than a tourist, but it is so worth it all the same!

Day 15: Back to London, via Stonehenge!

Our last day of our just over two week UK itinerary takes us back to London. No trip to the UK though would really be complete without taking in perhaps our most famous monument – the circle of rocks known as Stonehenge.

There is just something about the place that makes you wonder. A circle of rocks, built by a people who had nothing but their hands and some bits of wood to help them out, in the middle of the Wiltshire countryside, hundreds of miles from an actual quarry, is just mind blowing.

Add in the pagan ritualism, the relationship between the rocks and the sun, and the sheer mystery of the place, and you have somewhere that is capable of really capturing the imagination. Worth your time to visit (see more thoughts from a trip to Stonehenge here ).

Plus, while you’re there you can pop into Salisbury and enjoy the cathedral, which boasts the highest cathedral spire of any church in the UK.

And then… back to London, where this tour finishes!

2 Weeks in the UK: Road Trip Map

Here’s a map of the route , for your reference.

2 Week UK Itinerary Summary

• Days 1 & 2 : London
• Days 3 & 4 : Oxford & the Cotswolds
• Days 5 & 6 : Peak District and Manchester
• Day 7 : York
• Days 8 & 9 : Edinburgh via Northumberland
• Days 10 – 12 : Ireland
• Day 13 : South Wales and Cardiff
• Day 14 : Bristol & Bath
• Day 15 : Back to London, via Stonehenge!

Can you do this 2 Week UK itinerary by public transport?

A popular question from readers is whether or not this itinerary can be done by public transport. I appreciate that of course not everyone wants to drive in the UK, and the answer, for the most part, is yes.

Certainly, between the major cities on the itinerary there are good rail and/or bus links, with the train usually being a little faster. The main challenge is the rural sections of the route – for example, exploring the Cotswolds, Northumbria or the Peak District. This is possible using local buses of course, but it can definitely slow you down a fair bit, and so you would need to adjust the itinerary a little to fit the schedule.

Another option is to add in some days in London or Edinburgh, and doing some specific day trips from these cities to take in the out of town attractions.

For example, there is this  day trip from London that takes in highlights such as Bath and Stonehenge. Then, for Northumbria and the Scottish Borders, including beautiful Alnwick Castle, consider this tour from Edinburgh .

If you are interested in doing this itinerary by public transport, check out my guide to taking a 10 day UK trip by public transport, which as well as a route, has lots of ideas for how to book different forms of transport in the most effective and cost-efficient way.

What About Touring the UK With A Tour Company?

Another popular question is whether or not this sort of trip can be done with a tour company, and if we have any companies we would recommend for this.

So you have a few options for doing this which I have outlined below.

The first option is to take a group tour of the UK. There are a number of companies offering small group tours – we’d recommend finding a service which operates tours of 15 people or less. We usually use and recommend Rabbie’s Trail Burners , who operate trips around the UK and Ireland, and have a number of tour options to choose from.

We haven’t found a tour that exactly matches our UK wide itinerary, but we still have a solution for those of you wanting the do a similar trip as part of a guided tour.

First, we recommend you spend two or three days in London, following our suggested London itinerary .

Next, we recommend you take something similar to this small group tour , which takes eight days to take you from London to Edinburgh.

In Edinburgh, you can spend a couple of days following our Edinburgh itinerary , after which you can easily fly to either Belfast or Dublin direct from Edinburgh.

Here you can either explore these lovely cities, or take a tour to explore more of the country, we’d recommend either this three day tour of Northern Ireland  or this three day tour of the southern and western coast .

Alternatively, if you’d prefer to skip Ireland, you could take something like this five day tour of the Scottish Highlands and Skye .

Finally, you can either return to London, or have your flights home depart from Dublin or Edinburgh, depending on your tour choice.

The other option is a bespoke tour company and/or a private tour guide, who will be able to put a tour together for you, including guiding, transport and accommodation.

Of all the options, this will generally be the most expensive way to travel, but it will also give you total flexibility in terms of your trip and schedule, plus you’ll have a guide with you every step of the way, taking all the hassle out of your trip.

For this sort of tour, we recommend the services of Robina Brown, who is a blue-badge guide offering tours across the UK. See her website here .

When to Visit the UK

You can visit the UK at any time of year, although for the best weather and longer daylight hours, we’d definitely suggest visiting in the warmer months – from May to September. May is probably our favourite time of year, the weather is usually quite reasonable but the tourist crowds are not too intense.

Christmas, and the period leading up to Christmas, can also be a wonderful time to visit, when the streets and shops are all brightly lit and decorated for the festive season. For a good example of this, check out our guide to visiting Edinburgh at Christmas .

Where to Stay in the UK:

For accommodation , there are a great many options to choose from, ranging from cosy B&B’s through to upmarket hotels, and everything in between. Finding the best deal on your accommodation is an important part of trip planning – helping you to get the most from your budget, as well as find the property that is right for you.

• We’ve tried a lot of booking sites, and nearly always find ourselves using Booking.com. They have an extensive selection of properties, many with no-fee cancellation policies, and often run discounts and special offers. Click on each city title to see their listings:  London , Oxford ,  Manchester , York , Edinburgh , Dublin , Cardiff and Bristol .
• If you prefer an apartment or more of a hosted stay, then we recommend Plum Guide . We’ve tried all the others, and in our experience Plum Guide consistently has the highest quality options for the locations they are available.
• If you can’t find what you want on Plum Guide, or you want some new options to try out, we wrote a whole post on the best alternatives to AirBnB , as well as a guide to our favourite holiday cottage accommodation in the UK , which you should check out!

Between these options, you should find the best prices and places to stay for your trip, as well as a good selection of reviews and feedback to help you make an informed decision.

How to Get Around the UK

For this kind of trip I also obviously recommend that you look into renting a car. We have used and can recommend Enterprise Car Rental , they usually have great rates, especially for one way rentals. We also recommend comparing car prices using a service like Discover Cars , which compares prices across a range of providers to help you find the best deal.

A hire car will give you a lot more flexibility than public transport, and prices are generally fairly reasonable. However, if you would prefer to do a trip like this by public transport instead of driving yourself, check out our UK itinerary by public transport for ideas.

Another option for travelling in the UK is to hire a motorhome. Whilst this might not be practical for a city focused trip, you might prefer it if you are planning on visiting more rural locations.

For campervan rental we suggest checking out Motorhome Republic . They offer a campervans from a range of companies at different price points, so you can find the right one for you. You can see their UK listings here .

Further reading for your UK Trip

We’ve got lots of resources to help you plan your trip to the UK, from posts we’ve written ourselves to third party content we’re happy to recommend. Here it is:

• If you want a shorter trip, taking in some more off the beaten path destinations, check out this one week itinerary of the UK that I put together. If you’d prefer not to drive yourself, we also have a 10 day UK itinerary by public transport .
• To prepare for your trip to the UK, we’ve put together a detailed UK packing list which covers both London and the wider UK at any time of year
• This is a self-drive trip, so you should definitely check out our guide to driving in the UK for helpful tips.
• We also have a guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK  which will help you cost out a trip like this.
• A guide to driving Scotland’s epic North Coast 500 , as well as accommodation options on the North Coast 500
• When you’re near Glasgow, you should check out the beautiful Devil’s Pulpit in Finnich Glen
• A two day Edinburgh itinerary & 21 Highlights in Edinburgh
• Edinburgh: Getting off the beaten path
• A Two Day Glasgow and Loch Lomond itinerary
• A guide to 10 of the best Stately Homes in England , to give you some ideas as you plan your itinerary
• For London, we have some detailed itineraries to help you plan your visit. These include a 1 Day London Itinerary , a Two Day London itinerary and a Six Day London itinerary
• The top Harry Potter sites in London
• The Best Photography Locations in London
• Tips on Buying and Using the London Pass
• Eight Things to Do in Kensington
• The Highlights of Oxford
• Our guide to things to do in Cambridge
• Visiting Blenheim Palace and the Cotswolds
• 20 Things To Do in Dublin , a 2 day Dublin itinerary and a 3 day Dublin itinerary
• A Guide to Touring the Scottish Borders
• Getting online when travelling in a foreign country can be daunting – check out our guide to getting online when travelling to help you figure out the best options for your trip
• If you’re interested in getting better photos when you travel, take a look at my online photography course , where I’ll teach you everything you need to know about getting better photos – whatever camera you have!
• If you want a physical (or digital!) book to accompany your travels, then Amazon do a good line in UK Travel Guides , and there is naturally a Lonely Planet and a Rough Guide to the UK available.

If you’re planning on visiting a number of historical properties, there are a couple of options you have for saving money as a visitor to the UK. Two main organisations exist to preserve these properties, the National Trust, and English Heritage.

Both of these organisations offer specific passes for visitors to the UK, which represent great value for money for visitors.

For the National Trust you can pick up a National Trust touring pass . This is valid for 7 or 14 days, and gives you access to every National Trust property in the England, Wales and Northern Ireland.

For English Heritage , you can get an English Heritage Overseas Visitor Pass . This is valid for 9 or 16 days, and gives you access to every English Heritage property in the UK.

Alternatively, you can also buy a full membership to these organisations, which will last a full year. You can buy an English Heritage Membership here and a National Trust membership here .

So those were my thoughts for taking in a slightly longer than two week trip in the UK. I’ve obviously missed out a great number of places, as no two week trip can possibly hope to see everything, but I’d like to think I covered a great many highlights of this truly fascinating country.

As always, if you’ve got any thoughts on this post, do hit up the comments below!

Enjoyed this post? Why not share it!

There are 219 comments on this post

Please scroll to the end to leave a comment

25th February 2024 at 6:30 pm

Hello, we are planning a trip this summer. On my list is scotch tasting in Islay. How many days should we add? Do you have any recommendations?

Laurence Norah says

25th February 2024 at 9:28 pm

Sure thing. Islay is beautiful and very much worth a visit. I’d suggest spending a couple of day at least if you can spare it as it takes a bit of time to get to and from the island and there is plenty to see and do there. I have a guide to things to do on Islay which might help. In terms of whisky distilleries, if you have a favourite whisky that I’d obviously recommend going to that distillery. My favourite whisky is Laphroaig, so I enjoyed visiting that distillery particularly. However my guide to Islay lists all the currently active ones so you can make a choice as to which one you prefer.

Have a great trip!

Marcelo Gurgel says

18th January 2024 at 11:52 pm

Hello ! Your post is very good ! I would like to do a similar tour, but on a motorcycle. Including Isle of Man where the TT Isle of Man race will take place. Please for I leave the bike on the London side and take the Ferry by foot and the best option? Cheaper in this case? How much do ferries generally cost? Where do I search for tickets and itineraries? Thanks a lot for the help !

19th January 2024 at 12:02 am

Hi Marcelo,

Thank you! So the only company which operates ferries to the Isle of Man is the Isle of Man Steam Packet Company, and the best way to book a ferry is directly on their website here . They operate services from Heysham, Liverpool, Belfast and Dublin.

If you plan on visiting during the TT race then you should book as soon as you can as this is a very popular event.

The price will vary depennding on when you go but it is definitely less expensive to go as a foot passenger. Looking at a route, it’s around £40 – £50 one way for a foot passenger, and £120 – £140 for a passenger with a bike. However, remember that you will need to pay to park your bike somewhere secure, and you will also need to have transport on the Isle of Man. Also, at more popular times, such as during the TT races, prices can be higher.

I hope this helps, let me know if you have any more questions! Safe travels!

PAUL BASILE says

10th December 2023 at 10:20 pm

stumbled across your blog and was pleasantly surprised! my wife and I will arrive in London on 6/19/24 in advance of Wimbledon where we’ll be staying from 7/5 though 7/10. we want to sorta do your route in reverse, heading out of London straight away renting a car, and heading out. we have around 2 weeks and want to start heading to Ireleand, then Scotland, then visiting cousins in Durham in northern GB, returning car in London before wimbeldon.

would love to get some advice on that reverse route, forgoing the London stuff until later, but wanting your insights on anything else! thanks in advance!

13th December 2023 at 12:19 am

It’s great to hear from you. So you can do the route either way without any issue. The main thing if you do decide to include Ireland is to be sure to check if the car rental company you choose allows you to take the car on a ferry to Ireland. Some will and some won’t, you’ll just want to confirm before booking. Otherwise I think you have the structure of a good itinerary. You can follow my route and just adjust it to suit your interests and available time. I’d definitely recommend booking in advance for places to stay and the ferries as you are coming at a popular time for travel so things will start to book up. Otherwise, just have a great time and let me know if you have any questions!

13th December 2023 at 2:38 am

Lawrence….thanks so much…great info on the ferry and booking places….do you have a fav booking site for places to stay?

13th December 2023 at 3:37 am

It’s my pleasure! We primarily use Booking.com when we travel because we like the filters. We usually filter by rating (8+) and then depending on the trip things like having free parking (handy for a road trip). Then things like WiFi, laundry, free breakfast, free cancellation, depending on what we are doing. Also like that you can apply the filters to the map view (again, handy for road trips). You can also book apartments. We also use various other sites depending on where we are going, some places have more AirBnB options. In the UK we also book holiday cottages but for a trip like yours which will likely have more shorter stops I’d say hotels or B&Bs are likely to be an easier option as apartments often have the extra overhead of needing to arrange check in and check out times.

Let me know if I can help any further 🙂

Linda Haddock says

2nd December 2023 at 7:38 am

Hello, thank you for this helpful blog! Do you have any recommendations on when, where and what to include for sites for a JRR Tolkien fan?

2nd December 2023 at 8:46 pm

It’s my pleasure. So Oxford would be my main recommendation as it was here that Tolkien studied and worked. Fun side story, a dear friend of mine was Tolkien’s Doctor and knew him well, although he has now passed. Anyway, Tolkien studied at Exeter Collge in Oxford and was also a fellow at Pembroke College and Merton College, so many of the sights in Oxford like the Radcliffe Camera and Ashmolean museum would be of interest. The Bodeleian Library in Oxford (the Radcliffe Camera is part of this) does have the originals of many of his works but these are not usually on display unfortunately.

I hope this helps a bit! Have a lovely time in the UK and do let me know if you need any more input 🙂

Ingrid Ermanovics says

24th May 2022 at 3:45 pm

Hi, Love your blog. I hear that the traffic in July can be daunting and cause very long delays. As such, would you still recommend a private car hire (car rental)? Or have other suggestions to avoid the issue? Thanks!!

24th May 2022 at 4:33 pm

Thanks very much! So in my experience, the main factors that contribute to traffic in the UK are road works, which can happen at any time, and travelling at specific times. For example, when there is a public holiday on a Monday or Friday, this tends to lead to a lot of holiday traffic. So avoiding those dates makes a lot of sense. July is not particularly worse in my experience, it can be a bit heavier, but it’s not normally awful unless you are unlucky and encounter an accident, or there are road works. I would advise against trips on Friday or Sunday afternoons, as this is when the traffic can be quite bad at any time of year as people go away for or come back from the weekends.

I’d also advise using an app like Google maps with real time traffic, and trying to plan your travel times so they don’t align with the busier times of day. In general though, i would still recommend using a car rental even in July 🙂

I hope this helps!

Debbie Hebert says

16th May 2022 at 12:16 am

Hi Laurence and Jessica, this trip looks super fun and we are looking to visit July-Aug of this year starting in Dublin (as the airfare is best to there from our home in New Orleans). Just a few questions. Would you suggest going North or South from Dublin? How many miles is the entire itinerary? Is there is a stretch where we could ditch the rental car and take the train and then pick up another car? And/or if we drop off the car before and after London and train in which cities would be best to do that? Thank you so much!

16th May 2022 at 3:11 pm

Thanks Debbie!

So I’d probably recommend dropping the rental car in Belfast or Dublin and then flying across to Cardiff or Edinburgh, depending which way you go. Many car rental firms don’t allow for rentals to be taken on the ferry, plus you have to pay more to transport a car, so this would likely save you money.

Direction wise in Ireland, it really depends what you want to see. In the Republic of Ireland you have lovely landscapes and places like the Dingle peninsula and Ring of Kerry. If you head north to Belfast (also a lovely city), then you can visit places like the Giant’s Causeway and the Coastal Causeway route.

Putting a mileage total on the entire itinerary is tricky as there are likely to be many detours but I’d say a ballpark of 1500 – 2000 miles seems about right. In terms of areas where you can drop the car and take public transport, a lot of this will depend on what you want to see. If you are happy with primarily cities, then you can easily get around between cities with a train instead of a car. So for example, Edinburgh to York, York to Manchester, Manchester to Bath and Bath to Oxford would all work. Then if there were specific day trips you wanted to do there’s the option to either rent a car for that day, or take a day tour. But if you are thinking of spending more time in the countryside and smaller towns, then a car would be a lot less useful. I’d definitely recommend against taking a car into London, and dropping it off somewhere like Oxford or Reading before taking the train into London.

Farooq Ghouri says

6th May 2022 at 2:56 am

Hi Laurence and Jessica We are visiting UK this summer for two weeks. Your two weeks itinerary is great resource for us. I wonder how we can squeeze Wales in it . Any suggestions will be much appreciated We will be using rental car Sincerely Farooq Ghouri from Chicago USA

6th May 2022 at 9:44 am

Thanks very much! So the southern part of Wales is included in this trip on the return from Ireland. However, if you wanted to add Wales your main option would be to do it as you drive north, or to consider skipping Ireland and to drive back down through Wales to Bath. The second option might be easier as it cuts down having to think about a ferry / flight across to Ireland, but it’s up to you. This itinerary is already very busy, so adding more to it as it exists would be a bit of a challenge in my opinion.

Let me know if I can offer any further advice, and have a great time in the UK!

6th May 2022 at 5:06 pm

Thank you much Laurence I will keep your suggestion in mind when finalizing the itinerary

Heather says

28th April 2022 at 2:35 am

I noticed your recommended the The Resident Victoria and I was wondering if I could ask you a few questions. I will be travelling with 3 people, one of which is a full time wheelchair user. Do you think the room size is adequate for a 5 day visit? Did you happen to notice if the showers were roll in or a wet room with chair? I realize most hotels only have accessible showers and whatnot in certain rooms so will understand if you don’t know. I found your travel blog a month ago and love it. Thanks from Canada

28th April 2022 at 12:01 pm

Hi Heather,

Sure thing. So, the first thing to be aware of is that rooms in central London tend to be quite small, especially if you are used to the size of hotel rooms in North America. Another thing to be aware of is that baths are quite common, and having a shower over the bath rather than a separate stall is also fairly common. So if looking for an accessible room it’s really important to specify that, and it’s always worth checking with the hotel what that actually means.

I would say that none of the rooms in the Resident Victoria would really be suitable for three adults to share for a longer stay, if that was what you were thinking. The superior rooms do have the option for three single beds, but these are not accessible rooms. In general, the rooms are fairly compact and I think a wheelchair user in particular would struggle in their standard rooms.

If you were thinking of separate rooms, some of their King Rooms are accessible so that would be an option. I called the hotel this morning and they confirmed that it is their King rooms which are accessible and the showers in these rooms are fully roll in. The toilets and sinks are also accessible. They can also provide a chair in the shower if you want. However these are definitely rooms for two people.

I hope this answers your question! The property is very well located for sure. Let me know if I can offer any further advice. I also have a full guide to where to stay in London which has a lot more options 🙂

13th April 2022 at 11:47 pm

Hi Laurence,

Was very interesting to read this trip. But it’s more suitable for adults without kids to travell to Ireland within two weeks. Can you please look for following trip plan: We are 2 adults + 2 kids (12 and 10) for 14 days. My daughter likes Harry Potter, so preference on these kind of attractions. So i wanted to divided for following parts: 1. London 5 days –>>> museums, parks and so on. 2. Warner Bros. Studio Tour London 1 day 3. Oxford or Cambridge .. yet not decided… for one day + Windsor Castle 4. Rent a car(or by train) and drive to the north >> York 1 day Manchester + Alton Towers – 1 day 5. Drive to south Birmingham (Cadbury world + other attractions) – 1 day Costwolds area – 1 day Bath + Stonehenge – 1 day Total 12 + 2 days (driving + bufffer for other changes during the trip)

Do you think is it good? What to add or remove? Or continue to Edinburgh and cancel some places in current trip? Thanks in advance Sam

14th April 2022 at 11:23 am

Great to hear from you. I agree, trying to include Ireland on the trip would be challenging with family. I think your itinerary sounds good, spending more time focusing on a smaller number of areas is a good choice. For your options, I think I might suggest Oxford over Cambridge if your daughter likes Harry Potter as there are quite a few filming locations in Oxford (see the Oxford section of our Harry Potter guide here ). I would also probably allocate a whole day to Oxford and maybe do Windsor Castle on one of your days in London. Oxford is very easy to reach by train from London so makes an easy day trip, but the day might feel rushed if you include Windsor as well.

I think otherwise your itinerary sounds good. A car will make things easier for sure, especially for things like exploring the Cotswolds and getting to Alton Towers. These are doable by public transport but it will take up valuable time. I also think focusing on England is a good idea. Depending on how much of a Harry Potter fan your daughter is you might consider stopping at Gloucester as well to see Gloucester Cathedral, which was used for various Hogwarts scenes .It’s a spectacular cathedral and lovely city in its own right as well, easy to see in 2-3 hours between Birmingham and Bath before dipping into the Cotswolds.

Have a great trip – let me know if you have any questions!

Vincent Choo says

12th April 2022 at 11:04 am

Laurence, My family and I ( 4 of us intend to tour Great Britain for 2 weeks before joining our friends in Belfast to continue another 10 days covering the island of Ireland. We intend to travel with a combination of car, train , ferry and air and hope to have your recommendation on which sectors should I use the above modes of transport. The intineary is roughly the same as your 2 weeks ( loop from London and ends there ) Thank You

12th April 2022 at 2:43 pm

Hi Vincent!

This is a great question, and the answer will come down to both budget and your interests.

If you are primarily interested in cities and larger towns, then travelling by rail might be easier for the majority of your trip. You can get between most cities and towns quite easily by train, and if you book well in advance you can also get cheap fares. You can also use a Friends & Family railcard to save even more. Travelling by train has the advantage that you don’t have to worry about car rental costs, fuel costs and finding car parking, the latter of which can be a challenge in many cities. I’d definitely advise against a car in London at the very least.

If you prefer a mix of city sightseeing and countryside, then a car is going to be more useful as most countryside sights and places like the Lake District are going to be a lot easier to get to and around with your own vehicle. I’d just suggest leaving the car out of the London part of the trip, and remembering to think about parking and fuel prices as part of your budget. I think a car might end up being slightly more expensive than public transport, but honestly the car rental market is so turbulent these days it’s hard to know without doing the math.

My recommendation would be to fly to Ireland – low cost flights with budget airlines will likely be the best option, and most car rental companies actually don’t allow for their vehicles to go on a ferry. Then you could pick up a hire car in Ireland on arrival.

It sounds like you have a great trip planned – let me know if I can offer any more input!

Sanchay says

7th April 2022 at 8:05 pm

Hello, Im planning a 2 week trip which shall include England, Wales, Ireland and Scotland during the month of October 2022. Is it feasible to cover all the places in 2 weeks considering that we are a group of 6 adults and 2 children ( 11 and 12 yrs) or shall we skip any of the destinations. We shall use Public transport in London and prefer Self drive cars / Trains / Ferries elsewhere. I also want to know if you could share some ranch stays where in we can stay and enjoy the country side instead of hotels. Awaiting your kind suggestion

Thanks and Regards 🙂

8th April 2022 at 11:04 am

Hi Sanchay,

Thanks for your comment. So I would probably recommend that you focus on maybe a couple of countries so you can enjoy yourself a bit more. I would probably recommend perhaps the mainland UK, as the extra effort required to get across to Ireland will eat into your time with two weeks. So perhaps a trip which includes London and Edinburgh, and then areas like the Lake District and / or Wales. One thing to be aware of is that the weather in October can be a bit variable, so spending more time in the cities might be more appealing rather than the country side where the weather might not be suitable for a lot of outdoor activities. Of course, you might be lucky and get good weather, but this is not guaranteed.

For ranch stays, probably the closest in the UK would be countryside B&Bs. Some farms do have accommodation option, and there are some lovely self catering options in the country as well.

Have a great trip and let me know if you have any further questions!

Derek Bowen says

2nd June 2021 at 5:16 pm

A really good trip, but I would skip Manchester and head right up through Rawtenstall, up through Burnley and Nelson. This would be a really good look at the cotton industry as well a real feel of northern England, as well as the best fish and chips. Then carry on up through Skipton, trying to time market day, and over to York, which is a must.

3rd June 2021 at 12:53 pm

Thank you Derek! For sure, there are so many ways to change this route depending on interests, and your suggestion is a good one 😀

Patrick Russell says

22nd March 2021 at 5:18 pm

This is absolutely amazing itinerary. What would a rough cost be for a trip like this? Minus airfare, and passports.

Thank you, Patrick

22nd March 2021 at 5:23 pm

Thanks Patrick! So it will vary quite a bit depending on your travel style. The main costs on a trip like this are transport, accommodation, food and attraction entry. Accommodation will obviously depend on how comfortable you like to travel, and food will also vary a lot depending on if you prefer fine dining or simpler fare.

To help cost a trip like this I put a guide to the costs of travelling in the UK in a post, which should give you some guidance 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

Hope this helps!

Matthew says

8th December 2020 at 2:51 pm

Interesting itinerary. As a British person, rather than a traveller, my comment would be it doesn’t have much of the coast in, though I understand the time constraints. But a trip to the UK with no seaside towns! At least add Brighton, easy to reach from London. Dorset isn’t too far either, and has a fantastic coast. Also, Chester is beautiful and well worth inclusion.

8th December 2020 at 2:52 pm

Hey Matthew,

Great feedback. When I wrote this guide initially it was in response to a specific request, but of course there is so much of the UK that it doesn’t cover for various reasons (including time restraints!). I always encourage folks to use it as a rough guide, but to modify it for their own interests 🙂

Thanks for stopping by!

Tammy Howard says

25th February 2020 at 11:07 pm

Dear Laurence,

Thank you so much for this itinerary. It is fabulous!! We would like to sleep in a castle while on our trip. Are there any that you know of that allow this along this route?

26th February 2020 at 11:20 am

Dear Tammy,

My pleasure! So yes, there are quite a few options along the route, depending on your budget. Some options to consider:

Thornbury Castle – just north of Bristol

Glenapp Castle – just south of the Scotland – Ireland ferry crossing. We’ve stayed here and it’s wonderful

Kilkea Castle Hotel – south of Dublin. We’ve also stayed here.

Cringletie Castle Hotel – about a 40 minute drive south of Edinburgh. Another of our favourites.

Of course, this is just a small selection – there are many more across the UK to choose from, at a range of budgets. One tip when staying in a castle hotel – some of them have built more rooms outside the castle itself. So make sure when booking that you get a room that inside the castle (I think otherwise it sort of defeats the point!).

Have a great trip, let me know if you have any more questions!

Abdiaziz says

29th February 2020 at 8:27 am

How much will I pay if I want to travel next month

29th February 2020 at 10:14 am

Hi Abdiaziz,

March is not too busy a month for travel in the UK, so prices should be reasonable. To figure out your costs for this trip, see our guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK 🙂

Dhaval says

3rd February 2020 at 9:17 am

Hi Laurence, Thanks a lot for this amazing itinerary. We are a group of 4 adults + 4 kids (1Y,3Y,5Y,7Y) and are planning a 15 days trip to the UK. This will be our first time. Can you please assist us with the below queries:-

1. Considering we have small kids, what is the best mode of transport to travel from London to Edinburgh to Dublin? Should we keep one separate day for travelling in our itinerary? We will also have Kids Strollers everywhere we travel. 2. We want to do Day tours from London to Oxford, Cotswold, Stonehenge, Bath etc keeping our base in London. But few of my friends suggested that the Local operators don’t include kids below 5Years and we will be forced to take a rent a car. Any suggestions? 3. Also if we follow your above itinerary, can you guide us the exact cities in which we need to book our apartments/hotels to avoid hassle-free travelling.

Thanks a lot in Advance. Cheers 🙂

3rd February 2020 at 2:45 pm

My pleasure 🙂 I will do my best to help of course. To answer your questions:

1 – From London to Edinburgh I would recommend the train. This takes around 4.5 hours and will be a lot quicker than driving / taking a bus, plus you will have more space for your stroller / bags etc. You could fly too, but as it will take time to check everything in, go through security etc, I think the train will be easier. Just be sure to book your train well in advance to get a good price, and be aware that if you book a ticket in advance, you must take the booked train, the ticket will not work on a different train, even on the same day.

For Edinburgh to Dublin, your only option is realistically to fly.

2 – This is correct, for safety reasons most group tours do not accept children under a certain age, which is often 5. However, you can instead book a private tour. For a group of eight of you this should not work out much more expensive than a normal tour, plus you will be able to customise the itinerary. So I would advise reaching out to private tour operators who should be able to assist.

3 – All the cities are in the itinerary, you would need to stay in whichever ones you want to visit that don’t fall within the day tours you wish to take from London.

I hope this helps – have a great trip and let me know if I can help any further,

Serafina Macdonald says

11th January 2020 at 9:09 pm

Hi there, we are planning a trip to England, Scotland, and Ireland at the beginning of July. We are thinking about 16-18 days. I looked at your itinerary and love your suggestions! My husband does want to spend a half-day in Liverpool and I think we can tweak your itinerary to fit it in and try to do Isle of Skye as well. Since we do have the few extra days at the end of the trip, do you think it would be worthwhile to travel over to the other coast of Ireland to explore that side? (Galway, Aran Islands). Would love some suggestions.

11th January 2020 at 9:18 pm

Hi Serafina!

So Liverpool would definitely be an easy addition to the itinerary. The Isle of Skye is a bit more of a trek, as it’s a five hour drive each way from Edinburgh, so I’d suggest allocating at least 3 days for that, one day each for the drive and one day to actually explore. So do keep that in mind.

For Ireland, absolutely. The west coast is stunning, and if you can find time to head over there I would definitely suggest doing so. There’s a lot to see over there, so the hardest part will be choosing, but certainly the Cliffs of Moher, Dingle Peninsula and Ring of Kerry are some good candidates for your shortlist 🙂

Have a great time, and let me know if you have any more questions!

12th January 2020 at 2:15 pm

Thanks so much! Looking forward to this trip!

3rd December 2019 at 9:40 am

Dear Laurence, This is the first time I visit UK so could you help give a good advice to have plan visit UK during time 24th Dec- 08th Jan

Thanks Duong

3rd December 2019 at 6:11 pm

Thanks for your message. The majority of the information you need should be available on the site, both in this post and in the posts I link to. I am happy to try and help answer any specific questions you might have – is there anything in particular you are worried about?

The main things I would suggest, depending on where you are travelling from, are to plan what you want to see, to plan your accommodation and transport, and to pack properly for winter. Obviously you are visiting over Christmas and New Year, which is a busy time of year, so if you have not booked your accommodation yet you will definitely want to look into that, especially over New Year as that can be a busy time for both travel and accommodation.

Let me know if I can offer any more specific help for your trip,

Hang Tran says

26th November 2019 at 3:59 pm

Hi Laurence, Thank you for your advice and emails. I was able to put together our 2-week itinerary in England. I changed our lodging to London instead of Heathrow and booked different places when we travel around with our Britrail passes. I can’t say thank you enough. It’s very helpful for us. We will stay in London (3 days), Edinburgh (3 days:Edinburgh and York), Bristol for 5 days, Bath for 2 days and travel to other nearby cities (Stonehenge, Oxford, Cardiff) by train to make one-day trip. Is it right time to visit Cardiff in winter? If not, do you have any other places to spend a day? We’re thinking about Liverpool but it takes about 3-hours ride. If so, what should we can see in such a short time in Liverpool? We never ride a train before so we don’t mind riding the train everyday and enjoy the view together.

26th November 2019 at 5:20 pm

I am so pleased to have been able to help you and to hopefully make your trip a memorable one. It sounds like you have a wonderful itinerary planned now.

I would say that Cardiff is fine to visit in winter. Like many cities in the UK, lots of the attractions are indoors, so you can visit at any time of year and have a good time. Obviously you’ll want to dress warmly, but this will be the same all around the UK. Cardiff will definitely be one of the easier places to visit given its proximity. Another option would be Birmingham. I think I would probably not do Liverpool from Bristol – the 3 hour trip each way would be 6 hours on a train, so I don’t think you’d really have enough time to enjoy the city.

Let me know if I can be of any further help! We actually live in Bath too, so maybe we’ll see you 😉

28th November 2019 at 5:30 am

Hi Laurence, Thank you for the suggestion. We will look into Birmingham instead of Liverpool. We might be able to meet you for breakfast or lunch in Bath on Dec 22 or 23. I was able to find a place to stay that we can walk up or down the street to get to Bath Spa. Everything is in walking distance. Thanks to you again.

Sincerely, Hang

28th November 2019 at 7:22 pm

My pleasure – have a lovely trip. Do pop a comment here or send me an e-mail if you have some free time!

Laurel says

9th October 2019 at 7:23 am

Hi, love your itinerary of the UK. It includes much of what we want to see. Howev r, we are a senior couple of nomads from Australia and we are trying to organise a four week trip of the UK and Ireland including the islands off Scotland but we are steam train buffs and have the 10 best day trips on steam trains to try to include. Do you help with itinerary planning to include as many of these as we can but in some sort of order? If not can you head us in the right direction? We don’t need London as we have a couple of days there prior to a cruise of Norway. Is it feasible to do this trip in September and will he days still be long and fairly warm? Thanks in anticipation for your advice.

9th October 2019 at 6:16 pm

Thanks very much! So we don’t offer custom itinerary planning as it’s quite a time intensive process. We’re happy to answer specific questions and help where we can of course. Steam trains aren’t really an area of expertise though!

I can definitely answer your questions about September – I’d say September is a great month to travel. If you are lucky it might still be reasonably warm (recent years have been lovely in September), but you skip the crowds of the summer months and the schools will have gone back as well. September and May are our favourite months to travel. Of course, this is the UK, so rain and cooler weather is certainly possible (although you can get this in July and August as well!), so it’s always best to be prepared with layers of clothing, but you should be fine generally. The days will still be long, light until around 8pm depending on which part of the month you visit 🙂

Have a great trip, and let me know if I can answer any more specifics!

Kevin Ortyl says

19th September 2019 at 6:51 pm

Love the website and your two-week itinerary. Very easy to follow.. So glad we found your site. Need advice please… (Coming from Boston, USA) Thinking of a two-week vacation late August 2020 (family of 4… 2 college age kids) flying into London and out of Dublin. So similar trip you outlined but not returning to Heathrow once in Ireland. Planning on rental car and driving everywhere. Can the one way car rental work in this scenario (London, Scotland, ferry to the Emerald Isle, drop rental at Dublin)? Second Q… if we were to eliminate the Wales back to London segment how would you fill in that itinerary staying in Ireland?

19th September 2019 at 7:20 pm

Thanks very much. So dropping off the car in a different country might be a challenge. Most car rental companies will let you drop the car off in a different part of the same country, but as the Republic of Ireland is separate from the UK, that would likely be a challenge. So your best option is probably to rent the car in the UK, then drop it off at Edinburgh airport and fly to Dublin, then pick up a new rental there.

For your time in Ireland, you have a lot of options! If you are looking for a road trip the Causeway Coastal Route in northern Ireland is a favourite of ours, and the Wild Atlantic Way is also a great drive. Of course there is so much to see in Ireland and Northern Ireland depending on what you are interested in, with both Dublin and Belfast being worth a visit. It would just depend if you wanted to do more city or more country 🙂

Let me know if I can be of any more help – we have quite a few posts on Ireland as well on the site with some ideas!

19th September 2019 at 9:58 pm

Thank you for the reply, and the good information regarding rental cars.

To follow up, once in Ireland probably interested in seeing some of the quaint cities/towns, visit the pubs, little urban culture, castles, etc and those types of places in lieu of say hiking and biking. Hoping of course between destinations to see beautiful countryside and such!

20th September 2019 at 9:02 am

My pleasure 🙂 So I would suggest that driving the Causeway Coastal Route ( https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/causeway-coastal-route-northern-ireland/ ) Might be a good option 🙂

4th September 2019 at 2:13 am

Hi Laurence, I really like the two week trip itenerary. We’ll will be driving and are experienced with that. We’d like to see some worthy gardens along the suggested route. Any ideas?

4th September 2019 at 7:02 pm

Certainly. The gardens at Alnwick Castle are wonderful, as are the gardens at many of the stately homes in the UK (you can see our list of good stately homes in England here ). Not all of them have gardens of course, but that’s a good starting point. Many cities also have botanic gardens, including Edinburgh and Kew Gardens in London, which are well worth the visit.

I hope this helps a little 🙂

Rachel Sales says

16th August 2019 at 5:15 am

Hi! This post gave me lots of ideas. However, can you help me out in modifying this itinerary which will make Edinburgh as the last stop? My flight booking is DXB-LHR, EDI-DXB. I thought it will be nice it it’s an onward journey and not have to go back to my starting point. Thank you in advance!

16th August 2019 at 12:12 pm

Glad to be able to help! So as this itinerary is a loop, it’s a bit challenging to modify it that easily. My suggestion would perhaps be to drop Ireland from your trip, and instead to spend more time in Scotland. So you could follow the itinerary up to Edinburgh, and then add in time exploring more of Scotland before returning to Edinburgh. Let me know your thoughts,

Robin Major says

13th August 2019 at 12:53 am

Hello Lawrence,

I just found and love this site!! I’m trying to plan a 25th wedding anniversary trip for next September (2020) to surprise my hubby.

He’s never been to Europe. I was fortunate enough to get two and half lovely days in London a couple years back courtesy of my employer.

I’m not sure if what I want to do is totally doable though… No driving.. we would do transit and rail… I’m thinking a week in Britian and a week in Scotland. Maybe fly into London, spend two full days exploring the sites.. then I’m sort of lost. We are interested in Castles, love the supernatural aspect of York so that will be a must, definitely want to see Stonehenge.. and as odd as it sounds, my parents did Sherwood Forest and Nottingham on their 25th Wedding Anniversary many years ago so wondering if that would be a recommendation? Just not sure of the logistics for a week in Britian.. where to stay etc.

For Scotland, again, Castles and we are both big Outlander fans so we’ve have to see Loch Ness, Inverness and any and all sites made famous by Outlander. I am thinking a week up there and we fly home from either Glasgow or Edinburgh.

Do you have any suggestions/recommendations on an itinerary for us? I would greatly appreciate any knowledge you wish to share with me.

Thank you so much! Robin

13th August 2019 at 10:19 am

Thanks very much! It certainly would be possible 🙂 I’ve actually written a 10 day UK itinerary by public transport. Whilst the route isn’t exactly what you want, the post does have some useful information to help you plan your trip, especially around booking the trains etc. If you’ve not seen that post yet, it’s here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/10-day-uk-itinerary-public-transport-train-bus/

Regarding your specific itinerary, I would suggest you start in London as you suggest. You could then take a day tour from London out to Stonehenge. This is doable by public transport, but is way easier as a day tour, plus they usually have some extra stops like Bath. You can read our guide to doing that here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/Stonehenge-bath-cotswolds-day-trip-from-london/

So Nottingham is nice (I went to university there), but with limited time I wouldn’t say it was a must do. My suggestion would be to take the train from London to Oxford, and then up to York. A day in each location would work. You are now up to five days in England. Castles are a bit tricky by public transport as many of them are out of cities. I would perhaps suggest extending your time in London and taking the extra day to visit either Windsor Castle or Hampton Court Palace. From York you could head up to Durham which is a beautiful cathedral city.

From Durham the train to Edinburgh is not too far. I’d suggest basing yourself in Edinburgh for at least three days. Two days to explore the city, and then one day to take an Outlander tour. We have specifically done 1 day tour with Rabbies , and thought it was great. We have more suggested day tours from Edinburgh here:

https://independenttravelcats.com/day-trips-from-edinburgh-scotland/

From Edinburgh our recommendation would then be to take the train up to Inverness, from where you can explore more castles, Loch Ness and the Highlands. Again, plenty to do in this area, and there are lots of great day trips to plan. You can see our guide to some of the best here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/day-trips-from-inverness-scotland/

I think that should give you plenty to work with – let me know if you have any more questions!

8th August 2019 at 9:35 pm

I just found this page and so glad I did especially your “Best Stately Homes in England” We will be visiting England and Scotland for 2weeks October 16-29, 2019 and I am excited about your itinerary. We have been to Northern Ireland (once)and Republic of Ireland (4 times) so we can leave those out, so are there any other places you might suggest? My husband has driven every time we have visited Ireland so he can handle a manual transmission. We land at Gatwick Airport and I thought we could head to Edinburgh via a easterly route and return to London via a westerly route. We do not have to travel only motorways but don’t wait too many small country lanes (did plenty of those in Ireland). Any suggestions you could make would be greatly appreciated. Love Manor Houses, Castles, rolling landscape, waterfalls, quaint English market towns or villages, etc. THANKS

9th August 2019 at 8:54 am

Sounds like you have a great trip planned, and I will certainly do my best to help. It sounds like your route is pretty good already, coming down the west side of the UK gives you the chance to pop into the Lake District, explore towns like Chester, and even larger cities like Birmingham. In terms of stately homes, well, I would obviously recommend the majority of those in my post on stately homes. I’d also add Edinburgh Castle of course if you like castles, as well as the more ruined Craigmillar Castle on the outskirts of Edinburgh. Alnwick Castle on the way up through Northumberland is stunning, as are many of the other castles in Northumberland, like Bamburgh and dunstanburgh. For rolling hills and greenery, the Lake District is lovely, but I can also recommend the Hadrian’s Wall area of Northumberland, particularly the area near Housesteads.

For quaint English towns, of course the Cotswolds would be by number one pick. The counties of Kent and Dorset are also good options.

I think that should get you started, let me know if you need some more ideas!

Christine Greentaner says

5th August 2019 at 12:26 pm

Hello!! I stumbled on your site asking google if I could do the this kind of trip and wow, here you are! Unsure of the driving though since we zero experience. However, this two week itinerary gives us something to start thinking about. Thank you so much!! Christine

7th August 2019 at 2:52 pm

Hi Christine!

Driving in the UK is definitely a bit different, especially if you are coming from a country where they drive on the right hand side. Also, if you’re coming from the USA, be aware that most cars in the UK have manual transmissions, so when you rent a car if you are not used to driving a manual you should specify an auto. I have a guide to driving in the Uk which you might also find useful 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/tips-for-driving-in-the-uk/

Let me know if you have any questions, and have a great trip!

Danie marais says

11th July 2019 at 8:54 pm

What will it cost for 2 adults

12th July 2019 at 4:17 am

Hi Danie – this really depends on your travel style – you can see a guide to how much travel in the UK costs here for some estimates: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

Margaret says

9th July 2019 at 6:29 am

HI , Just wanted to ask. I am getting a little a little worried,as our trip is getting closer and closer. Your site has helped so much. Does this sound ok to do. Day 1 arrive late afternoon explore Paddinton. Day 2 & 3 follow your 2 day guide of london sites. Day 4 train to oxford, free 2 hour tour. free time to explore oxford Day 5 train back to oxford ,pick up car. Drive to Cotswold explore.. Drive on up to peak district stay over night . 1 night Day 6 explore peak district , drive to Manchester and york .explore. Now I am unsure to travel to the Lake district Or follow onto Alnwick. as some people say not to miss out on the lake district. We dont have enought time to cut back over to Alnwick unsure . We arrive in paddington on the 20th want to leave Edinburgh 31st. So take into account at least 2 night in Edinburgh and head onto Belfast. We will then explore Belfast and Dublin for 2 weeks as we have friends there. follow onto wales Bath but we do want to stay in Southampton for two days once again friends. Can you get to Heathrow airport from Southampton We have 5.5 weeks for this trip but I do want to spend time with friends in Belfast and Dublin. I am so over whelmed .

10th July 2019 at 5:43 am

Hi Margaret!

First, I’m delighted we’ve been able to help 🙂

Your comment covers a few points so I will try to help where I can. For your itinerary, the first six days look good, the only feedback I would offer is that trying to do the Peak District, Manchester and York in one day is likely going to be too much. Even Manchester and York in one day is quite a bit. York would need at least four hours to fully enjoy it, so I might suggest skipping Manchester unless you are particularly invested in it.

For your Lake District dilemma, I can’t really answer this for you. Everyone has a different idea as to what is “unmissable”, so it really depends on your priorities and interests. The Lake District is certainly very pretty, but so is much of the UK 😉

From Southampton you can definitely get to Heathrow airport. It takes around 2 hours by train. It’s not a direct train though, so you do have to change, but it shouldn’t be too difficult. If you would prefer a direct route, I believe National Express operates a coach service between the two locations.

I think for the rest of your trip you might want to reach out to your friends and ask for their advice in terms of what to see and do. I would try to relax and enjoy yourself instead of trying to see everything and becoming overwhelmed if you can. Travel is definitely a bit of work, but ultimately it is supposed to be fun. I always find that the less planned adventures are the more fun ones. So certainly come up with a framework, but don’t spend too much time worrying about it to the tiniest detail, as it will likely detract from the enjoyment.

22nd July 2019 at 4:35 am

Thank you Laurence, Your advice is so helpful. I have added days, so we can get the most out of our trip 2 days in the Peak District, Manchester and 1 day for York. Now I am on the end part of our trip and once again would like some advice. : After spending 18 days exploring Ireland. We will be catching the ferry to Wales. 20th Fishguard pick up car, early afternoon explore the country driving towards Cardiff, Bristol Question : Unsure as to time length of time needed

I was thinking, see Cardiff, then drive towards Bristol arrive around tea time. sleep overnight and have full day to explore Bristol. 21st after exploring Bristol drive towards Bath. arrive around tea time, find somewhere to sleep for 2 nights (21st and 22nd) 22nd full day to explore Bath. 23 th drive toward Stonehenge, Amesbury, drive onto southamption return Car

24th southamption .explore Southamption see family member. we need to be at Hearthrow airport on the 26th at 9:20 flight take off , My next question is , Should I return to paddington for the 25th so I can get the express train to airport , Is my flight to early to return from southamption. Once again . please guide me. Margaret

22nd July 2019 at 6:03 pm

Hi Margaret,

My pleasure! I will try to help again. Your timings for Bristol / Bath etc seem reasonable. They are very close together, my only advice is to avoid travelling at rush hour (4pm – 6pm), as it will make your journey much longer due to the traffic.

For your second question, in theory you could get from Southampton to Heathrow in time, but it’s around a 2 – 2.5 hour journey. You’d want to check train times for the day you are going, but the earliest trains are around 5am based on my research, so you would get to Heathrow around 7.30am. So yes, it’s possible, but it depends how happy you are with an early start and also the risk of any train delays. Up to you, but personally I avoid early mornings at all costs, so would personally probably just find a hotel near Heathrow 😉

Diana Cottrell says

1st July 2019 at 1:57 am

Loved seeing your site. Very helpful since I’m trying to plan a driving vacation for my husband and myself and really didn’t know were to start. I have some questions but will start with only one. We were in London last year but I could go again. Loved it. Hubby sick and had a different feeling. Would it be hard for someone from the US to land at Heathrow and rent a car…then drive to Windsor right after landing? Is it far enough out of London to get comfortable with driving on a different side of the road?

1st July 2019 at 10:18 pm

So, funny story, after passing my UK driving test the first thing I did was rent a car and drive out of Heathrow! I’m not sure I’d exactly recommend it, you’d be driving onto one of the busiest motorways in the UK (our equivalent of a freeway) which might be quite stressful. It’s possible of course, and I’m sure many people do it, but I would advise caution. Also, make sure you specify you want an automatic as most cars in the UK are manual 🙂

3rd July 2019 at 12:01 am

Thanks for the information. Think we’ll skip Heathrow. How would landing in Edinburgh, then heading up through Scotland and back down England (maybe to Bath). Then going up through York and returning back to Edinburgh to return car.

3rd July 2019 at 2:57 pm

That would likely work quite well. My only advice, if you plan on spending time in Edinburgh, is not to pick up the hire car until you leave, as you won’t need it in the city and you’ll just be paying for car rental and parking for no good reason – the city is very walkable.

6th July 2019 at 11:11 pm

Thanks so much. Will start planning.

Amanda says

23rd June 2019 at 5:59 pm

This is such a great detailed itinerary! We are planning to get a rental car in Cambridge and then driving to Scotland from there, so some of these places we will definitely have to visit! I do have one question, about renting a car. Is there a boarder crossing fee or any other type of fee the rental company could charge to go from England to Scotland? We are planning to do a one-way trip so I know there is a fee for that, but in terms of crossing between the two countries is there a fee? When I read about the boarding crossing fee it was unclear to me if that is only if we leave the UK?

Thank so much!

23rd June 2019 at 6:02 pm

Thanks very much! There’s no fee or anything like that for crossing into Scotland, it’s not really a border like that. It’s all part of the UK, so it’s one country.

Opal joiner says

18th June 2019 at 1:37 pm

Hi Do I need to purchase a London pass and a heritage pass? Or just one pass?

18th June 2019 at 7:05 pm

It depends what you want to see and where you are travelling, but for London the London Pass will cover the majority of the attractions 🙂 I definitely recommend checking what they cover before purchasing though 🙂

Chris Ryan says

17th June 2019 at 8:44 am

From an English persons point of view this is an excellent itinerary. It would be good to include the Lake District and Snowdonia but to cover all this in two weeks would be a nightmare and far too much time on the road. The average Brit would allow at least a month for the whole trip. If only two weeks available I would suggest you save Ireland for another time, it’s sacrilage not to explore more of that country, and maybe see more of the west of Scotland instead.

17th June 2019 at 11:06 am

Thanks very much 🙂 I agree, I was actually born in Snowdonia and that part of the world is wonderful. Have spent many happy weekends camping in the Lakes as well. The itinerary was in response to a specific request – we normally encourage folks to slow down where possible and spend more time seeing and less time travelling, but unfortunately many people don’t have much leave to play with and want to try and see as much as possible 🙂

Lillie says

15th June 2019 at 2:56 pm

Hi! So glad to have stumbled upon your site, as I am planning this trip to the UK in October, and I didn’t even know where to begin. I like the idea of doing all the traveling by road ourselves since we’ll be traveling with our baby who will be 9 month old at the time. I was thinking 10 days, including Ireland, but would you consider that possible? We are really interested in doing the whiskey distillery tours in Scotland and anything and everything related to Harry Potter. We’re also interested in visiting landmarks like the cliffs and stonehenge. We’re usually good at squeezing in a lot in our vacations, but this will be the first time we travel with our son, so I don’t want to set ourselves up for failure either. Any advice on what to cut out or if we need to lengthen the trip?

15th June 2019 at 8:38 pm

So, first off, I have to say that we’re not really experts on travelling with children as we don’t have any of our own. So any advice I offer you is based on what friends and other readers have shared with us about the logistics of travelling with a young person. Of course, everyone’s experience will also be different.

Generally, most folks say that you definitely need to slow down when travelling with young children, as you have to factor in things like feeding, changes and so on. This will definitely vary though depending on age and individual personalities 😉

That said, you are trying to do a great deal in 10 days. Scotland and England are around a 6 – 7 hour drive apart, and if you want to get up into the Highlands you’re looking at another few hours. To then add Ireland would make it more of a challenge for sure. It’s not impossible of course, but it would definitely be rushed. It might be that you would be best off focusing on Ireland and Scotland on this trip, perhaps five days in each, rather than trying to see everything and just having a stressful time. Alternatively, add 3 or 4 days and include some time in England 🙂

I hope this helps a bit!

Ashok Agarwal says

15th June 2019 at 6:01 am

Wow. I looked up the WWW for a 2 week itinerary for the UK and am glad I clicked on your site, from the numerous options that sprang up. The information contained here is so so exhaustive. Not only did I get a fantastic plan but ab amazing read, too. We are planning our first visit to the UK in October and are going to follow your tips to the T. You guys are fantastic. Thanks.

15th June 2019 at 11:04 am

Thanks very much Ashok! Much appreciated 🙂

9th June 2019 at 9:56 am

Dear Laurence!

Thank you SOOOOO much for your inspirational itinerary and all other articles you provide here. They’re great help!

We are going to spend 15 days in UK in August and this is cause we’ve planned to take our son to Warner Bros HP Studio as we are all massive HP fans :). We’ll start and finish in London, though initially we want to hire a car at the airport and start a trip and spend couple of days in London in the end.

Could you kindly give us some advice / decide whether it is possible, to plan a trip considering these simple priorities: 1) we’d love to see Scotland with its green hills, waterfalls etc. 2) we would really like to visit Snowdonia 3) I guess Stonehenge is sth 8-year-old traveler to England must see 4) I personally have dreamt all my life too see PUFFINS (I mean – free puffins) 5) we can skip Irelnad, no problem 😉

I must admit – reading about UK – I am getting a bit lost in huge amount if options and sites one must visit, so I’d be grateful for some advice.

10th June 2019 at 10:57 am

My pleasure 🙂

So my first tip, if you haven’t already booked the Harry Potter Studio Tour is to do it as soon as possible as it books out well in advance 🙂 I also have a guide to visiting which you might have already seen, but just in case you haven’t, it’s here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/taking-a-harry-potter-studio-tour-everything-you-need-to-know/

Then, on to the question of your itinerary. Assuming two days in London, that gives you around 12 – 13 days to play with. I would suggest you spend them as follows. Given that you are Harry Potter fans I’m also including some HP filming locations you might enjoy 😉

Day 1 – head to Oxford, overnight here. Lots of awesome history, plus lots of Harry Potter filming locations to explore. Day 2 – head to Bath via Stonehenge Day 3 – head up to Snowdonia. Will be a bit of a drive, but worth it. I’d advise a couple of days in Snowdonia to do some hiking and exploring the towns, castles etc. The roads are slower here so it will take longer go get around

Day 5 – Head across to York Day 6 – Drive up to Alnwick Castle, another HP filming location. Then continue on to Edinburgh. Day 7 & 8, Edinburgh. Lots to see, lovely castle. Where Rowling wrote many of the HP books. Note the Edinburgh festival will be on so the city will be very busy. If you decide to stay in Edinburgh, you need to book now. Also, if you want to see puffins, the Isle of May just near Edinburgh is one of the best places to get up close to them. You need to book a trip, which you can do here: https://seabird-centre.seafari-edinburgh.co.uk/forth-ferry-and-isle-of-may

Day 9 – head across to Loch Lomond and the Trossachs. Overnight here or in Oban Day 10 – head up to Fort William / Glencoe. You can ride the HP train from here, or go see the viaduct at least Day 11 – head down to Glasgow, overnight Day 12 – drive down to Liverpool, overnight Day 13 – return to London.

I would say that would be a good way to do it! We have lots more info on Harry Potter sites if you are interested: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/london-harry-potter-locations/ https://independenttravelcats.com/guide-top-harry-potter-sites-in-edinburgh-scotland-jk-rowling/ https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/harry-potter-filming-locations-uk/ https://independenttravelcats.com/harry-potter-filming-locations-in-scotland/

10th June 2019 at 8:52 pm

Thank you a lot for your advice! The plan sounds great and we are definitely going to follow it step by step :)))

with best regards!

7th June 2019 at 9:00 am

Hi, what a great article! However, do you have any tips for hire car? Are there any fees/ extra charge or need to notice the supplier that the road trip route is involve Wales, Ireland and Scotland?

7th June 2019 at 8:37 pm

Thanks very much!

For driving in Wales and Scotland it won’t matter because they are part of the united Kingdom, so it’s still the same country.

The republic of Ireland however is a separate country, plus you have to take a ferry to get there. So that would be something you would need to check with the rental agency.

S. Steinback says

26th May 2019 at 9:16 am

Hi, my daughter and I are leaving mid August to the UK for 2 weeks. We are planning to start our trip in London. Then wanted to see Brighton, Cornwall, Wales and Scotland. We also want to see Bath and Oxford too. Is this doable using the train? We are unsure of how we should book our traveling using train, car or bus. Can you provide and manageable itinerary and recommendations on how we should travel from each place on a 2 week trip?

26th May 2019 at 11:04 am

Hi Sabrina,

So you should be able to see most of what you want to see by train. As an example, I’d suggest:

2 days in London 1 day in Brighton (train to Brighton takes about an hour, so can be done as a day trip from London or overnight) 1 day in Oxford (1 hour train from London to Oxford, overnight in Oxford) 1 day in Bath (1 hr 40 minute train from Oxford to Bath, overnight in Bath) 2 days in Cornwall (around 3 hours by train from Bath to Cornwall. You might want to take a tour in Cornwall as there is less public transport to get around) 3 days in Wales (train from Cornwall to Cardiff is around 3 – 4hours, but then you will have to plan how to get around Wales. Again a tour might be easiest) 3 days in Scotland (you can either fly from Cardiff to Glasgow / Edinburgh, or take the train, but the train will take around 8 hours)

I’d also suggest looking into Rabbie’s Trail Burners . They do a number of tours from London which might suit what you want to do and save you the hassle of planning. These cover the majority of the destinations you want to visit.

I hope this helps a bit with your planning!

Ed Hyland says

17th April 2019 at 12:01 am

Thankyou for your guide it was really helpful I am living in Argentina and j am planning on bringing Argentinian tourists to Wales and central England on a tour of castles and important historical sites .I plan on bringing groups of around 10 people and using a rented mini bus to move around. Do you have any helpful tips as this will be our first tour ,we are planning on visiting early September All the best .Ed,x

17th April 2019 at 10:56 am

My pleasure. So I don’t have any experience of running this kind of trip, so it’s tricky to give very specific advice. I am sure you have considered things like insurance and liability and so on, as well as any other legal requirements involved with running a tour.

THe only tips I have would be around admission to sights – there are usually group discounts available for attractions that you might be able to take advantage of, although you might need to call in advance to arrange these. I’d also advise to definitely book your accommodation in advance as you have a larger group.

Otherwise, I hope you have a great trip!

12th April 2019 at 12:04 am

I was planning this itinerary since I saw and had 15 days in the region. After more research I am now wondering what it takes to get a rental car from London to Ireland and back? Do you use the same car the entire trip, or would you switch cars at the water crossings in order to not have to pay to ferry the car across? Also I’ve heard rental agencies in England don’t really allow their rentals (or at least coverage) in Ireland? And yet another concern is time, I keep hearing that driving over there is quite a bit slower going than say the US, or by train, would this itinerary still give enough time to enjoy the locations or would it be quick stops and rushed in order to get to the next place? Sorry a lot of questions, just trying to decide if I need to break the trip up to just one or two countries. Thanks. And love you blogs and all the information and amazing photography.

12th April 2019 at 11:46 am

So it is certainly possible to take a hire car on the ferry, it just depends on the hire car company, and some of them charge a fee for doing so. Here’s an example of the Enterprise UK policy: https://www.enterprise.co.uk/en/help/faqs/driving-across-borders.html

Obviously you also then have to pay the ferry fee for the hire car as well. So an easier option to be honest is just to fly, for example to take a flight from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin. You would drop off the hire car in Edinburgh and pick up a new one in Belfast.

I appreciate this might be a bit of hassle, so certainly adjusting the itinerary so you skip Ireland is another option. In this case, I’d suggest either spending more time in Scotland, or coming down the west coast of the UK, visiting the Lakes and Wales.

The roads in the UK are definitely a bit busier and can also be slower than roads in the USA. This itinerary is definitely doable, but I’m always a fan of slowing down and seeing more, so that is a good option too 🙂

Let me know if you have any more questions!

David Cameron says

11th April 2019 at 1:56 pm

“You’ve packed up every possible solution in this one blog. I’m over the moon! I really am! How much would this trip cost, approximately? And if I’m going on this trip, Ireland will definitely be included coz from the moment I saw P.S I love you and Leap Year movie, I’ve been dreaming of visiting those places. Thank you. Thank you so much, Laurence !”

11th April 2019 at 2:04 pm

Thanks very much! So it’s hard to give an exact price as it will depend on your travel style. The best option is to cross reference this post with our guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK, which will let you come up with a budget based on your travel style 🙂

Have a great trip, and let me know if you have any more questions!

Usha Gupta says

10th April 2019 at 6:02 pm

Hi, we are travelling to London for a holiday from India. My 2 sons (29 & 27) and I are planning on spending 2 weeks in London and Wales. 13th-18th in London 19th-21st in Wales 22nd-26th in London Please advice how best to spend our holidays? We do not want to visit any of the normal places as we have seen n visited them all. What are the best places in wales to see and visit? We have not been to wales. Is it safe to take a road rrip from London to wales? Are 3 days in wales enough to get around? Pl advice

10th April 2019 at 6:52 pm

Well, there’s a huge amount to do and see in London beyond all the normal tourist things that you have likely already done. I can advise visiting Greenwich for example if you have not been out there already, and perhaps some of the palaces out of the city, like Kensington or Hampton Course. Sometimes we like to pick up the London Pass and visit some of the many attractions we’ve not been to before!

Wales is lovely but it is quite big so you will want to consider visiting a region. My favourite part of Wales is the northern part, including the Snowdonia national park and towns like Caernarfon, but there are many nice regions and places to visit. If you want to see more you will likely want a few more days in Wales.

It is certainly safe to take a road trip from London to Wales, of course, I can’t guarantee your safety, but it is no less safe than travel anywhere else in the UK 🙂

I hope this helps – have a great trip!

Usha gupta says

14th April 2019 at 3:24 am

Ty for you advise. We decided to spend all our time in London and do day trips, theatre etc.

14th April 2019 at 11:46 am

My pleasure. Enjoy!

Darlene Williams says

24th March 2019 at 6:10 pm

Lovely ideas here! My Granddaughter and I did a trip last summer to the Cotswolds, London and Paris. I’m thinking of a trip with my Granddaughter (18) in 2020 and would like to base myself in the Lakes District or Wales and take in Ireland and Scotland in a 2 week trip. Since I’ve been there I’ve decided I could probably drive it myself or possibly rent cars when needed and travel via train/bus/tours between Ireland & Scotland. I’m guessing the Highlands is probably out of reach for a 2 week trip? I would welcome your knowledge and suggestions. Thank you, Darlene

25th March 2019 at 3:44 pm

Thanks very much Darlene!

I would definitely recommend hiring a car for the Lakes – it’s a more remote part of the UK, and there are fewer public transport options, both for getting there, and for getting around. I would say that it would make for a good base, but just to be aware that the roads are not very fast in either the Lake District or Wales, so it can take a bit of time to get from place to place.

The Highlands would be achievable, but it would involve a great deal of driving, and if you wanted to head up there i would suggest that as a standalone trip, perhaps flying to Inverness (or overnight train from London), and then renting a car from there 🙂

Do let me know if I can provide any more specific information to help you plan!

Deep Shah says

22nd March 2019 at 5:43 am

Hello Laurence and Jessica,

It has been a pleasure reading about all your experiences in and around UK. I am planning to visit UK between April 22 and May 1. I am planning to start my trip from Edinburg cover a bit of scotland and than move on and end my trip in London.

Here is my itinerary Inverness (23 April) –> Isle of Skye (24 April) –> Fort William (25 April) –> Edinburgh (26 April) –> Jedburgh (27 April) –> York (28 April) –> Cambridge (29 April) –> Cotsworld (30 April) –> London (1 May)

Do you think this is doable? Or any particular section is too aggressive? Your help will really help me plan this better.

22nd March 2019 at 10:00 am

This is in theory do-able, but you will be spending a lot of time driving. From Inverness to the Isle of Skye is a 2.5 hour drive for example, and then there’s a lot to see and do on the island which will also require driving. If you are ok with lots of time driving then yes, this is doable, I just wanted to be sure you knew 🙂

24th March 2019 at 12:35 pm

Thanks for the reply. Yes, I am aware that we will have a lot of driving. But thats ok with me. Thanks again for your time. I have made the reservations to follow this itinerary. Will let you know how it goes.

Thanks for sharing all the information on your website.

24th March 2019 at 12:38 pm

My pleasure – have a great time and do let us know how it goes! You can drop in here or in our facebook group 🙂 https://www.facebook.com/groups/travelloversandphotography/

Omker Mahalanobish says

21st March 2019 at 5:22 pm

Thanks for your detailed itinerary. Looks exciting. By the way, could you please let me know, what should be the expected cost for the said trip? Further : I dont want to drive. Me and my wife would be travelling, and we would rather prefer a chauffer driven cab.

Thanks, Omker

21st March 2019 at 5:27 pm

I have a guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

However, if you want to travel with a private guide, this will generally cost in the region of £500 – £800 per day for the car / driver guide, and then you would need to add accommodation expenses and so on on top of that. We recommend Robina Brown for this sort of trip: http://driverguidetours.com/

Heather Reid says

20th March 2019 at 5:20 am

This site is the most perfect one for my needs. I am a solo traveler female aged 74 and I wish my 75th Birthday be spent on the next trip. If there be another solo person I would be happy to meet up before departure….male or female.

20th March 2019 at 12:49 pm

Thanks Heather – have a great trip, and we hope you find someone to travel with!

Phillip Armanas says

5th March 2019 at 12:20 am

Stumbled over your website while looking for ideas for a two week trip to the UK, glad I did. You’ve got a fantastic itinerary which includes a number of destinations my wife and I had in mind already. We are a retired couple, living in Australia six months of the year, and Atlanta, Georgia the other six months. This gives us great flexibility in travel terms, both in SE Asia and from the USA to many places including UK/Europe. A question I have is whether you have done any family history work on any of your travels? My ancestry is Scottish in the mid-1800s when my great-great-grandfather arrived into Port Adelaide, Australia. As yet we have been unable to track him accurately back into Scotland, but his surname is from a very ancient clan that can be traced back to the 13th century in Fife county. Have you any tips on places I might visit to pursue my elusive ghosts? Phill & Patti

5th March 2019 at 1:35 pm

Hi Phill & Patti!

We’re delighted you have found our content useful : ) So this isn’t something we have personally done, however I have some resources that might be helpful:

http://www.scottishgenealogyresearch.com/ https://www.visitscotland.com/see-do/research-your-ancestry/steps/ https://www.nrscotland.gov.uk/research/family-history https://www.nrscotland.gov.uk/research/local-family-history-centres

It helps if you know the person’s name you are researching and where they lived before leaving Scotland. If you know this, you can look for a local research center or records office or clan center. The Visit Scotland link above is a good place to start. The Scottish Genealogy Research is a professional service that will do research for you for a fee.

Good luck, and have a great trip!

Ronald Rieder says

15th February 2019 at 1:22 am

My wife and I would like to take your “ideal itinerary” beginning Sept. 30, 2019. Is there anyone or any group that we could join?

17th February 2019 at 3:56 pm

So this itinerary is a self guided tour for those wanting to drive themselves. However, we appreciate not everyone wants to do that, and we’ve put some suggested tours that will allow you to do a similar trip but in a group tour format. My suggestion for that would be to focus on England and Scotland, and to take this small group tour followed by this five day tour of the Scottish Highlands and Skye .

I hope this helps – let me know if I can offer any more advice!

Cass Baron says

11th February 2019 at 2:19 am

Laurence and Jessica, We are from Utah, United States and have never traveled abroad (except a short trip to Canada and a Western Caribbean cruise). It has been our dream to come to England and retrace our family history roots. We were looking for trip ideas that covered the areas for both a historical trip as well as a family roots trip. We found your site and loved everything that you have written about. We like the 2 week itinerary but don’t want to do the Ireland and Wales portion. We would like to include Nottingham and Hastings areas, do you have any suggestions to add these in for the same amount of time. We are planning on this May. Thanks!

11th February 2019 at 7:40 am

Certainly. I’d recommend Hastings first, then heading from there along to Stonehenge and Bath, then the Cotswolds and Oxford. From there, start heading north, with Nottingham your next stop, before continuing with the itinerary. You could even drop the car off in Edinburgh and fly out from there if you didn’t want to drive back down to London 🙂

I hope this helps – let me know if you have any more questions!

Lashaun says

5th February 2019 at 11:42 pm

Hello. If we skip the Ireland portion where should we extend our time or add another destination for the 2 week adventure? Also we’d like to see a football game, suggestions for city (Manchester, Liverpool?), tickets etc? thank you!

6th February 2019 at 10:36 am

I’d say you could extend by visiting the Lake District and northern Wales, or by heading further north into Scotland, where there’s lots to see. You definitely won’t have trouble finding places to see!

For football, if you don’t have a particular affiliate with a team, then Manchester will likely be a good option as they have the largest stadium. Tickets can be bought online in advance for any of the teams from their official websites, just be aware that they can sell out so you’ll want to book well in advance to be sure of getting a spot.

I hope this helps! have a great trip 🙂

Steve Geller says

2nd February 2019 at 3:10 am

Hi there, Curious if this itinerary, or part of it, could be done in a motorhome (midsize RV) for a family of 2 adults and 2 kids. I’ve never been to most of these places, outside of some brief time in London and Dublin. For itineraries like these where there is a lot of moving around, I like the idea of a motorhome vs going from hotel to hotel (or apt to apt). Thanks!

3rd February 2019 at 11:45 am

So yes, it would be possible to do this is a motorhome. However, I’d probably advise modifying the itinerary fairly substantially, especially the city parts. Most UK cities don’t have centrally located motorhome camping locations, and the streets tend to be fairly narrow, which can make driving and parking a motorhome very challenging. I would instead suggest, if you wanted to do a motorhome holiday in the UK, to look at a driving route like the NC500 (see our camping itinerary for the NC500 here ), or adjusting this route so it visits more of the countryside parts, like the Cotswolds, Peak District, Lake District and Northumberland.

Let me know if we can answer any more questions!

Iskandar Zulkifly Bin Ali says

29th January 2019 at 10:05 pm

Hello there ! finding this website was such a blessing for me! i am a student who wishes to travel around UK for 2 weeks before i go outside UK ( around Europe for a month ). my only problem is, i am studying in london therefore i’m gonna skip london from this amazing itinerary, and am also skipping Scotland cuz i went there last Dec already. which will give me extra days to fill in to make it 2 weeks. would you please help me to suggest places to fill in between the itinerary ? ps; i really really want to see Jurassic coast and cambridge and watergate bay. where should i put these places in terms of best route wise?

thank you in advance for your time !! you got a follower on your ig !

30th January 2019 at 7:33 pm

Hi Iskandar!

Thanks for your lovely comment and following on IG! We’ve actually just recently visited Cambridge and written a detailed guide to the city, which will be live on the blog in the next few weeks 🙂

To answer your question, first I have to assume you are driving. If not, this might have to change a bit to accommodate public transport. But I would say I would go from London to Cambridge, then up to the Peak District, Manchester and York. You could then go across to the Lake District if you wanted, then across to Holyhead and to Ireland (if you wanted to visit Ireland). Then south wales, Oxford and the Jurassic coast.

I hope that works for you 🙂 Have a great trip!

HANNAH JOHNSON says

29th January 2019 at 3:07 pm

This has been an amazing help! If possible, I did want to ask about more recommendations as far as castles/history goes. This is a very close itinerary for what I think we want to do, but I was wondering if you had any more info on what I could add/take away from this list in order to do more of that. Also, we will be departing from the atlanta, GA airport, and returning back to (or starting from) england isnt entirely necessarily. I definitely agree and would take your advice of ending in dublin and returning from there or wales, but im basically trying to avoid flying/ferrying more than need be. What would be your recommendation for doing everything in the UK in one vehicle and then only crossing into ireland once? if that makes sense

30th January 2019 at 7:38 pm

So there are a lot of great castles in the UK, and it’s hard to travel anywhere without finding history! Some of my favourite castles are in Scotland and the Northumberland area, and you’ve also got Hadrian’s wall up there. But York has all the Viking history too, and then cities like Oxford or Cambridge have more from the middles ages, Bath has the Roman empire.. So there’s really no shortage of history to find.

If it was me though, I’d spend a bit more time exploring some of the castles in Northumberland like Alnwick, Bamburgh and Dunstanburgh, as well as some in Scotland.

If you want to do everything in the UK that would be possible, just continue from Oxford to Bath and Cardiff, and then head north from there to York. You might want to bypass Manchester in order to get more of the history you are interested in as it’s more of a town that had it’s heyday with the industrial revolution, which might be a bit too recent history for your interests. You could instead add Warwick, which has a popular castle and a lovely town centre.

Have a great trip and let me know if I can be of any more help!

Hannah says

30th January 2019 at 8:25 pm

For sure! Thank you so much.

Maribel says

17th January 2019 at 4:13 am

Hi, I am planning a 2-week trip to Great Britain flying from Mexico City to London. Your post is very helpful. My trip HAS to include the Isle of Man but I do want to go to Edinburgh and Ireland. What do you think would be the best route? Thanks for your amazing post!

17th January 2019 at 6:37 pm

Hi Maribel!

Great question, and the first time anyone has asked me about the Isle of Man, which I have to admit, I haven’t been to!

There are direct ferry connections to the Isle of Man from Belfast, Dublin, Lancaster and Liverpool.

So assuming you want to do a fairly similar route, mug suggestion would be to follow the general outline of this trip, but take the ferry from Dublin to the Isle of Man, and then on to Liverpool, instead of from the southern end of Ireland to Fishguard. I think that’s the most logical option.

There are other option too – you could go London -> Oxford -> Liverpool -> Isle of Man -> Dublin -> Belfast -> Cairyan -> Edinburgh -> London.

So up to you really! Have a great trip, and let us know if you have any more questions!

Maribel Felix says

17th January 2019 at 6:40 pm

Muchas Gracias! I appreciate you advice very much. I will send you an update of my trip on my way back to Mexico.

17th January 2019 at 9:50 pm

Please do Maribel – we love to hear back from people on how their trips go, and incorporate feedback into our content to help everyone!

16th December 2018 at 12:15 am

Hello! I am planning a 28 day trip in in May 2019. What would you recommend to fill in the extra days? Thank you so much! And thank you for sharing such a lovely itinerary!

16th December 2018 at 11:49 am

Hi Sara! It’s hard to give a precise answer without knowing your interests, but if it was me I would extend my trip up into the northern half of Scotland, perhaps spending 7-10 days driving the North Coast 500, visiting the Isle of Skye and seeing the highlands. You could also head out to the some of the other islands, like Lewis. May is a great time to head up into that part of Scotland.

Other options include Wales or Cornwall, or extending your time in Ireland. There’s so much to see and do, even 28 days will be filled easily!

Nathaniel says

14th December 2018 at 7:57 pm

Could I use this itinerary for a school project. You will be credited and cited, obviously. Thank you if yes and thanks anyway if no. This was fun to read, regardless of your reply Thank you again, Nathaniel

14th December 2018 at 11:43 pm

Hi Nathaniel,

Thanks for asking! Could you e-mail me about this so I get more of an idea of the use? It’s [email protected] 🙂

9th December 2018 at 8:26 am

We are planning a 3 week trip to UK (2 weeks) and Amsterdam (1 week).. We will fly to Amsterdam from London. We were looking at your 2 week itinerary and wanted to ask what would you suggest instead of Ireland, We only want to visit London, Wales and Scotland start at London and return to London. Family with kids who like a bit of adventure, culture so interested in castles, nature etc. Also would like to visit Whisky distilleries preferably Glenfiddich and Aberlour. Also we will be hiring a car in London and return there. Would really appreciate your suggestions.

9th December 2018 at 10:37 am

So my suggestion would be to do a loop from London, similar to that I’ve described here, but instead of going across to Ireland, to head down the west coast of the UK, and then visit the Lake District and Wales on your way down.

In terms of distilleries, certainly, Aberlour and Glenfiddich are achievable from Edinburgh, but you are looking at a three hour drive each way. So you might prefer to visit a closer distillery like Deanston, which is also right next to Doune Castle, which I’m sure your kids will also enjoy 🙂

Hope this helps a bit!

Navtej says

22nd October 2018 at 11:18 am

Hi, a very helpful article. As I plan my next year travel to Europe after a gap of 15 years…it’s a god send. I propose to spend a few days in Amsterdam-Bruges and then fly to London. Here I catch up with another couple and there 12 year old daughter and plan to drive to Scotland and Ireland. We have a total of 10 / 11 days for this.

Am thinking will cut Wales from my itinerary and which other place would u recommend I skip ?

Many thanks

Navtej from New Delhi, India

PS another slighlty unrelates question : If I fly into London should I take a flight into Amsterdam and the train back from Bruges or is this complicated and expensive?

22nd October 2018 at 8:22 pm

It’s hard to give specific recommendations as to what to skip as I’m not sure as to your personal interests. If you are more interested in culture / museums etc, then you will want to include more of the cities, and less of the countryside. Conversely, if you are less interested in the outdoors, perhaps leaving out some of the countryside attractions would be a good idea 🙂

Generally my advice would be just to stick to flights as it’s likely going to be easier and probably less expensive. The train though can be a good option if you book far enough in advance, it will just take a little bit longer.

Hope this helps – have a great trip!

Leslie says

21st July 2018 at 11:12 pm

Four women from Texas will be traveling to the UK in September and wanted to drive (one of us is brave enough to drive on the wrong side of the road). We spend 8 days in London last September with side trips to Bath and a tour to Oxford and Cotswolds and Warwick Castle. We have relatives in Glasgow, so plan to see that area of Scotland. Your information is a Godsend and thank you so much for all your planning. We will let you know how it goes!

22nd July 2018 at 9:36 pm

Thanks Leslie – please do! We always love to hear feedback as to how our posts help people (or if they need changing, we love to hear about that too!)

Have an awesome trip!

Ruth Deane says

11th July 2018 at 6:24 am

A good travel guide to the UK. I know it is difficult to provided a balanced approach due to limited wordage but the emphasis should be on the UK. N. Ireland and its capital Belfast have been sadly neglected in this article and the focus was Dublin which is not part of the UK. Surely something coulf have been added about Belfast and N. Ireland in general. It is a beautiful place. The author did make a reference to the Dark Hedges but associates them with Dublin. Last time I checked they are quite definitely in N. IRELAND. Hope this criticism is constructive. N. Ireland continues to get a bad press but it is a beautiful place and the majority of the people are that bad either.

11th July 2018 at 9:44 am

Constructive feedback is always welcome! We’re actually visiting Northern Ireland next week for a week to fully explore Belfast and the Coastal Causeway, and will be updating our content (and creating new content!) to have more information on this part of the UK 🙂 Stay tuned!

Craig Grimston says

26th June 2018 at 2:47 am

Thank you!!

September is a perfect month to come to Texas – the weather is perfect then! I’d be happy to answer any questions you have to the best of my ability (I’m not a native Texan – originally from Australia), but there is a lot of great things to do here. Austin and San Antonio are great too.

Thank you for offering to answer any questions! We are going in a group, so I’m sure a lot of questions will come up! I’ll try not to bombard you with them, but I may just hit you with a few! We are planning for somewhere in June to August next year (I plan ahead big time!) and couldn’t be more excited to see your beautiful country!

But please, definitely hit me up with any questions you have about Dallas or Texas. If I can’t answer them, I can track someone down who can!

Thanks!! Craig

22nd June 2018 at 8:02 pm

Hi Laurence and Jessica,

I just wanted to say thank you for posting this itinerary. I really wanted to plan a road trip in the UK and after googling about it all I got was a bunch of blogs pointing out all of the negative things and basically saying “don’t bother”!

As I was about to give up and go the typical tourist route, I came across your website. It was exactly what I was looking for! It is inspirational, and put the joy and adventure back into my travel plans.

I’m pretty much going to stick to your itinerary with the exception of Ireland (I wanted to check out the Lake District and Liverpool), so Ireland may have to be a separate road trip!

I have a million questions, but I’m going to spare you of that! LOL. I really just wanted to say a big thank you for sharing your experience and knowledge!

Kindest Regards, Craig – Dallas Texas

25th June 2018 at 9:28 pm

Thank you so much, it always means a lot to hear that people are finding our content useful. I think you are making a sensible choice – there is a lot to see on the mainland of the UK, and it’s also less hassle to worry about rental cars and ferries if you leave Ireland for another trip 🙂

We’re happy to answer any questions you have. We’re actually planning a trip to Texas for late September, and will be swinging by Dallas, so may have some questions for you in return!

Vanessa says

14th May 2018 at 9:38 pm

I’ve googled “hire car” and it says “rental car.” But on your site here it seems that a rental care and a hire car are different things. What exactly is the difference? Thank you! And also thank you for this post – it’s amazing and I think I will definitely base my trip -whenever that may be… – around it. Bookmarking this page!!

15th May 2018 at 5:57 pm

Thanks Vanessa! I think in the UK we use the term hire car, wheras in the USA it’s more likely to be called a rental car. But yes, they are the same thing in my mind, you can use the terms interchangeably as far as I know 🙂 Have a great trip, and don’t hesitate to let us know if you have any questions at all 😀

Saurabh says

7th May 2018 at 7:55 am

Hi Lawrence, This is a great post! I think I can use some help. We are planning a 2 week trip to UK in August with a 1 year old toddler. What from above or otherwise will be a good itinerary for us. How realistic is it for me to cover what you have listed here? Appreciate any help. Thanks!

7th May 2018 at 10:03 pm

Thanks Saurabh! First, I should say that not having kids ourselves this isn’t an area of expertise for us 🙂 However, based on experiences of friends who travel with family, my suggestion would be to probably cut the itinerary in half, and focus on some of the major cities. As it is, it’s quite a busy itinerary, and I think you will have a better time doing a bit less and having the time to really explore some of the cities on the itinerary. So for example, maybe just do England and Scotland, and skip Ireland and Wales. This will reduce your travel, and let you spend a bit longer in each city. I’d also advise finding accommodation close to the city centres and attractions, so at least one of you can go out sight-seeing if one of you needs to stay behind for naps etc. I hope this helps – have a wonderful trip!

3rd May 2018 at 12:38 am

My husband and I are following this itinerary this summer, flying round trip into Gatwick from Canada. I was looking at the cost of the ferry from Scotland to Ireland and than Ireland to Wales and was shocked at the cost. Do you know of any Ferry discounts?

3rd May 2018 at 7:12 pm

Hi Sarah – you can try the various ferry search companies like directferries or a1ferries I think they are called. Unfortunately that time of year is school holidays, and there aren’t many companies operating the routes, so the prices go up. You might consider instead flying from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin instead, and hiring a car in Ireland rather than taking the ferry, if that is a cheaper option!

Badariah says

21st March 2018 at 8:24 am

Awesome I am planning for a 2 week get away to UK. Your article helpsss a lot. Planning to go in mid sept till end of sept

21st March 2018 at 11:25 am

Thanks very much – have a wonderful trip!

11th March 2018 at 9:06 am

hi lawrence me n my wife middle aged planning to do england and scotland in 15 days in july which would be ideal places to cover by public transport. i am open to hire a car for 2 to 3 days if required. please suggest us best possible train route for this trip we are flying in n out of london thanks waiting for ur reply

11th March 2018 at 10:02 am

My advice would be to follow my 10 day UK itinerary, which is designed for public transport: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/10-day-uk-itinerary-public-transport-train-bus/

You could spend a little extra time in each location, or you could add a couple of stops. My advice would be to add 1 day in Bath near Bristol, stop in Manchester between Liverpool and York, and think about stopping in Newcastle on the way to Edinburgh. If you wanted to see the Cotswolds, you could do that with a hire car from Bath, or on a tour from London.

I hope this helps! That post also has lots of information on using public transport in the UK. Have a great trip!

Christine says

19th February 2018 at 4:57 am

Hello and Thank You!! I was just wondering, I’m not the best with timelines haha, but exactly how many hotel stays are there in total in each location? I’m just trying to determine if you actually spent the night in each location for both nights or if you spent the day touring then drove to the next location and got a room, especially for the 1 day places… if that makes sense? My husband and are are arriving March 10th and fly back out the 24th so just trying to sort out the timelines… Also it was suggested to me to go to Cornwall or Leeds, what are your thoughts? Thanks!

19th February 2018 at 6:11 pm

Hi! And my pleasure 😀

So you’d be looking at:

2 nights in London 1 night in Oxford 1 night in the Cotswolds 1 night in the Peak District 1 night in Manchester (could do Leeds here instead) 1 night in York 2 nights in Edinburgh (could do one night in Northumberland on the way up) 3 nights in Ireland / Northern Ireland 1 night in Cardiff 1 night in Bristol or Bath

You could of course spend more or less time in each destination, and leave say London after two full days but only one night, and overnight in Oxford. So really it’s up to you 🙂

Leeds you could easily fit into this itinerary. Cornwall would be a bit harder as it’s a bit further away. If you wanted to do Cornwall, you might need to leave Ireland out for example to give yourself enough time. Hope this helps!

15th February 2018 at 10:57 pm

Awesome Itinerary, I would add Canterbury to this list 🙂

17th February 2018 at 8:35 pm

I’ve only briefly visited Canterbury, must return!

22nd January 2018 at 4:52 pm

This came a blessing in disguise after searching for a week almost and making all shit loads of itineraries. I am thinking of blindly following this as it looks great to me. Need your help on a few points here if it doe snot bother you much, it would serve a great deal of planning for me in addition to what it already has, 1. Was this too hectic considering the number of places you covered? 2. Was driving time included in the time spent at each place you mentioned? 3. Is driving safe in and around England? 4. Is driving a cheaper option than using rail/bus transport? 5. How much did this two week trip cost you? 6. How much does the drive part of the trip cost?

22nd January 2018 at 5:44 pm

HI Saurabh!

Pleased to hear you found the itinerary 🙂 I’m happy to answer your questions of course.

1. This is definitely a busy itinerary, although as you can see from the other comments, many people have enjoyed it. So it really depends on your own personal style of travel and your preferences, as well as who you are travelling with. If you want a less hectic schedule, I’d suggest perhaps leaving the Irish part of the trip out, and maybe focusing on England and Scotland, and perhaps extending your time in cities like London and Edinburgh.

2. Yes, driving time is included. Driving time is not too great in the UK as distances are not large and the motorways are good, however, be aware that traffic can be bad around rush hour in the morning and evenings.

3. Yes, driving is very safe. Of course, accidents happen like anywhere in the world, but for the most part you shouldn’t have any trouble.

4. It depends on a few factors – mostly how many of you there are. For one person, it might be more cost-effective to take public transport. Also, if you book public transport well in advance, especially trains, this can be much cheaper than buying tickets on the day. Car hire also depends on the size of the car, but you can get pretty good value car hire. Fuel is quite expensive, but most modern hire cars are very fuel efficient. I am shortly going to publish a post with a similar itinerary that focuses on travelling in the UK by public transport, so stay tuned for that 🙂

5. Cost is really up to you, as it depends so much on what you want to see! I’d say you can hire a car for around £180 – £250 a week, fuel costs will be in the region of £50-£70 a week, and accommodation is likely to be in the range of £80 – £150 a night for two people sharing. You can of course get cheaper and more expensive accommodation options, it really depends on your style of travel.

6. The main costs for the car are the car hire, fuel, and any insurance you buy. I’d say between £200 and £300 a week, plus any parking fees. I’d definitely advise always booking a hotel that includes free parking.

I hope this helps with your planning – have a wonderful trip, and don’t miss my one week itinerary post for more ideas 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/UK-Itinerary-One-Week-Road-Trip/

Steve and Cheryl Bales says

26th February 2018 at 9:09 pm

Thank you for the wealth of information! We are planning to take a trip to visit our daughter who is in the Air Force in the UK this May. I’ve read your itinerary and the questions and answers that followed. There were a couple of questions that popped up for me and I was hoping you could answer them. You mentioned taking a car over on the ferry to Ireland. We will be driving our daughter’s car, but I was wondering if we needed special insurance on the car to have it ferried. My husband are both disabled to a degree; neither of us are capable of walking long distances or sitting for any duration. Is there a need for concern over these issues? And, what is the cost of a London Pass and how many people does it cover, there will be four in our group? Any information would be much appreciated, thank you in advance. Steve and Cheryl

26th February 2018 at 9:19 pm

Hi Steve and Cheryl,

Thanks for reaching out, and I’m happy to hear you have found the content useful. You don’t normally need special insurance on a car to have it ferried, but you will likely need to check with your daughter’s insurer to make sure it is covered in Ireland. As far as I am aware it should be covered in Northern Ireland with the full coverage, and most UK insurers do provide at least some level cover for the EU, which Ireland is a part of, but worth checking.

For the itinerary I’ve put together, it’s really up to you how much you do. All the major cities have good public transport if you choose not to drive, as well as sight-seeing buses and things like that.

The London Pass prices vary – you have to buy one price per person, so that would be four passes total. Again, the value is up to you and how much you can get out of them. My only concern would be to get real value out of them you do need to try and pack quite a lot in – if you aren’t sure if that’s going to be possible you might end up being better off not getting them and just paying the ticket prices. Also, I’m not sure of your ages, but many attractions have senior concessions, which might also save you money rather than getting a pass. Worth checking the individual websites for the different attractions you want to visit to see what those might be.

You can see the London Pass prices here; https://prf.hn/click/camref:1011lbTW/pubref:FTU2WeekQuestion/destination:https%3A%2F%2Fwww.londonpass.com%2Flondon-pass-prices.php

Derian Quek says

4th September 2017 at 1:10 pm

This trip seems a bit rushed when driving over to Ireland..I am also planning a 2 weeks this December to January. Any tips on this? Am planning London/Manchester/Lake district/Edinburgh/Cotswolds/bath/Stonehenge/Paris

Laurence says

4th September 2017 at 4:05 pm

Hey Darian,

This trip is definitely quite fast – unfortunately folks don’t have too much time sometimes, and are keen to see as much as possible, which is what I try to achieve on this itinerary.

Regarding your itinerary – at that time of year do be aware that the weather obviously won’t be great and it will be getting dark around 4pm – just something to bear in mind. Certainly your plan is possible but will also be quite packed. Perhaps focusing on a few less locations and seeing more. From your list I’d suggest London, with a day trip to bath, the Cotswolds and Stonehenge, then Edinburgh and Paris. You could add in Manchester as well of course. It would also depend on if you have visited any of the locations before and how you plan to travel. I’d suggest train from London to Edinburgh, and a cheap flight from Edinburgh to Paris.

4th September 2017 at 4:15 pm

Hi Laurence. It would actually be my first time to the UK. I’m visiting Manchester because I would wanna catch a game at old Trafford and that’s probably the only reason why. Flight from Edinburgh to Paris sounds like a good option though I would most likely be self driving from London up north. I’m thinking 3 days in London, 1 day in manchester, 2 days in lake district, 3 days in Edinburgh, 1 day to cotswolds and then 3 days in Paris via eurostar before heading back to London for my return flight

Mital Khona says

9th August 2017 at 2:43 pm

Hi Lawrence, Thanks a bunch for this wonderful itinerary… 1. We are travelling this September with 2 Kids ( 2 years old and 8 years old) and2 parents ( senior citizens).. Is this still doable.. I was thinking of picking up train for journey from London to Edinburgh 2. We would like to spend 3 days on the alternative route to Ireland suggested by you above. Can you help on the route/ time we should allot to Snowdonia, etc(west coast of the UK, including Glasgow, the Lake District, and Liverpool, as well as popping into Wales for the stunning Snowdonia national park)

7th January 2018 at 1:26 pm

Hi Mital! It really depends on your kids and grandparents and their stamina. I think this trip might be a bit much for some, and you might find it easier to go a bit slower and take things in a bit more. So perhaps a trip focusing on Edinburgh / London, with a hire car for the return journey down the west coast of the UK. I’d say three – four days in London, two to three days in Edinburgh, and then the rest of the time on the drive down the west coast would work!

Sussex Bloggers says

30th May 2017 at 12:56 pm

Can’t believe you’ve completely skipped Cornwall and the rest of the south coast. Such beautiful scenery all along the southern coastline and some wonderful towns and villages. Here’s a little teaser!

ipsita bhattacharya says

3rd May 2017 at 12:19 am

Hi guys, We are planning a trip to the UK in August/September 2017 and this 2-week itinerary is proving to be of great help! But if we plan to take public transport instead of driving, how much of this is doable? We are also looking at two weeks and while I understand taking trains/buses will eat into our travelling time, we are not sure we want to drive. Please advise. And thanks for this wonderful travel plan!

8th August 2017 at 8:56 am

Our pleasure. Much of this is doable, certainly between the major cities by train at least. We’d advice flying from the UK, likely Edinburgh to Dublin, and then back from Dublin to Cardiff or London. It’s definitely achievable in part though 🙂

Jessica says

2nd April 2017 at 1:15 am

I am so glad that I found your itinerary as we will be visiting the UK for a little over two weeks this coming summer. I do have question for a part of the trip when you have to ferry from Scotland to Ireland, is it easy to find ferries that will take your car across? Also do you recommend a car for the entire trip or to break it up with trains? Such as from London to Edinburgh? Thank you and I hope to hear back from you soon.

7th January 2018 at 1:24 pm

Hi Jessica! Sorry for the slow response. Most of the ferries take cars, but the question is as to whether or not your rental car company will let you take the car on the ferry. So you would need to check with them. If not, you might find it easier to say fly from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin to continue to journey, and perhaps pick up a hire car in Ireland instead.

Nishant says

19th March 2017 at 10:59 am

My family of 4 is planning in Aug’17 for 2 week and i like your write up here. we would be staying with our friend’s family (4 member) in LONDON and then accompany them to this tour plan. we wish to know approx budget in INR apart from AIR Ticket required for this kind of tour. Consider AIR BnB stay, Home cooking where ever possible, car drive and budgeted expense suitable for family.

แอโรคอม บริษัทจำกัด says

13th March 2017 at 8:24 am

Your 2 weeks itinerary seems very good. I am concerned with parking space in tourist attractions especially in big cities. Is it not so difficult to find parking area in all these recommended places (except London)? How much is a typical parking fee?

Thanks in advance! Pairoj S.

13th March 2017 at 2:24 pm

Thanks very much! Parking fees really vary depending on where you want to park. On road meter parking is usually the most expensive, around £3 an hour. I’d suggest finding a larger car park, like a multistorey operated by a company like NCP. These are more reasonable, and you would pay on a sliding scale where it is better value for staying for longer. I wouldn’t worry though, there is usually plenty of parking available, and sometimes if you don’t mind walking a little bit, if you don’t park centrally you can park for free. Have a great trip!

Mittal Shah says

10th March 2017 at 11:44 am

Hi Lawrence and Norah. I have been trying to plan a road trip in UK around July end for approximately 12days and have found a lot of helpful information.There are certain things i would like to know from you: For road trip should i consider hiring a caravan or a car( 4 of us travelling)? Is it better to book a hotel or bnb? Please help. Awaiting your reply

12th March 2017 at 9:47 pm

Thanks for your comment. A car would definitely be the best option, for four of you it would likely be the most cost effective option. I’d also suggest bed and breakfasts are a nice option, although there are lots of great hotels as well, it really depends on your budget,

Enjoy your trip!

rajul parikh says

19th February 2017 at 11:46 am

Hi Lawrence and Norah just been browsing through your site and taking in the information about the 2 week holiday in the UK. We find your information relevant and useful. We live in India and are considering a trip sometime mid June 2017. This would be our first trip to the UK. Lots of questions: would the weather be ok around that time? To cover your suggested itinerary (including ireland) how much driving would one end up doing everyday? Would your stops which are marked alphabetically on the map suggest overnight stay? Since we would like to spend at least 5 days in London we would need to extend our trip to about 21 days. Look forward to hearing from you.

19th February 2017 at 11:49 am

Happy that you found it useful! Yes, the main stopping points suggest an overnight stay. The weather is likely to be good in June, however, the weather in the UK can be very unpredictable. Coming from India, you’ll probably find it fairly cool 😉 I’d say between 15 and 25C would be the norm, and you should plan for rain whenever you visit the UK.

In terms of driving, the UK is quite small so not too much, probably not more than 2 – 3 hours a day.

Myn Wong says

14th February 2017 at 1:18 am

Hi. May I know the estimated cost of this trip?

George Monaghan says

30th January 2017 at 8:51 pm

Finding this site most interesting !

30th January 2017 at 8:52 pm

Thanks George, appreciated!

Dave_Toni says

18th January 2017 at 2:17 am

Hi guys, I’m staying in London for a short time (4 days) and I’m now thinking I should have booked a longer stay, but I’m on route to another destination. What would you recommend for a four day tour to get the best out of “must see” locations in in short amount of time? Really enjoying the site, keep up the great information. Thanks Dave.

18th January 2017 at 6:52 pm

Four days is a good time to see lots of London 🙂 My advice, if you’ve not been before, would be to focus on the highlights, plus allocate some time just to wander a bit. I have a two day Itinerary here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2016/06/two-day-london-itinerary-essential-sight-seeing.html That should help a bit, and then an itinerary that focuses on the region of Kensington: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2015/07/top-8-things-to-do-in-kensington.html I also have a guide for getting around London: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2016/08/guide-public-transport-london.html Some tips for the best photo spots in London: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2015/12/best-photography-locations-london.html And finally, we always recommend the London Pass to save money if you’re planning on visiting a lot of attractions. Here’s a great breakdown to find out if that’s worth it for you or not: independenttravelcats.com/2016/05/21/tips-using-buying-london-pass-worth/ Enjoy!

13th January 2017 at 10:19 am

So so perfect! Planning a 2 week UK holiday in June. This was God-sent!

13th January 2017 at 10:21 am

Wonderful, pleased you found it useful

Ashton says

5th November 2016 at 5:24 am

This is perfect! Exactly what I was looking for to start planning my honeymoon!! Thank you for taking the time to put this together

13th November 2016 at 7:58 pm

My pleasure – let us know how it goes and if there’s anything missing we can add to the post!

shiva bhavini says

16th July 2016 at 2:34 pm

Hi Laurence & Jessica, My husband and I are planning to have a 10 days UK trip , reaching London on September 16 and have return flight from london on september 26 , can you please suggest should we take some travel agent to take us around in UK ? Thanks much in advance

Ellana McNulty says

3rd July 2016 at 1:39 am

Hi Laurence & Jessica, My husband and I are planning on following your itinerary when we go over in August. When we first looked at your blog, there was a map at the end that you could zoom in on, but cannot find it now? Is the link still available.

3rd July 2016 at 11:24 am

Hi Ellana! Sorry about that, the map was causing issues for mobile users so I removed it. See comment below with a better answer!

Paul McNulty says

7th July 2016 at 12:09 am

Thanks for this Laurence!

Is it possible to have the whole route on the map like you had it before?

4th November 2016 at 11:13 pm

Hi Paul, I’ve been battling with google maps over this and gave up as it wouldn’t let me have enough waypoints. So I’ve switched to Bing Maps with the embedded image, and there’s a link to the route here: https://binged.it/2fDQGD2

Sorry for the delay!

5th November 2016 at 12:02 am

Thanks Laurence… we toured the UK in the last half of August using your itinerary. We modified it a bit to suit our personal tastes, but the basis of our trip was thanks to you. And it was even better than we expected!! Cheers.

5th November 2016 at 9:49 am

Brilliant! Delighted you had a good trip 😀

Alicia says

7th June 2017 at 3:22 am

The above link does not have a driving route in it. Is it no longer working (or I am doing it wrong)?

Unfortunately Google wouldn’t let me put together a driving route with this many stops, so this was the best I could do!

Seyne Tee says

27th June 2016 at 4:03 am

Hi Laurence & Jessica, I plan to visit UK for 2 weeks and rent a car to travel around places outside UK. Your perfect itinerary is exactly what I’m looking for, thanks! I have a problem here, I can only travel with my husband and son in the middle of November, will the weather be friendly enough to carry out activities as per your recommendation?

27th June 2016 at 9:23 am

Well, the weather in the UK can be quite varied, with sun even in November! However it will more likely be cold and grey, temperatures in the range of 3 – 10 degrees C. It will also be dark fairly early. However, that shouldn’t put you off, a lot of this itinerary is focused on the cities, and indoors activities, so you should be fine, although you might want to edit the itinerary a bit to focus more on indoor activities than outdoor ones 🙂

Stephen Mason says

9th May 2016 at 3:58 am

This trip is incredible! Can you give a price of what the final trip costed?

28th June 2016 at 11:55 am

Hi Stephen – it really depends on many factors, including your budget for accommodation / food. You can find places for £50 / night in most of the locations I’ve mentioned, food per person you could get away with £15 a day, then there’s fuel and car hire, not to mention attraction entry. I’d probably look to budgeting around £700 – £1500 per person, as a guideline, but a lot of variables to take into account 🙂

SharronJ says

8th March 2016 at 6:33 pm

This is just what I was looking for. I am planning on visiting your wonderful country for a month next year and just started doing research. Your article is just what I was looking for Thanks so much!

8th March 2016 at 6:35 pm

My pleasure! Have a wonderful trip 🙂

Edward says

17th January 2016 at 11:32 pm

Thank you for this. I will be going in UK late Spetember to October (one month) and this is a nice itnerary and I can do it in a slower pace. Would you say September and October is a good time to do this? How is the weather usually in those months?

2nd February 2016 at 2:47 am

It’s the Autum time so you might fair pretty well, considering. It starts to cool down in September and the trees start changing. There will be rain, especially in the West of England and Wales but there always is.

The best time to visit England is May – August, but if you don’t mind getting caught in the rain now and then, you shouldn’t have a problem

Joanne says

12th October 2015 at 2:18 pm

Is it possible to do this itinerary relying only on public transportation since I don’t drive? Thank you in advance.

12th October 2015 at 2:21 pm

Good parts of it are certainly possible, as the major cities are linked by public transport, and the trains in particular are an excellent and fast way to get around. One tip – book well in advance on specific trains to get the best prices in the UK, the fares you pay on the day are much higher. I’d also suggest flying from Edinburgh to Dublin if you wanted to include the Irish part of the trip.

You might have a bit more difficulty visiting places like the Cotswolds or other “country” parts on your own, however there are plenty of tour operators who can give you a day trip out from London to say the Cotswolds and Stonehenge.

On the whole though, yes, the majority of this itinerary would be more than do-able by public transport!

Nina Tchernova says

7th October 2015 at 2:43 pm

Hi Laurence, thank you so much for sharing this! We are planning to go in April, and this is exactly what we were hoping to do. And here it all is, so wonderfully explored and illustrated! One question though – what would you recommend about car rentals -one, or three? when we cross on a ferry to Ireland, do we bring the car, or is it better to rent another one there, and then another when we get back?

10th October 2015 at 1:14 pm

My pleasure 🙂 The answer to your question isn’t as simple as it sounds. One way rentals, as you’d need if you were to change cars, are generally more expensive than returning the car to the same place. On the other hand, a ferry ticket without a car is cheaper! So you might want to just check the math and see, depending on your budget. Personally, I’d not bother with the hassle of changing cars and just stick with the same one, you just need to check that it’s ok to drive the car in Ireland as well 🙂

10th October 2015 at 1:28 pm

Thank you very much, we will have to make a few enquiries.

Darryl Chan says

24th August 2015 at 6:03 pm

Hey! Love your itinerary! Is there anyway I can contact you to get more personalised advices from you? Looking forward to your reply!

27th August 2015 at 5:28 pm

Sure, you can just drop me an e-mail via the contact page on the site, or just fire away in the comments and I’ll see what I can do,

17th August 2015 at 4:58 am

Where’s the castle in your first picture?

25th September 2015 at 8:51 pm

The castle in the first picture (with the daffodils) is Alnwick castle in Northumberland. Home to Harry Potter or at least the was some filming taken place there and also some of Downtown Abbey. Alnwick is also home to Barter Books where the original ‘keep calm and carry on’ poster was discovered. Northumberland has one of the largest number of castles in the uk. Some of the most impressive I think are Bamburgh Castle, Lindisfarne Castle (on holy island – which needs a visit itself) and Chillingham Castle (known for being pretty spooky). Contact Wooler Tourist Infomation Office on +44 1668 282123 to learn about accommodation as Wooler is a fantastic base for the best of Northumberland.

25th September 2015 at 9:02 pm

Can I also say there is an awesome place for Brits and tourists alike; Beamish, the living museum. It is an outdoor village fashioned perfectly on olden days northern England complete with coal mine, dentis, working sweet shop and more

Monica says

11th August 2015 at 8:16 pm

I loved you itinerary and pictures. I’m definitely using your steps to trace some of my own. Thanks for sharing. I’m excited to read through more of your posts.

15th August 2015 at 8:32 pm

Thanks Monica, have a great trip!

3rd August 2015 at 9:50 pm

Great review of a nice trip through GB. My wife and I are trying to plan one for May, and we were thinking of spending more time in Scottland. Do you have any suggestions for moving from Endinburgh and into the northern part of Scotland and skipping Ireland. I thinking about Aberdeen and stopping by Ben Nevis, but it’s our first time traveling abroad and I’d love more information. Thanks!

3rd August 2015 at 11:49 pm

Hi Andy! To be honest I’ve not spent a lot of time in Scotland recently, but I can very much recommend taking the time to visit Glencoe. It’s a couple of hours from Edinburgh, and is an absolutely stunning valley in the highlands. I’ve also heard nothing but good things about the isle of Skye! Sorry I can’t be of much more help right now 🙁

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Let me know when there's a reply to my comment (just replies to your comment, no other e-mails, we promise!)

Subscribe to our monthly Newsletter where we share our latest travel news and tips. This also makes you eligible to enter our monthly giveaways!

We only ask for your e-mail so we can verify you are human and if requested notify you of a reply. To do this, we store your data as outlined in our privacy policy . Your e-mail will not be published or used for any other reason other than those outlined above.

Deals of the Week   European Long Weekends   Up to 50% OFF

10 Day England, Ireland and Scotland Tours & Trips

Filter for departure dates and price to find the right 10 day England, Ireland and Scotland tour with TourRadar. Choose from 12 trips with 1,273 customer reviews, that range from 8 up to 10 days.

Filters applied

12 england, ireland and scotland 10 day tour packages with 1,273 reviews.

• In-depth Cultural
• Coach / Bus

Essential Britain & Ireland

Covered alot of ground and very busy of course with never enough time, but that was expected. Great driver, found tour director somewhat unenthusiastic - would have liked more concise info on how each day was going to progress and a little more interaction with the group. Hotel Metropole was so hot and too noisy to have window open - most of the hotel rooms were so hot all night. Holiday Inn York room was rather well tread and dirty. Other than that a great trip with excellent meals except the dinner at Holiday Inn York.

Britain and Ireland Delight (Summer, 10 Days)

Wonderful tour guide and driver. Very professional

• Sightseeing
• Christmas & New Year

United Kingdom and Ireland ( 10 days )

Britain and Ireland Delight (Winter, 8 Days)

Nicky and Adam were wonderful. I would travel again with this dream team anytime!

England Scotland Ireland – Highlights of UK

Britain and Ireland Delight (Winter, 10 Days)

This was my husband and I’s first time in Europe. I would definitely recommend to my friends and family! Our travel guide Chris was amazing and made sure everything ran smoothly!

Britain and Ireland Highlights (8 Days)

I enjoyed most of this tour very much. It was tiring and I did need to opt out of one nights entertainment but generally was good value for money, entertaining & informative.

• €100 deposit on some dates Some departure dates offer you the chance to book this tour with a lower deposit.

Aonghus Youth

Jose is a very knowledgeable, talented, and made our tour exceptionally fun at all times - very entertaining as well !!!

Britain and Ireland Delight (Summer, 8 Days)

Was great both Christian and our bus driver were amazing .had a great time with some great people . Thanks very much

10-Day United Kingdom and Ireland

Jose the tourist guide was excellent, the hotels except for the last one were very good, the landscape and scenery was amazing, very recommended

Britain and Ireland Highlights (10 Days)

Our director was great. Except the first 2 days there was a growing feud between he and the bus driver. The driver was replaced and that went away. This was our first coach tour and for me it had goods and bands. The highlights that we saw were all great Hotels were good Food was good enough... I miss sell exploring! And the things that pop up along the way.

Other Regions in England, Ireland and Scotland

• South Luangwa National Park 1 month+ Tours (9)
• South Luangwa National Park 3 week Tours (5)

International Versions

• Deutsch: 10 Tage England-Irland-Schottland Rundreisen
• Français: Circuits Angleterre, Irlande et Écosse de 10 Jours
• Español: Circuitos por Inglaterra, Irlanda y Escocia de 10 Días
• Nederlands: 10-Daagse rondreis Engeland, Ierland en Schotland

Train strikes in April and May 2024: Full list of dates and lines affected

Overtime bans, an action short of a strike, also mean some services may not be running or may be reduced as drivers refuse to work their rest days.

Monday 8 April 2024 06:40, UK

Drivers at 16 rail companies have started a fresh wave of strikes, plus overtime bans, causing disruption to the rail network.

The strikes are part of a long-running dispute over pay and will take place across April and May.

Tube strikes planned for April and May have been called off.

In an "entirely separate dispute", ASLEF members will also strike and refuse to do overtime at LNER on specific dates in April "because of the company's failure to adhere to the agreed bargaining machinery", the union said.

LNER's alleged failure to adhere to bargaining machinery refers to it using managers to drive trains on strike days.

People are advised to check before they travel.

Here's what's happening when:

Rail strike dates

Friday 5 April

Strikes will affect Avanti West Coast, East Midlands Railway, West Midlands Trains, and CrossCountry.

Saturday 6 April

Strikes will affect Chiltern, GWR, LNER, Northern, and TransPennine Trains.

Monday 8 April

Strikes will affect Greater Anglia, c2c, GTR Great Northern Thameslink, Southeastern, Southern/Gatwick Express, South Western Railway main line and depot drivers, and SWR Island Line.

Overtime ban dates

Thursday 4 April

Tuesday 9 April

People are advised to check before they travel, as some areas may have no service.

LNER action dates

Members will strike on Saturday 20 April and refuse to work non-contractual overtime from Friday 19 to Sunday 21 April .

Why are the strikes happening?

ASLEF says the LNER strikes are because of "the company's persistent failure to comply with existing agreements".

Nigel Roebuck, an ASLEF organiser in the northeast, said the operator had been trying to get "every driver manager and driver instructor to work on strike days".

A spokesperson said: "LNER has used managers - paid £500 a shift - to drive trains on strike days and, after the expiry of the last non-contractual overtime agreement, on most days of the week now.

"There is no agreement in place for management to drive services on mainline infrastructure.

"It results in branch line services - such as Lincoln, Skipton, and Harrogate - being cancelled because of a lack of route knowledge and means virtually no driver training is being done."

Keep up with all the latest news from the UK and around the world by following Sky News

Mick Whelan, ASLEF general secretary, said of the rail strikes : "Last month, when we announced renewed mandates for industrial action, because under the Tories' draconian anti-union laws we have to ballot our members every six months, we called on the train companies, and the government, to come to the table for meaningful talks to negotiate a new pay deal for train drivers who have not had an increase in salary since 2019.

"Our members voted overwhelmingly - yet again - for strike action."

Be the first to get Breaking News

Install the Sky News app for free

A Rail Delivery Group spokesperson said: "Nobody wins when industrial action impacts people's lives and livelihoods, and we will work hard to minimise any disruption to our passengers.

"We want to resolve this dispute, but the ASLEF leadership need to recognise that hard-pressed taxpayers are continuing to contribute an extra £54m a week just to keep services running post-COVID.

"We continue to seek an agreement with the ASLEF leadership and remain open to talks to find a solution to this dispute."

When the strikes on the London Underground were announced, Finn Brennan, ASLEF's full-time organiser on the network, said in a statement: "ASLEF Tube train drivers will strike in April and May in a long-running dispute over London Underground's failure to give assurances that changes to our members' terms and conditions will not be imposed without agreement and that all existing agreements will be honoured.

"Despite a previous commitment to withdraw plans for massive changes to drivers' working conditions, London Underground management has established a full-time team of managers preparing to impose their plans.

Sadiq Khan said they had been called off after "talking and engaging with transport staff and trade unions rather than working against them".

Related Topics

• London Underground
• Rail strikes

TechBullion

Experience the best of british countryside: affordable day trip ideas in the uk.

Are you itching to escape the hustle and bustle of the city and immerse yourself in the serene beauty of the British countryside? Look no further! In this blog post, we have rounded up some affordable day trip ideas that will allow you to experience the very best of what rural UK has to offer. From charming villages to stunning landscapes, get ready to explore and reconnect with nature on a budget-friendly adventure like never before. Let’s hit the road and discover hidden gems right at your doorstep!

The Charm of British Countryside

When one thinks of the United Kingdom, images of bustling cities like London or historic sites like Stonehenge may come to mind. However, there is another side to this diverse country – its breathtaking countryside. The UK boasts an abundance of natural beauty and rural charm that often goes unnoticed by travelers. From rolling hills and lush forests to quaint villages and idyllic landscapes, the British countryside has a unique charm that captures the hearts of visitors.

One of the main draws of exploring the British countryside is its affordability. Unlike popular tourist destinations that can be expensive, a day trip to the countryside can be budget-friendly without skimping on experiences. With a variety of activities and destinations to choose from, you can tailor your trip to fit your preferences and budget.

The UK is home to numerous National Parks such as Lake District, Peak District, Snowdonia, and Loch Lomond & The Trossachs among others. These parks offer endless opportunities for outdoor adventures like hiking, camping, wildlife spotting, and scenic drives. The stunning landscapes will leave you awe-inspired as you immerse yourself in nature’s splendor.

Benefits of Taking Day Trips in the UK

One of the main advantages of taking day trips in the UK is affordability. With various transportation options available such as trains, buses, and coaches, it has become increasingly easy and affordable to explore different parts of the country without breaking the bank. Day tickets for public transport are often cheaper than longer journeys or overnight stays, allowing you to save money while still experiencing new places.

Another benefit is convenience. With its compact size, navigating through different regions in the UK is relatively easy and efficient. You can take advantage of well-planned transport routes that connect major cities with smaller towns and villages, making it possible to visit multiple destinations in just one day.

Day trips also offer a great opportunity to experience the best of British countryside. With breathtaking landscapes ranging from rolling hills and lush greenery to rugged coastlines and stunning national parks, there is no shortage of natural beauty in this diverse island nation. Taking a day trip allows you to immerse yourself in these picturesque surroundings at your own pace without having to worry about accommodation or lengthy travel times.

In addition, day trips provide an excellent way to discover local culture and heritage. Many historic towns and cities across the UK offer guided tours or events dedicated to showcasing their unique traditions, customs, and architecture. You can also opt for self-guided tours or simply wander around charming villages at your leisure, giving you a taste of authentic British life.

Day trips also allow for flexibility in planning your itinerary according to your personal interests and preferences. Whether you want an adrenaline-filled adventure or a quiet retreat surrounded by nature, there is something for everyone within reach on a day trip.

Tips for Planning Your Day Trip

1. Research and Choose Your Destination: The first step to planning a successful day trip is deciding on your destination. With so many beautiful countryside spots in the UK, it can be overwhelming to choose just one. Therefore, start by researching popular day trip destinations and narrow down your options based on your interests and budget.

2. Plan Your Mode of Transportation: Once you have selected your destination, it’s time to plan how you will get there. Depending on the location and distance, you may choose to drive, take public transportation or join a guided tour. Be sure to consider factors like cost, convenience, and any potential traffic or road closures when making this decision.

3. Set a Budget: Day trips are meant to be affordable adventures, but it’s crucial to set a budget beforehand. Consider all costs involved such as transportation, food, activities, and any entrance fees that may apply at your chosen destination.

4. Pack Appropriately: As most day trips involve spending time outdoors in the countryside, make sure you pack accordingly. Comfortable shoes for walking or hiking are essential along with weather-appropriate clothing layers and sunscreen.

5. Plan Your Activities: Many popular countryside destinations offer various activities such as hiking trails, wildlife spotting tours or historical sites visits. Research these options beforehand and decide which ones interest you the most so that you don’t miss out on anything during your trip.

6 Pertinent Documents: Some countryside locations may require permits or passes for entry or certain activities like fishing or boating excursions. Make sure to check beforehand if any documents are needed for where you plan on visiting to avoid disappointment.

7 Organize Food Options: If your chosen destination does not have dining options nearby or if you prefer a packed lunch during your trip; be sure to pack enough water and snacks for everyone in your group!

8 Have Backup Plans Ready:

While we always hope things will go according to plan, be prepared for unforeseen circumstances. Have backup plans and alternate activities in mind in case the weather or other factors prevent you from partaking in your original planned activities.

9. Consider Time Management: Day trips are limited by time, so it’s essential to plan accordingly. Consider alternative routes to avoid traffic and map out the most efficient way to get from one activity to another throughout the day.

10 Affordable Day Trip Ideas:

10 affordable day trip ideas that will allow you to experience all that the UK has to offer without spending a fortune.

1. Visit a National Trust property – The National Trust has over 500 historic houses, parks, and gardens across the UK that are open to the public. With affordable admission prices and stunning scenery, these properties make for a perfect day trip.

2. Go on a hike – Lace up your hiking boots and explore some of the breathtaking trails in the UK. From coastal paths to mountainside climbs, there’s something for every level of hiker.

3. Picnic in the park – Pack a basket full of goodies and head to one of Britain’s many beautiful parks for a budget-friendly day out in nature.

4. Explore a new town or city – Take advantage of discounted train tickets or hop on a local bus and discover new towns or cities within reach for an affordable change of scenery.

5. Enjoy an outdoor concert or festival – During the warmer months, there are plenty of free or inexpensive music festivals and concerts happening throughout the country, making for an entertaining day trip option.

6. Discover hidden gems with geocaching – Geocaching is like modern-day treasure hunting using GPS coordinates. It’s completely free (unless you decide to buy your own GPS device), and can lead you to some unique spots in the countryside.

7. Relax at a beach – The UK may not always be known for its sunny beaches, but it does have some stunning coastlines where you can enjoy relaxing by the seaside without spending much money at all.

8. Take advantage of free museums and galleries – Many museums and art galleries in Britain offer free entry or have specific days when they do not charge admission fees, so take advantage and spend your day exploring history or admiring art.

9. Go fruit picking – The UK boasts many orchards and farms where you can pick your own fruits such as strawberries and apples for a fun and affordable day out with the family.

10. Visit a local market – From fresh produce to handcrafted goods, local markets are always bustling with energy and offer a unique experience that won’t break the bank.

With these 10 affordable day trip ideas, you’re sure to find something that fits your budget and satisfies your craving for adventure in the scenic British countryside. So pack your bags, grab a map, and get ready to explore all that the UK has to offer without spending a fortune.

From the rolling hills of the Cotswolds to the rugged coastline of Cornwall, there is so much beauty and charm to be discovered in the British countryside. With these affordable day trip ideas, you can experience some of the best sights and activities that rural UK has to offer. So, pack up your bags and head out for a budget-friendly adventure filled with stunning scenery, delicious food, and unforgettable experiences that will leave you falling in love with the British countryside. What are you waiting for? Get out there and start exploring!

Recommended for you

Trending Stories

Mozz Guard Reviews (Updated): Does Mozz Guard Mosquito Zapper Really Work?

Mozz Guard has over 12,700 reviews worldwide and a customer rating of 4.8 out...

The US Bitcoin ETF In South Korea’s Elections

Major political parties compete for the support of cryptocurrency traders in the run-up to...

Binomo Mastery dominates the Markets with Expert Trading Techniques

Leaving on an excursion into the universe of exchanging can be both elating and...

Demand On Copyright for Data From AI Chatbots

AI chatbots that replicate literary, artistic, and other creative works are having copyright issues,...

The Importance of Hiring an Expert Firm for SEO for Lawyers and Law Firms

In the competitive legal industry, establishing a strong online presence is essential for attracting...

Verve Trading Signals Reviews – Why We Reccomend Them

Recently, the realm of online trading has witnessed a surge in popularity, as individuals...

The CFPB Alerts Users To Crypto-Integrated Gaming Platform Scams

A CFPB investigation exposes cryptocurrency scams in the gaming industry and cautions against combining...

Innovation and Technology In The UAE: Leading The Future

The United Arab Emirates, a beacon of modernity and innovation in the Middle East,...

Sending Animated GIFs in Email is Important or Not

Electronic mail online marketers are increasingly switching to animated GIFs in an email to...

Building Connections in Web3: An Inside Look at Philcoin’s Platform

In recent years, digital platforms have increasingly become battlegrounds for privacy invasions and negativity,...

Stanislav Kondrashov Telf AG: JSW Steel is preparing to launch a new blast furnace

  Indian corporation JSW Steel plans to commission a new steel plant at its...

Buy Gold and Silver with Bitcoin: A New Way to Invest

Buying gold and silver with Bitcoin is revolutionizing investment opportunities allowing investors to merge...

Excel: From Beginner to Power User – Your Guide to Mastering the Spreadsheet

Introduction Spreadsheets are among the most versatile and widely used business software globally. From...

Futuristic Fusion: AI Meets Blockchain – Gate.io and AWS to Co-Host Hong Kong Web3 Festival Side Event

Gate.io, a leading cryptocurrency exchange on a global scale, is pleased to announce its...

Tokenizing Loyalty: Interview with Andrew Doxsey, Co-Founder and CEO of Libra Incentix

In today’s context of hyper-competitive market, investing in loyalty programs that leverage decentralized finance...

Investing in Quality HVAC Software Solutions: Elevate Your Sales Process

As precision and efficiency evolve in the dynamic world of HVAC, investing in quality...

Snapi AI Launches All-in-One Generative AI Platform

Snapi AI, a new startup in the generative AI space, has officially launched its...

The Benefits of Wood Burning Sauna Stoves: A Natural and Invigorating Experience

When it comes to sauna experiences, the type of stove you choose can make...

Los Angeles with Kids: 12 Splendid Tours

Are you traveling with the children to LA? This post is for you! right...

Fete Planning Guide: Top Reasons Why You Need a Reliable Fete Ticketing Platform to Promote Your Event in 2024

Are you looking to organize a fete or event in the coming weeks or...

Like Us On Facebook

Latest interview.

A Leading Brand In Boxing & Martial Arts Gear: Interview with Ken Clement, CEO of Hayabusa Fightwear

As a top brand in boxing and martial arts gear, Hayabusa Fightwear is renowned for its elite-level products, trusted by professional fighters...

Latest Press Release

NTT DATA and Reiz Tech Announce New Venture to Target DACH 

The joint venture – LITIT — built on previous collaborative successes of its parent companies, aims to transform the IT landscape of...

Pin It on Pinterest